WO2004091272A1 - Electronic circuit component supplying device and electronic circuit component mounting machine - Google Patents

Electronic circuit component supplying device and electronic circuit component mounting machine Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2004091272A1
WO2004091272A1 PCT/JP2004/004731 JP2004004731W WO2004091272A1 WO 2004091272 A1 WO2004091272 A1 WO 2004091272A1 JP 2004004731 W JP2004004731 W JP 2004004731W WO 2004091272 A1 WO2004091272 A1 WO 2004091272A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
component
pallet
rack
electronic circuit
container
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2004/004731
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
Hiroshi Katsumi
Takehisa Ishikawa
Original Assignee
Fuji Machine Mfg. Co., Ltd.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Fuji Machine Mfg. Co., Ltd. filed Critical Fuji Machine Mfg. Co., Ltd.
Priority to JP2005505230A priority Critical patent/JP4484819B2/en
Publication of WO2004091272A1 publication Critical patent/WO2004091272A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05KPRINTED CIRCUITS; CASINGS OR CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF ELECTRIC APPARATUS; MANUFACTURE OF ASSEMBLAGES OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
    • H05K13/00Apparatus or processes specially adapted for manufacturing or adjusting assemblages of electric components
    • H05K13/02Feeding of components
    • H05K13/021Loading or unloading of containers

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to an electronic circuit component supply apparatus, and in particular, to a component container in which a plurality of electronic bright circuit components are removably accommodated in each of a plurality of component accommodation units arranged in a plane so as to take out the electronic circuit components. This is related to improving the supply accuracy of the supply device. . ' book
  • a tray containing electronic circuit components is supported by a pallet and electronically.
  • the tray is provided with a plurality of component receiving recesses in one plane, each of which holds an electronic circuit component.
  • a plurality of pallets supporting a tray are respectively set on a plurality of tray setters supported by an elevating member, and are held vertically by the elevating member.
  • a plurality of pallets are sequentially positioned at a preset component supply position by raising and lowering the lifting member by the lifting device.
  • a pallet moving device is provided at the component supply position. The pallet positioned at the component supply position is moved horizontally to take it out of the tray setter, and to take out electronic circuit components contained in the tray. Move to the allowed position. Disclosure of the invention
  • the tray setter is supported so as to be able to be pulled out from the elevating member, and the pallet is merely placed on the tray setter.
  • the pallet and the pallet move relative to the pallet and the pallet due to the impact applied to the pallet by the acceleration and deceleration at the start and stop of the lift.
  • the electronic circuit components contained in the tray may shift or change posture, and the supply of the electronic circuit components may not be reliable or accurate.
  • the pallet When the pallet is moved by the pallet moving device, the pallet is supported from below by a pair of supports provided on the frame. However, since the movement in the left and right directions is not restricted, the impact applied when the movement starts and stops In addition, the pallet may vibrate due to sliding resistance between the support and the supporting portion, and the electronic circuit components may be displaced.
  • the pallet moving speed of the pallet moving device is reduced by lowering the pallet moving speed, vibration can be suppressed.However, it takes time to position the pallet to the parts supply position and the parts removal allowable position. However, supply efficiency is reduced.
  • the present invention provides an electronic circuit component supply device that accommodates and supplies electronic circuit components to each of a plurality of component storage units provided in a planar shape of a component container.
  • the object of the present invention is to improve the reliability or accuracy of the supply while suppressing the decrease.
  • the following electronic circuit component supply device and electronic circuit component mounting machine can be obtained.
  • each mode is divided into sections, each section is numbered, and if necessary, the form is cited in a form in which the numbers of other sections are cited. This is merely to facilitate understanding of the present invention, and it should not be construed that the technical features and combinations thereof described in this specification are limited to those described in the following sections. Absent.
  • when two or more items are described in one section it is not always necessary to adopt these items together. It is also possible to select and adopt only some of the matters.
  • a plurality of component housings each having a plurality of component housings arranged in a plane, and each of the component housings accommodating an electronic circuit component one by one, and a plurality of the components.
  • a rack including a plurality of component container holding portions each of which holds at least one of the containers so as to be movable in a direction parallel to a component receiving plane in which the component receiving portion is arranged;
  • a rack elevating device that raises and lowers the rack in a direction intersecting with the component storage plane; When the rack elevating device is stopped, the component container is moved in a direction parallel to the component storage plane, and the storage position stored in the rack, and the electronic circuit component pulled out of the rack and stored in the component storage unit And a parts container moving device that moves the parts
  • An electronic circuit component supply device including:
  • An electronic circuit component supply including a vibration suppressing device that suppresses vibration of the component container at least one of when the rack is moved up and down by the rack elevating device and when the component container is moved by the component container moving device. apparatus.
  • the component container may directly accommodate electronic circuit components, or may indirectly accommodate electronic circuit components via a tray, such as a tray pallet.
  • a tray such as a tray pallet.
  • the component housing is provided in the component housing itself, and in the latter, the tray provided with the component housing is housed in the component housing, so that the component housing of the tray becomes the part of the component housing. It will function as a product storage unit.
  • the component accommodating portion is, for example, a component accommodating recess for accommodating and positioning the electronic circuit component.
  • the component storage plane is not limited to one plane, and may be a multi-level plane (for example, when the component storage unit is a component storage recess, the depth of the component storage recess is different in one component container).
  • the rack has a plurality of component container holders, and at least one component container is held in each of the component container holders in the same posture as when electronic circuit components are supplied, and is moved up and down by the elevating device. Anything should do.
  • the component container has only two openings that open in both the forward and reverse directions of movement by the component container moving device, and the component container can be attached and detached only in the opening direction.
  • the component container may be stored so as to cover all of them.
  • a plurality of plate-like component container holding members arranged in multiple stages each have a component container holding portion provided to cover the component container. It may be stored without.
  • the rack elevating device preferably moves the rack up and down to sequentially position each of the component containers respectively held by the plurality of component container holding units at the component supply position. It is desirable that the component containers positioned at those component supply positions be pulled out of the rack.
  • the electronic circuit component supply device of this section at least one of the vibration of the component container when the rack is moved up and down and the vibration when the component container is moved by the component container moving device are suppressed. Vibration can be suppressed without reducing the speed of moving the rack up and down or moving the parts container, so that the supply efficiency can be improved while suppressing the decrease in supply efficiency.
  • the vibration of the component case is suppressed both when the rack is moved up and down and when the component case is moved, the vibration is best suppressed. As a result, it is possible to minimize the drop in the supply efficiency and to reduce the occurrence of an error in taking out the electronic circuit component from the component housing due to the shift or change in the posture of the electronic circuit component, or to reduce the error in the holding position of the electronic circuit component by the component holder.
  • the vibration suppressing device includes a relative movement preventing device that prevents relative movement between the rack and each of the plurality of component containers at least when the rack moves up and down.
  • the electronic circuit component supply device according to item (1).
  • the component container If the component container is prevented from moving relative to the rack, the component container does not move relative to the rack even if an impact is applied to the component container when the rack moves up and down, and the component container is moved to the rack. Vibration of the parts container is suppressed as compared with the case where the parts can be moved relative to.
  • the relative movement preventing device may be, for example, a component container holding device that holds the component container by a holding member and prevents movement of the component container with respect to the rack.
  • the component container holding device may be, for example, a component container holding device that holds a component container and fixes it to a rack, as in the electronic circuit component supply device described in (3), or A component container suction device including a suction member that suctions and holds the component container may be used.
  • the relative movement preventing device is provided at a portion corresponding to each of the plurality of component container holding portions of the rack, and the component container held by the component container holding portions is provided.
  • the electronic circuit component supply device according to (2) including a component container gripping device that is fixed to the rack by gripping.
  • the component container is fixed to the rack by the component container holding device, so that movement of the component container relative to the rack is prevented, and vibration is suppressed.
  • the component container holding device includes a first holding member and a second component provided at a pair of two positions of the rack separated from each other in a moving direction of the component container by the component container moving device.
  • the electronic circuit component according to (3) including: a gripping member; and a pair of first gripping member driving devices and a second gripping member driving device that respectively drive the pair of gripping members independently of each other. Feeding device.
  • the first and second gripping members are driven by the first and second gripping member driving devices, respectively, and are moved to a gripping position for gripping the component container and a release position for releasing.
  • the two first gripping members are provided in a plane parallel to the component housing plane and separated from each other in a direction intersecting with the component container moving direction.
  • the component container is configured such that the first and second gripping members engage with each other at four positions separated from each other in a plane parallel to the component storage plane, and thereby the components are stored in a plane parallel to the component storage plane.
  • the two parts separated from each other in the direction intersecting the container movement direction are gripped by the first gripping member and the second gripping member, respectively, and are firmly fixed to the rack, and the vibration is favorably suppressed.
  • Each of the pair of first gripping member driving devices and the second gripping member driving devices is provided with a plurality of first gripping members and a second gripping portion provided for each of the plurality of component container holders.
  • the electronic circuit component supply device according to (4) which is provided commonly to the members. According to this aspect, the component container holding device can be easily configured.
  • the vertical direction of the rack is the vertical direction
  • the component receiving plane is a horizontal plane
  • the first gripping member and the second gripping member are provided on the rack so as to be rotatable around a vertical axis.
  • the first gripping member driving device and the second gripping member driving device include a first gripping claw rotation device and a second gripping claw rotation device, respectively.
  • the first and second gripping claws may be linearly moving claws, but if they are rotating claws, for example, the gripping claws require less space for movement for gripping and releasing the component container.
  • the component container holding device can be configured compactly.
  • a rotation limit specifying device that defines a rotation limit of the first gripping claw in a direction of gripping the component container, wherein the driving force of the second gripping claw driving device is the first gripping claw driving device.
  • the second gripping claw engages with the engaged portion of the component container when gripping the component container, and the engaging portion contacts the engaged portion.
  • the second gripping claw can be made of a leaf spring material.
  • the portion of the leaf spring material that engages with the engaged portion functions as an engaging portion, and the portion between the engaging portion and the base end portion functions as an elastic deformation portion.
  • a fixed member and a movable member are connected to each other so that the second gripping claws can move relative to each other (either relative rotation or relative parallel movement), and an elastic member disposed between the two members. It is also possible to use
  • the movable member functions as an engaging portion that engages with the engaged portion.
  • the second gripping claw is configured such that, after the engaging portion is engaged with the engaged portion and the first and second gripping claws are both engaged with the component container, the elastically deforming portion is further elastically deformed.
  • the first and second gripping pawls can reliably grip the component container. Also, even if there is a manufacturing error or the like in the component container or the first and second gripping claws, it is absorbed by the elastic deformation of the elastically deforming portion, and the component container is not damaged.
  • the component container can be securely held.
  • the second gripping claw elastically engages with the component container, and the first and second gripping claws securely grip the component container. Due to the frictional force between the components, the relative movement between the component container and the rack in the direction intersecting with the component receiving plane and in the direction intersecting with the component container moving direction in the component receiving plane is regulated, and vibration is suppressed. .
  • the component container holding portion includes a pair of rails provided so as to extend in parallel with a moving direction of the component container by the component container moving device, and the component container is provided on the pair of rails.
  • the electronic circuit component supply device according to any one of (1) to (9), including a pair of supported portions to be supported.
  • the transport conveyor holds a pair of endless transport members, a circulating drive for rotating the endless transport members along a predetermined path, and a held portion of the component container.
  • a holder that moves at the same speed as the pair of endless transport members, and the pair of endless transport members are rotated by the orbital driving device in a state where the holders hold the held portions of the component container.
  • the component container is transferred from the component container holder of the rack onto the pair of endless transport members, and
  • the electronic circuit component supply device according to the above mode (11), wherein the configuration adapted to be further conveyed constitutes the vibration suppressing device.
  • a dedicated holder moving device It is also possible to move the holder at the same speed as the endless transport member by a dedicated holder moving device. However, if the holder is attached to the pair of endless transport members, a dedicated holder moving device can be omitted. It is desirable that the holder is driven by a holder driving device provided on the conveyor to hold and release the held portion. Examples of the endless transport member include a belt and a chain.
  • the component container By moving the holder at the same speed as the endless transport member, the component container is moved at the same speed as the endless transport member. Therefore, the endless transport member and the component container move physically, there is no slippage between them, and the component container is carried on the endless transport member without being held by the holder. In such a case, the component container and the endless transport member are prevented from vibrating due to repeated relative movement and integral movement. Also, the parts container slides against the surface that supports it. In this case, the vibration of the component container can be reduced as compared with the case where the component container is mounted, and the component container and the surface supporting the component container are not worn, so that the life is improved.
  • the transport conveyor transports the component container by a pair of endless transport members, it should be stably supported and transported while reducing the supporting area of the component container by the endless transport member.
  • the conveyor may have one endless conveying member.
  • the component container is supported by one wide belt. And may be transported.
  • the vibration of the component container is suppressed by the elastic deformation of the endless transport member and the vibration damping due to internal friction.
  • the conveyor belt is a timing belt provided with a large number of teeth on an outer peripheral surface
  • the circling drive device includes:
  • a belt support member for supporting an inner peripheral surface of a portion of the timing belt supporting the component container
  • the electronic circuit component supply device comprising:
  • the belt support member is, for example, a guide pulley or a guide rail. If a timing belt is used as the endless transport member, there is no slippage between the endless transport member and the orbiting driving device, and the endless transport member can be accurately rotated to position the component container accurately.
  • the timing belt is provided with a large number of teeth on the outer peripheral surface, and the belt supporting member supports the flat inner peripheral surface of the timing belt, so that the vibration when the timing belt rotates can be suppressed.
  • the conveyor belt is a timing belt that has teeth on the inner peripheral surface, many teeth of the timing belt and the belt support member repeatedly collide with each other and can easily cause vibration.
  • the support belt is a guide belt or a guide pulley, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of vibration due to repeated collision with the teeth. In particular, if the supporting member is a guide pulley, there is no slip with the timing belt, and the generation of vibrations can be more favorably avoided.
  • the belt support member is a guide rail
  • the contact surfaces between the guide rail and the timing belt be formed of a low friction material.
  • the low friction material can be made of, for example, polytetrafluoroethylene.
  • the antifriction material layer forms the main body. If it is formed of a material having a lower friction coefficient than the material, an antifriction effect can be obtained.
  • the electronic circuit component supply device according to any one of (11) to (14), including a guide device for guiding movement of the component container by the component container moving device.
  • the guide member is, for example, a rail or a roller.
  • Each of the pair of guide members has a rail shape, one is a fixed rail, and the other is a movable rail provided so as to be able to approach and separate from the fixed rail, and the movable rail is approaching the fixed rail.
  • the electronic circuit component supply device according to the above mode, further comprising an urging device that urges the vibration device in a direction in which the vibration suppressing device is configured.
  • the movable rail elastically sandwiches the component container between the fixed rail and the movable rail, prevents vibration in a direction intersecting the moving direction of the component container in the component receiving plane of the component container, and reduces vibration of the component container. Is suppressed.
  • the electronic circuit component supply device according to any one of (12) to (17), including an acceleration / deceleration control unit, wherein the acceleration / deceleration control unit constitutes the vibration suppression device.
  • the acceleration and deceleration are smoothly increased and decreased at the start and end of the transport of the component container, respectively, and the component container starts moving with little impact. , Stopped, and vibration of the parts container at the start and stop of movement is suppressed.
  • vibration absorbing material examples include a porous resin such as a foamed resin, for example, foamable polyethylene.
  • the tray does not easily vibrate, and the displacement of the electronic circuit component can be reduced.
  • the vibration suppressing device includes a restraining device for restraining the tray supported by the pallet immovably with respect to the pallet in a direction parallel to the component receiving plane.
  • Electronic circuit parts supply equipment
  • the electronic circuit component supply device of this section when the tray is moved together with the pallet by raising and lowering and moving the pallet, the tray does not move with respect to the pallet, and the predetermined position in the pallet is maintained. In this way, electronic circuit components can be supplied, and vibration is suppressed.
  • the pallet can be easily handled by the operator, the drive source of the rack elevating device can be made small, and even if the tray is heavy, it is hard to bend and can be favorably supported.
  • the thickness can be reduced as compared with the case where the whole is made of a metal material. For example, the space occupied in a rack is small, and for example, more space is required.
  • the tray can be supported, or it can be stored in a rack with a margin.
  • the metal material layer is made of a conductive metal, it is possible to prevent pallets and trays from being charged, thereby preventing static electricity from being generated.
  • the vibration suppressing device includes a restraint device for restraining the tray supported by the pallet immovably in a direction parallel to the component housing plane, wherein the metal material layer is a magnetic material layer.
  • the restraining member is detachably fixed to the pallet by magnetic force, and restrains the tray immovably.
  • the restraining member can be fixed at any position on the pallet, and can be used to restrain a plurality of types of trays having different shapes, dimensions, and the like.
  • the vibration suppression device is configured to have at least a relative height error between the rack elevating device and the component container moving device and a relative height error between the plurality of component container holding units. Irrespective of the presence of one, the height of the height of the height of the holding surface of the plurality of component container holders that holds the component container and the height of the support surface of the component container moving device that supports the component container.
  • the electronic circuit component supply device according to any one of (1) to (25), including a matching device.
  • the relative height error between the rack elevating device and the component container moving device and the relative height error of the plurality of component container holding units for example, the plurality of component container holding units
  • the holding surfaces for holding the respective component containers of the plurality of component container holders are replaced by the components of the component container moving device. It can be located exactly in the same plane as the support surface supporting the container. Therefore, the component container can be smoothly transferred between the rack and the component container moving device, and the vibration of the component container can be suppressed.
  • a component container holder detecting device that is provided at one position in the vertical direction of the rack, detects that at least one of the plurality of component container holders has reached a set height, and issues a detection signal.
  • the holding surface for holding the component container of each of the plurality of component container holding portions is located in the same plane as the support surface.
  • the electronic circuit component supply device according to any one of (1) to (25).
  • the holding surface for holding each of the component containers of the plurality of component container holding portions is positioned exactly in the same plane as the support surface for supporting the component container of the component container moving device. Can be done. Therefore, the transfer of the component container between the rack and the component container moving device can be performed smoothly, and the vibration of the component container can be suppressed. It is desirable that the component container holder detecting device itself is provided at the set height, and that at least one of the plurality of component container holders detects that the set height has been reached, Not essential. What is necessary is that there is a known relationship between the arrangement height of the component container holder detection device and the set height.
  • the rack The stop position of the lifting device may be determined, or the rack lifting device may be stopped.
  • the “difference between the set height and the height of the support surface” includes 0. That is, the position at which the component container holding unit detecting device detects the component container holding unit may be the same as the position at which the rack elevating device is stopped. However, when the rack elevating device is stopped at the position for positioning the holding surface in the same plane as the supporting surface based on the detection of the component container holding part, for example, the height of the supporting surface is set higher than the set height. Set the distance above (or below) the distance and set it based on the detection signal of the component container holder detection device.
  • the component container holder detection device automatically detect that at least one of the plurality of component container holders has reached the set height. You may make it. For example, the difference between the set height and the height of the support surface is set to 0, and the position where the holding surface of the component container holding portion can be positioned substantially in the same plane as the support surface using a clearance gauge is used. And obtain the operating position of the rack elevating device at that time.
  • the acquired operation position is, for example, using an input device, a storage unit of a control unit that controls the elevation of the rack elevating device, information that can specify the component container holding unit, and information that can be specified in the rack provided with the component storage unit. Store them in association with each other.
  • the rack elevating device is controlled using the stored operating position, and the holding surface of the component container holding portion is automatically positioned in the same plane as the support surface.
  • the component container holder detecting device detects that two or more of the plurality of component container holders have reached the set height, respectively.
  • the lifting control unit controls the rack lifting device based on two or more operating positions of the rack lifting device when the detection signals for the two or more component container holding units are issued.
  • the electronic circuit component supply device according to the above mode (27).
  • the component container holding unit detecting device detects that two or more of the plurality of component container holding units have reached the set heights, respectively, and outputs a detection signal. Emit. It is desirable that the component container holder detection device should detect that all of the multiple component container holders have reached the set height, but this is not essential and two of the multiple component container holders can be detected.
  • the effect of the invention according to this item can be obtained by detecting arrival of at least one of them at the set height. For example, the uppermost and the lowermost of the plurality of component container holders are detected to reach the set height, and the two rack elevating device operating positions at which the detection signals are issued are detected.
  • the rack elevating device is stopped at a plurality of positions determined by interpolation calculation based on the two operating positions, the accumulation of positioning errors of the plurality of component container holders by the rack elevating device is eliminated.
  • the two component container holders one with a height slightly lower from the top and one with a height slightly higher from the bottom, are detected by the component container holder detection device,
  • the rack elevating device may be stopped at a plurality of positions determined by the interpolation and extrapolation calculation based on the operating positions of the two corresponding rack elevating devices.
  • the operating position of the rack elevating device is determined by the drive source of the rack elevating device (for example, an electric motor such as a servo motor that can accurately control the rotation angle) or an encoder provided in a transmission device that transmits the movement of the rack elevating device. Alternatively, it can be detected by an operation amount or an operation position detector such as a linear encoder for detecting the position of the movable member moving in the vertical direction.
  • the drive source of the rack elevating device for example, an electric motor such as a servo motor that can accurately control the rotation angle
  • an encoder provided in a transmission device that transmits the movement of the rack elevating device.
  • it can be detected by an operation amount or an operation position detector such as a linear encoder for detecting the position of the movable member moving in the vertical direction.
  • All of the plurality of component container holders are the component container holder detectors.
  • the elevating control unit includes a rack elevating device operating position storage unit that stores an operating position of the rack elevating device when the component container holding unit detecting device issues a detection signal.
  • the electronic circuit component supply device according to any one of the above (29).
  • the component container holder detector detects the set height of the component container holder each time.
  • the rack elevating control unit can stop the rack elevating device based on the detection, in which case the rack elevating device operating position storage unit becomes indispensable. .
  • the rack elevating device operating position storage unit is provided, there is an advantage that it is not indispensable that the component container holder detecting device detects that the component container holder reaches the set height every time.
  • the rack elevating and lowering device it is desirable to lower the operating speed of the rack elevating and lowering device in order to increase the detection accuracy of the reaching of the component container holding portion to the set height by the component container holding portion detecting device.
  • the component container holder detection device does not need to detect the arrival of the component container holder at the set height every time, the effect of improving work efficiency can be obtained.
  • the elevation control unit is configured to operate based on an operation position of the rack elevating device when the component container holding unit detection device outputs a detection signal, and a difference between the set height and the height of the support surface.
  • a stop position determining section for determining a plurality of stop positions of the rack elevating device for positioning the holding surface in the same plane as the support surface (27) to (30).
  • An electronic circuit component supply device according to any one of (1) to (31), a board holding device for holding a circuit board on which the electronic circuit component is to be mounted, and a mounting head.
  • a mounting device that receives an electronic circuit component from the component supply device by a mounting head and mounts the electronic circuit component on a circuit board held by the substrate holding device; and a control device that controls at least the mounting device.
  • the supply accuracy and reliability by the electronic circuit component supply device are high, and the removal error of the electronic circuit component from the electronic circuit component supply device by the mounting head is small.
  • the error of the holding position of the electronic circuit component by the mounting head or the mounting head is reduced. Therefore, the execution of extra operations such as re-installation of circuit components is reduced, and the operation efficiency of the electronic circuit component mounting machine is improved.
  • the component container of the electronic circuit component supply device includes a pallet for supporting a tray, and
  • a height acquisition unit for acquiring heights of all trays supported by the pallet on the pallet;
  • a height control unit that controls the height of the mounting head when the electronic circuit components are removed from the tray based on the height acquired by the height acquisition unit;
  • FIG. 1 is a plan view showing an electronic circuit component mounting machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 2 is a side view showing the electronic circuit component mounting machine.
  • FIG. 3 is a front view (partially sectional) showing a mounting device of the electronic circuit component mounting machine.
  • FIG. 4 is a side view showing the mounting head of the mounting device together with the fiducial mark imaging system.
  • Fig. 5 shows a state in which the tray-type component supply device of the electronic circuit component mounting machine is mounted on a cart. It is a side view which shows a state.
  • FIG. 6 is a front sectional view showing a state in which electronic circuit components are accommodated in a tray of the tray-type component supply device.
  • FIG. 7 is a plan view (partial cross section) showing a state in which the pallet of the tray-type component supply device is stored in a rack and is held by the pallet holding device.
  • FIG. 8 is a side view showing the pallet.
  • FIG. 9 is a sectional view showing a part of the pallet body of the pallet.
  • FIG. 10 is a rear view showing the rack and the rack elevating device.
  • FIG. 11 is a side view showing the rack and the rack elevating device.
  • FIG. 12 is an enlarged plan view showing a state where the pallet is gripped by the pallet gripping device.
  • FIG. 13 is a plan view showing a pallet moving device of the tray-type component supply device.
  • FIG. 14 is a side view showing a transport conveyor of the pallet moving device.
  • Fig. 15 is a diagram showing the holder of the pallet moving device together with a conveyor belt, etc.
  • Fig. 15 (a) is a rear view (partial cross section) of the whole, and
  • Fig. 15 (b) is FIG. 4 is a rear view showing a portion supported by the belt.
  • Fig. 16 is a diagram for explaining the holding and release of the pallet by the holding tool.
  • FIG. 17 is a plan view showing a movable rail for guiding the movement of the pallet.
  • FIG. 18 is a rear cross-sectional view showing a state in which the movable rail is movably held by a rail holding member, and is prevented from being lifted by a lifting prevention member.
  • FIG. 19 is a rear sectional view showing a state where the movable rail is urged by a spring in a direction to approach the fixed rail.
  • FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating notches provided in the rack and explaining positioning of the pallet at the component supply position, and FIG. 20 (a) illustrates a portion where the notches are provided in the rack.
  • the front view, FIG. 20 (b) and FIG. 20 (c) are side views, respectively.
  • FIG. 21 is a block diagram schematically showing a portion deeply relevant to the present invention in a control device for controlling the electronic circuit component mounting machine.
  • FIG. 22 shows a transfer conveyor of a tray-type component supply device according to another embodiment of the present invention. It is a side view which shows the state in which the conveyor belt was supported by the guide rail.
  • FIG. 23 is a plan view (partial cross section) showing a part of a state in which a pallet is held by a pallet holding device of a tray-type component supply device as still another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 24 is a side view showing the pallet holding device shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 25 is a plan view showing the transport conveyor and the guide device of the tray-type component supply device provided with the pallet holding device shown in FIG. 23 together with the pallet.
  • FIG. 26 is a front view showing the holder and the engaging pin moving device of the transport conveyor shown in FIG. 25.
  • FIG. 27 is a plan view showing one engagement pin of the holder shown in FIG. 26, an engagement pin moving device for moving the engagement pin, a guide device, and the like.
  • FIGS. 1 to 21 An electronic circuit component mounting machine 10 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 21.
  • This type of electronic circuit component mounting machine 10 is already known, for example, in Japanese Patent No. 2824378, except for the part relating to the present invention, and will be briefly described.
  • reference numeral 12 denotes a base as a mounting machine main body of the electronic circuit component mounting machine 10.
  • a printed circuit board conveyor 16 and a printed circuit board 14 as a board transfer device for transferring a printed circuit board 14, which is a kind of a circuit board, in the X-axis direction (left and right directions in FIG. 1).
  • a printed circuit board holding device (hereinafter abbreviated as a “wiring board holding device”) as a substrate holding device for holding 18, an electronic circuit component 20 on the printed wiring board 14 (see FIG. 4.
  • a mounting device 22 for mounting the circuit component 20 and an electronic circuit component supply device (hereinafter, a circuit component supply device for supplying the circuit component 20 to the mounting device 22) , A component supply device) 24, 26, etc. are provided.
  • the printed wiring board 14 is conveyed in a horizontal position by the wiring board conveyor 16 and stopped at a predetermined work position by a stop device (not shown), and the work of the base 12 is performed.
  • the wiring board is held by a wiring board holding device 18 provided at a portion corresponding to the position.
  • the printed wiring board 1 .4, the mounting surface 28 on which the circuit component 20 is mounted (see FIG. 4, which is the upper surface in this embodiment) is supported in a horizontal posture.
  • an XY coordinate plane is set for the entire electronic circuit component mounting machine 10, and on the XY coordinate plane, movement data and the like of a mounting head and the like of the mounting device 22 described later are set.
  • the XY coordinate plane is, as shown in FIG. 1, a state in which the electronic circuit component mounting machine 10 is positioned from above, the component supply device 26 is positioned on the upper side, and the component supply device 24 is positioned on the lower side.
  • the horizontal coordinate plane is defined as the X-axis direction in the left-right direction, the Y-axis direction in the upper and lower directions, and the positive direction in the right and upper directions.
  • the parts supply devices 24 and 26 are fixed on both sides of the circuit board conveyor 16 so as to be separated from each other in the Y-axis direction orthogonal to the X-axis direction in the XY coordinate plane. It is provided stationary.
  • the component supply device 24 is a feeder type component supply device
  • the component supply device 26 is a S-tray type component supply device.
  • the feeder type component supply device 24 includes a component supply table in which a number of feeders 30 are arranged on a feeder support table 32, and each component supply unit is arranged along a line, for example, in a direction parallel to the X-axis direction.
  • each feeder 30 holds the circuit component 20 on a component holding tape (not shown) and supplies the circuit component 20 as a taped electronic circuit component.
  • the taped electronic circuit components are sent at a constant pitch by a feeding device (not shown), and the circuit components 20 are supplied one by one from a component supply unit.
  • the tray-type component supply device 26 accommodates the circuit components 20 in a tray 50 and supplies them.
  • the tray-type component supply device 26 will be described later in detail.
  • the mounting device 22 conveys the circuit component 20 by moving the mounting head 60 shown in FIG. 4 in a direction having components in the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction which are orthogonal to each other, and conveys the circuit component 20. It is to be mounted on the mounting surface 28 of the plate 14. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 1, ball screws 64 are provided on both sides of the circuit board conveyor 16 of the base 12 in the Y-axis direction in parallel with the X-axis direction, and the X-axis as a moving member is provided.
  • the two nuts 6 8 (only one is shown in FIG. 3) provided on the shaft slide 66
  • These ball screws 64 are rotated by an X-axis slide drive motor 70, respectively, so that the X-axis slide 66 is moved to an arbitrary position in a direction parallel to the X-axis.
  • the X-axis slide 66 has a length from the feeder type component supply device 24 to the tray type component supply device 26 beyond the wiring board conveyor 16 as shown in FIG.
  • the movement of the X-axis slide 66 is guided by a guide device including a guide rail 72 (see FIG. 3) as a guide member.
  • a guide rail 72 see FIG. 3 as a guide member.
  • the nut 68, the ball screw 64, the X-axis slide driving motor 70, and the like constitute the X-axis slide moving device 76.
  • a pole screw 80 (see FIG. 3) is set parallel to the Y-axis direction, and a Y-axis slide 82 as a moving member is screwed with a nut 84.
  • a Y-axis slide 82 as a moving member is screwed with a nut 84.
  • the ball screw 80 is rotated by a Y-axis slide drive motor 86 (see FIG. 1), the Y-axis slide 82 becomes a guide including a pair of guide rails 92 (see FIG. 3) serving as guide members. It is guided by the device and moved to any position parallel to the Y-axis direction.
  • the nut 84, the ball screw 80 and the Y-axis slide driving motor 86 constitute a Y-axis slide movement device 94
  • the X-axis slide 66, the X-axis slide movement device 76 and the Y-axis slide
  • an XY moving device 96 as a relative moving device for relatively moving the printed wiring board 14 and the component supply devices 24, 26 and the mounting head 60 is constituted.
  • the mounting head 60 is moved by the XY moving device 96 to any position in the horizontal plane that is parallel to the mounting surface 28.
  • the support portion 102 provided on the Y-axis slide 82 has a head axial moving device for moving the mounting head 60 and the mounting head 60 up and down.
  • a bar head elevating device 104 and a head rotating device 106 for rotating the mounting head 60 around its axis are provided.
  • one set of the component mounting unit 108 is provided, but a plurality of sets may be provided.
  • a plurality of component mounting units 108 can be provided on the Y-axis slide 82 in a row in parallel with the Y-axis direction.
  • the component mounting unit 108 of the present embodiment has the same configuration as the component mounting unit described in Japanese Patent No. 3933339, and will be described briefly.
  • the support 110 has an axis 110 provided so as to be movable in a direction parallel to the Z-axis direction (a direction perpendicular to the X-axis and Y-axis directions and a vertical direction) and rotatable around the axis.
  • the suction nozzle 114 serving as a component holder is detachably held by a holder 112 provided at the lower end of the suction nozzle.
  • the shaft 110 and the holder 112 constitute a mounting head 60.
  • the head lifting / lowering device 104 uses a head lifting / lowering motor 120 as a drive source, and the rotation of the head lifting / lowering motor 120 is controlled by a rotation transmitting device including gears 122, 124 and nuts 1104. The rotation is transmitted to the nut 26 and the nut 126 is rotated, whereby the shaft 110 screwed to the nut 126 is raised and lowered, and the mounting head 60 is raised and lowered.
  • the head lifting / lowering device 104 is also an approach / separation device for moving the mounting head 60 toward and away from the work object, and is considered to constitute a relative moving device together with the XY moving device 96. You can do that too.
  • the head rotation device 106 uses a head rotation motor 130 (see FIG.
  • the suction nozzle 1 14 has a nozzle body 1 38 as a main body and a suction pipe 140 as a suction unit, and sucks circuit components 20 by negative pressure and mounts it on the printed wiring board 14 I do. Therefore, the suction nozzle 114 is connected to a negative pressure source (not shown), a positive pressure source (not shown), and the atmosphere. , It is alternatively connected to the positive pressure source and the atmosphere.
  • the suction tube 140 has a downward suction surface 142, and sucks the circuit component 20.
  • the Y-axis slide 82 also has a fiducial mark camera 15 2 (see FIGS. 1 and 4), which is an imaging device that images a plurality of fiducial marks 150 (see FIG. 1) provided on the printed wiring board 14. ) Is immovable.
  • the fiducial mark camera 152 is composed of a CCD camera and is a surface imaging device.
  • An illumination device 154 is provided corresponding to the fiducial mark camera 152 to illuminate the fiducial mark 150 and its surroundings.
  • the fiducial mark camera 15 2 and the lighting device 15 4 constitute a fiducial mark imaging system.
  • X ball slide 6 6 has two balls just to move X axis slide 6 6 Positions corresponding to the screws 64, respectively, between the feeder type component supply device 24 and the printed wiring board 14 and between the tray type component supply device 26 and the printed wiring board 14 respectively.
  • the imaging device 180 is immovably mounted. The configuration of these imaging devices 180 is the same, and includes a component camera 182 for capturing an image of the circuit component 20 and a light guide device 184, as typically shown in FIG. .
  • the component camera 1822 is a CCD camera and a surface imaging device.
  • An illumination device 186 is provided below the moving path of the mounting head 60 for the X-axis slide 66, and a component imaging system including the imaging device 180 and the illumination device 186 is provided. Thereby, a front image and a projected image of the circuit component 20 are selectively captured.
  • the component imaging system is provided in the middle of the movement path of the mounting head 60 in the Y-axis direction, and is imaged while being moved from the component supply devices 24 and 26 to the printed wiring board 14.
  • the tray-type component supply device 26 supports the tray 50 and forms a tray pallet (hereinafter referred to as a “nolet”) that configures a component container. 200), a rack 202 for storing pallets 200, a rack elevating device 204 (see Fig. 10), a conveyor 206 as a component container moving device, and a component housing
  • a pallet guide device 208 (see Fig. 13) as a container guide device, is mounted on a trolley 210 (see Fig. 5), is mounted on a base 12, and supplies circuit components 20.
  • the rack 202 and the rack elevating device 204 constitute a pallet storage portion or a component storage portion as a component container storage portion, and the transport conveyor 206 and the pallet guide device 208 are pallet shuttle portions. Or a pallet shuttle system.
  • the tray 50 is made by projecting a flat plate material, leaving its periphery, and protruding the central portion in a direction perpendicular to the plate surface. It has a shape with recesses 214.
  • the protruding end surface of the protrusion 2 12 has a flat shape, and a plurality of housing recesses 2 16 serving as component housing portions that are open to the protruding end surface are provided in a single plane.
  • Each circuit component 20 is positioned and taken out one by one It is housed as possible.
  • the component housing plane in which the housing recesses 2 16 are arranged has a single plane perpendicular to the axis of the tray 50.
  • One tray 50 accommodates one type of circuit component 20.
  • the outer peripheral surface 2 18 of the projection 2 1 2 and the inner peripheral surface 2 20 of the concave portion 2 14 have the same tapered shape, and the concave portion 2 14 of the tray 50 is By fitting the parts 212, the plurality of trays 50 can be positioned in a direction parallel to the component housing plane, and stacked one on top of the other in a state in which they cannot be relatively moved and cannot be rotated.
  • the knurl 200 will be described.
  • the pallet 200 supports the tray 50, and receives the circuit components 20 via the tray 50.
  • the pallet main body 230 of the knurl 200 has a rectangular shape in plan view and a thin plate shape, as shown in FIGS.
  • Each is provided with rails 232 and constitutes a supported portion or a guided portion.
  • Each of both ends in the longitudinal direction of each of the rails 232 has a guide portion 234 provided so that its width becomes narrower toward its tip.
  • inclined surfaces are provided at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the lower surface of the two rails 2 32 so as to be inclined upward toward the end. Make up. Furthermore, as shown in FIG.
  • the two rails 2 32 each have side surfaces 2 3 parallel to the longitudinal direction of the rails 2 3 2 and perpendicular to the component receiving plane, as shown in FIG. 8 and engagement recesses 2 4 2 and 2 4 4 are provided as engaged portions that open on the upper surface.
  • the side surfaces of these engagement concave portions 242 and 244 that are perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rail 232 and are close to each other constitute the engagement surfaces 246 and 248.
  • the pallet body 230 is made of, for example, a steel art panel (trade name) manufactured by Sekisui Jushi Plastics Co., Ltd. As shown schematically in FIG. 50 and a magnetic material layer 25 2, 25 4 sandwiching the vibration absorbing layer 250 from both sides.
  • the vibration absorbing layer 250 is made of a foamed resin that is a kind of vibration absorbing material, for example, polyethylene, and the magnetic material layers 255 and 254 are made of a magnetic material that is a kind of metal material.
  • the magnetic material layers 25 2 and 25 4 are metal material layers, and the surfaces thereof are coated with paints 256 and 258, respectively.
  • the pallet body 230 is made of a material that is light, thin, and highly rigid, while having magnetism and vibration absorption capability. It is not essential to paint.
  • the pallet main body 230 has two sides each having the pair of rails 232 and one of the two sides perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rail 232, respectively.
  • a positioning surface 262 which rises at right angles from the upper surface of 230 or the support surface 260 supporting the tray 50 is provided.
  • the direction parallel to the longitudinal direction of the rail 2 32 of the pallet body 230 is the forward / backward direction or the pallet conveyance direction as the pallet 200 conveyance direction by the conveyance conveyor 206 and the component container movement direction.
  • the side on which the positioning surface 262 is provided, of the two sides perpendicular to the rail 2332, is a front portion, and is a direction in which a pair of rails 2332 are separated from each other.
  • the direction perpendicular to the pallet transport direction is defined as the left-right direction or the width direction.
  • a grip portion 264 that rises at a right angle from the support surface 260 of the pallet body 230 is provided.
  • the grip portion 264 is long in the left-right direction, functions as a handle, and serves to reinforce the pallet body 230.
  • a handle 266 is provided so as to protrude forward so as to form a held portion. ing.
  • a pair of grip portions 268 are provided in parallel with the left and right directions of the pallet 200. In the present embodiment, these grip portions 268 are concentrically provided with a circular cross section.
  • At least one tray 500 is supported by a pallet 200.
  • the tray 50 may be supported at one location in the pallet 200 or may be supported at multiple locations, for example, two locations, depending on its size. Further, a plurality of trays 50 may be stacked and stacked on each other. In any case, the tray 50 is placed and supported on the support surface 260, and is restrained immovably in a direction parallel to the component receiving plane by the restraining device 270 in the pallet 200. You.
  • the restraining device 270 includes a plurality of types of restraining members 272 and 274 as shown in FIG.
  • These restraining members 2 7 2, 2 7 4 are each made of non-magnetic material Casings 275 and 277 as permanent magnet holders, and permanent magnets 276 and 278 that are housed in the casings 275 and 277 to form a permanent magnet portion, It can be placed and fixed at any position on the support surface 260 of the magnetic material pallet body 230.
  • At least two of the four side surfaces of the tray 50 are positioned by being brought into contact with the positioning surface 262, and are not brought into contact with the positioning surface 262 of the tray 50.
  • At least one of the restraining members 27 2 and 27 4 is brought into contact with the two side surfaces, and is placed on the support surface 260 to restrict the movement of the tray 50 and restrain it.
  • the plurality of trays 50 are provided so as to be stacked one on another in a direction parallel to the component storage plane, and the restraining members 27 2 and 27 4 are stacked on each other.
  • the tray 50 is accommodated in the pallet 200 and supported, thereby functioning as a component accommodating portion of the accommodating recess 2 16 of the tray 50 and a part of the tray 50.
  • the component receiving plane on the plane constitutes the component receiving plane of the knowledge 200. This component receiving plane is parallel to the support surface 260.
  • the rack 202 has a vertical cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the pallet storage direction in the shape of a mouth, and is formed by a transfer conveyor 206 of the pallet 202. It has two openings that open in both the forward and reverse directions in the transport direction. A plurality of pallets 202 are stored so as to cover all of them. Can be attached and detached only at.
  • the rack body 280 of the rack 202 has a plurality of pairs of rails 282 as a pair of pallet support members, which are arranged at equal intervals in the rack elevating direction. It is provided in a state and constitutes a component container holder.
  • the plurality of pairs of rails 282 are provided integrally with the rail forming member 283 constituting the rack main body 280, whereby the rack 202 has a plurality of rails 282.
  • Shelf 2 8 4 are provided at equal intervals in the vertical direction, and pallets 200 can be stored in multiple stages, a plurality of types of circuit components 20 can be stored, and a large number of circuit components 20 can be stored. be able to.
  • the rack 202 of the tray-type component supply device 26 supported by the cart 210 is provided vertically, and the rail 282 is horizontally extended in a state of extending parallel to the pallet transport direction or the front and rear directions. Is provided.
  • the let 200 is mounted on the pair of rails 282 on the pair of rails 232 and is supported by the rails 282 in a horizontal posture, the component receiving plane is a horizontal plane, and the rail 282 is provided. 2 is held so as to be movable in a direction parallel to the longitudinal direction and in a horizontal direction parallel to the component housing plane.
  • the upper surface of the rail 282 constitutes a supporting surface 286 as a holding surface for supporting and holding the pallet 200 from below, and the front end of the rail 282 of the supporting surface 286, That is, at the end portion on the side adjacent to the transport roller 206, as shown in FIG. 8, an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the front is provided, forming a guide surface 288.
  • the support surface 286 is a horizontal surface in the present embodiment.
  • the pallet 200 has a very small distance between the pair of rails 232 and the rail forming member 283 that allows the pallet 200 to move in the front-rear direction. It is stored with a slight gap left.
  • a front end protruding forward from the rail forming member 283 of the rack 202 and the side wall 328 of the rack body 280 of the rail 282 is provided.
  • a notch 292 is provided. The notch 292 is provided to penetrate a plurality of pairs of rails 282 and a rail forming member 283 provided with the rails 282 in the left-right direction.
  • the rack 202 is moved up and down by the rack elevating device 204.
  • the rack elevating device 204 includes a rack elevating motor 300 as a driving source attached to a frame 300 constituting an apparatus body of the tray-type component supply device 26, and a frame. 300 includes a pair of screw shafts 304 provided rotatably about a vertical axis and a pair of nuts 360 fixed to the rack 202.
  • the rack elevating motor 302 When the screw shaft 304 is rotated by the rack elevating motor 302, the rack 202 is guided by a guide device including a pair of guide rails 300 (see FIG. 11) as guide members.
  • Rack 202 is a horizontal part
  • the pallet 200 is raised and lowered in a direction perpendicular to the housing plane, and the plurality of pallets 200 supported by the rails 282 are sequentially positioned at the component supply position.
  • An ideal component supply position is determined by a support surface of the conveyor 206 that supports a pallet 200 of a conveyor belt described later. No ,.
  • the support surface 286 of the rail 282 supporting the ret 200 is exactly in the same plane as the support surface of the conveyor belt, and in this embodiment, the position located in the same horizontal plane is the ideal position of the palette 200.
  • a horizontal plane including the conveyor belt support surface is the pallet 200 transfer surface.
  • the vertical position of the support surface of the conveyor belt of the conveyor 206 is set to a predetermined height by design, but it is caused by a manufacturing error or an assembly error of the components of the conveyor 206. Due to errors in the height direction, it is not always located at the design position, and the ideal component supply position is not always at the design position.
  • the rack elevating device 204 there is usually an error in the height direction due to a manufacturing error or an assembly error of the component parts, and there may be an error in the pitch of the plurality of pairs of rails 282. Therefore, even if the ideal component supply position is located at the design position, the pallet 200 is not necessarily positioned at the ideal component supply position by moving the rack 202 up and down. Therefore, the transfer sensor 3 1 2 is arranged so that these various errors are canceled as much as possible and the pallet 202 is positioned at the ideal component supply position in the tray-type component supply device 26 with as high accuracy as possible. Provided.
  • the transfer sensor 3 12 is designed to be located away from the component supply position in the rack elevating direction, and in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20 (b), above the component supply position. Is provided.
  • the transfer sensor 3 1 2 is installed as close as possible to the position set in the design as much as possible, and the distance in the vertical direction with respect to the support surface of the conveyor belt of the transport conveyor 206 is measured by a measuring device, and the ideal component supply position The exact position for has been obtained.
  • the actual distance L 1 (see FIG. 20) of the transfer sensor 3 12 to the ideal component supply position (the support surface of the conveyor belt of the transport conveyor 206). (See (c)).
  • the transfer sensor 312 is constituted by a transmissive photoelectric sensor which is a type of photoelectric sensor.
  • the light emitter and the light receiver have their optical axes parallel to the left and right directions of the rack 202. It is provided at a position where light passes through the notch 292 provided in the rack 202. Therefore, if the rack 202 is moved up and down, the light emitted from the emitter is received by the receiver through the notch 292 or blocked by the rack 202, and based on the light reception and the light blocking, Multiple pairs of rails 2 82 are detected sequentially.
  • the portion of the rail 282 where the notch 292 is provided constitutes the detected part.
  • the lower surface of the end of the rail 230 of the pallet 200 is inclined so as to form the guide surface 236, and the pallet 200 is stored in the rack 202. Then, as shown in FIG. 20 (b), the distal end of the rail 2332 comes off the notch 292. Therefore, even if the rail 282 is detected by the transfer sensor 312 while the pallet 200 is stored in the rack 202, the pallet 200 prevents transmission of the light emitted from the projector. None.
  • a notch or an inclined portion provided at the tip of the rail 232 constitutes a component container holding portion detection permitting portion. The elevation control of the rail 282 based on the detection by the transfer sensor 312 will be described later.
  • the rack 202 is provided with a pallet gripping device 320 as a component container gripping device.
  • the pallet gripping device 320 is provided at a portion of the rack body 280 corresponding to each pair of the plurality of pairs of rails 282, respectively.
  • the rack 200 is fixed to the rack 202 by gripping the ledge 200. No ,. It can be considered that a pair of rail grippers 320 are provided for each rail 282, and a pair of palette grippers 320 are provided for one shelf 284. .
  • each of the plurality of pallet gripping devices 320 is provided with a rack body 280.
  • the first gripping claw 3 222 is located on the front side of the rack body 280 (on the side adjacent to the transport conveyor 206).
  • the second gripping claws 324 are provided on the rear side.
  • One of the two first gripping claws 3 2 2 and the second gripping claw 3 2 4 is provided on one side of a pair of rails 282, and the other is provided on the other rail 282 side.
  • the two first gripping claws 3222 of the pallet gripping device 320 are provided in a plane parallel to the component housing plane and separated in the left-right direction that is a direction orthogonal to the pallet transport direction. The same applies to the two second gripping claws 3 2 4.
  • the first gripping claws 3 2 2 provided on the same rail 28 2 side are the same. Each of them is detachably fixed to a common claw holder 3 26, and is provided in an opening 3 30 provided in a side wall 3 28 of the rack body 2 80 and a rail forming member 2 83 respectively.
  • the rack body 280 can enter the rack body 280 through the opening 33 1.
  • the openings 330 and 331 are provided corresponding to each of the plurality of pairs of rails 282.
  • the front end of the rail forming member 283 (the end on the side of the conveyor 206) is projected forward from the front end of the side wall 328. As shown in Fig.
  • the claw holder 3 26 has a longitudinal shape, and each of the two vertically spaced shafts 3 32 (Fig. 12 shows one shaft 3 32 ) Is attached to the rack body 280 so as to be rotatable around the vertical axis.
  • the distal end of the first gripping claw 3 2 2 has a cylindrical gripping surface 3 having a center line parallel to the rotation axis of the first gripping claw 3 2 2 (the axis of the axis 3 32). 3 4 are provided.
  • the claw holder 326 has a piston lock of an air cylinder 340 provided in the rack body 280 at a middle portion in the vertical direction so as to extend in the front-rear direction. It is connected to the tip of the door 342.
  • the connecting shaft 344 provided on the claw holder 326 in the upward and downward directions is opposed to the long hole 346 provided at the tip of the biston rod 342 in the longitudinal direction of the long hole 346. They are movably fitted.
  • the air cylinder 360 is a type of fluid pressure actuator that is a type of fluid pressure actuator, and constitutes a driving source.
  • the expansion and contraction of the piston rod 34 rotates the claw holder 3 26 around the vertical axis.
  • the plurality of first gripping claws 3 2 2 are simultaneously rotated about a vertical axis.
  • the extended end of the piston rod 3 4 2 is connected to the stopper 3 provided on the rack Specified by 50.
  • the first gripping claw 32 2 is rotated to a gripping position for gripping the pallet 200, and on the gripping surface 33 4, the knurl 20 No. 2 engages with the engaging surface 2 46 of the engaging concave portion 2 42 provided on the rail 2 32 and grips the pallet 200 in cooperation with the second gripping claw 3 2 4.
  • the knurl 200 is fixed both to the pallet body 280 and to the rail 282.
  • the engaging position or the holding position of the first holding claw 3 222 is defined by the stopper 350.
  • the first gripping claw 32 2 When the piston rod 3 42 is contracted, the first gripping claw 32 2 is rotated to the release position as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG.
  • the pallet 322 is released by being pulled out of the 422, and the fixing of the pallet 322 to the rack body 280 is released.
  • the contracted end of the piston rod 342 is defined, for example, by the stroke end of the piston.
  • the claw holder 3 26 and the air cylinder 340 constitute a first holding claw rotating device 3 52 as a first holding member driving device, and the first holding claw rotating device 3 Reference numeral 52 is provided in common for each of the first gripping claws 32 of the plurality of palette gripping devices 320.
  • a stopper is provided on the side on which the stopper 350 rotates to the gripping position of the first gripping claw 322, and the rotation limit defining device for defining the rotation limit in the direction of gripping the palette 200 is constituted. .
  • the second gripping nail 3 2 4 provided on the same rail 28 2 side is also the same as the first gripping nail 3 2 2
  • the rack body 280 can enter the rack body 280 through the opened opening 365.
  • the openings 36 2 and 36 3 are provided corresponding to each of the plurality of pairs of rails 28 2.
  • the claw holder 360 is attached to the rack body 280 at two positions vertically separated from each other by a shaft 364 (see FIG.
  • the claw holder 360 is rotated by the expansion and contraction of the piston rod 368, and the plurality of second gripping claws 324 are simultaneously formed, and the first gripping claws 322 are mutually moved. Independently rotated.
  • the claw holder 360 and the air cylinder 36 6 constitute a second gripping claw rotating device 374 as a second gripping member driving device, and the second gripping claw driving device 37 4 is provided in common for each of the second gripping claws 3 24 of the plurality of pallet gripping devices 320.
  • the second gripping claw 3 2 4 includes a gripping claw main body 3776 and a leaf spring 3778 held by the gripping claw body 3776.
  • the leaf spring 378 is a kind of spring as an elastic member, and can be detachably attached to the gripping claw body 376 at a base end 380 thereof, and the leaf surface of the leaf spring 378 is vertical.
  • the distal end portion fixed in the posture and extended from the gripping claw body 3776 functions as an engaging portion 3882, and a portion between the engaging portion 3882 and the base end portion 3880 is provided. It functions as the elastically deformable part 3 84.
  • the engaging portion 382 is a distal end portion which is an end portion of the elastically deforming portion 384 opposite to the base end portion 360 side, and a release position of the second gripping claw 3 24. It is provided so as to be bent in a direction opposite to the direction of rotation when heading toward the gripping position from.
  • the second gripping claw 3 2 4 has an engagement recess 3 2 provided on the rail 2 32 of the pallet 200 as shown by a solid line in FIG. Engage with the 4 4 engagement surface 2 4 8.
  • the pallet 200 is released by rotating the first and second gripping claws 32 2 and 3 24 to the release position, and the pallet 200 is not hindered from moving. 200 can be moved in the transport direction and can be moved in and out of the rack 202.
  • the driving force for the air cylinder 366 to grip the pallet 200 with the second gripping claw 3 2 4 is smaller than the driving force for the air cylinder 365 to grip the pallet 200 with the first gripping claw 32 2.
  • the storage position of the pallet 20 ° in the front-rear direction when gripped by the pallet gripping device 320 is defined by the stopper 350. This is defined by the first gripping claw 3 222 rotated to the gripping position. If the palette 200 is located on the front side of the storage position defined by the first gripping claws 32, the first gripping claws 32 are turned to the gripping position. At this time, the pallet 200 is engaged with the engagement surface 246, and the pallet 200 is retracted to the storage position.
  • the second gripping claw 3 2 4 is rotated by the air cylinder 3 6 6 so that the engaging portion 3 8 2 is brought into contact with the engaging surface 2 4 8 of the engaging recess 2 4 4 of the pallet 200.
  • the second gripping pawls 324 are rotated until a predetermined driving force set in the air cylinder 366 is obtained.
  • the elastically deforming portion 384 elastically deforms after the engaging portion 382 contacts the engaging surface 248, and engages the engaging portion 382 based on the restoring force of the elastic deformation.
  • Continue engaging surface 248. Variations in the dimensions of the pallet 200 and the like are absorbed by the elastic deformation of the elastic deformation portion 384.
  • the second gripping claw 3 2 4 is elastically engaged with the engaging surface 2 48, and cooperates with the first gripping claw 3 22 provided on the same rail 28 2 side as the pallet 20. This ensures that the pallet 200 does not move in the front-rear direction, and that the first and second gripping claws 3 2 2, 3 2 4 and the engaging surfaces 2 4 4, 2 4 8 The frictional force generated between and prevents the pallet 200 from moving in the vertical direction (the direction perpendicular to the component storage plane) and in the horizontal direction, and suppresses the vibration of the pallet 200 when the rack moves up and down.
  • the palette 200 can be moved in the left-right direction by engaging the first and second gripping claws 32 2 and 32 4 at four places separated from each other in a plane parallel to the component housing plane.
  • the two parts separated from each other are gripped by the first gripping claws 32 2 and the second gripping claws 3 24, respectively, and are firmly fixed to the rack 202, and the vibration is favorably suppressed.
  • the gripping surface 336 of the first gripping claw 3222 is formed in a partially cylindrical shape, the displacement of the portion engaging with the gripping surface 3336 of the pallet 200 in the left-right direction is small. I'm done.
  • the transfer conveyor 206 will be described.
  • the transfer conveyor 206 is provided so as to protrude forward from the carriage 210 and the frame 300.
  • the transport conveyor 206 is a belt conveyor, and includes a pair of conveyor belts 404 and 406 as endless transport members, a circulating drive device 408, and a holder 41. Contains 0.
  • the conveyor belts 4 0 4 and 4 0 6 are made of rubber, and Is a timing belt having a large number of teeth 4 12 (see FIG. 14 (b)) on the outer peripheral surface.
  • the orbiting drive device 4 08 includes a pair of support members 4 16 extending forward from the carriage 210 and the frame 300. , 4 18. These support members 4 16 and 4 18 are formed in a plate shape and are provided at a distance in a direction perpendicular to the pallet transport direction in a plane parallel to the component receiving plane, and are provided on the vertical side surfaces facing each other. In the pallet transport direction, a plurality of guide pulleys 420 around which the conveyor belts 404 and 406 are wound, and a plurality of timing pulleys 422 meshing with the teeth 412 of the conveyor belt 404, respectively. It is mounted rotatably about a horizontal horizontal axis.
  • the conveyor belts 404 and 406 are wound around the guide pulley 420 on a flat inner peripheral surface, the timing pulley 422 is wound around the outer peripheral surface, and the teeth 41 are provided. 2 is meshed with the teeth of the timing pulley 4 2 2.
  • one of the guide pulleys 420 is a tension pulley, and supports the conveyor belts 404 and 406 from the outer peripheral surface side.
  • a plurality of guide pulleys 420 and timing pulleys 42 2 establish a circulating path for the conveyors 404, 406, and the conveyor belts 404, 406 include racks 202 from the wiring board conveyor.
  • a horizontal transfer section or support section 4 24 extending to 16 is provided, and the upper surface thereof constitutes a pallet transfer face or support face 4 26.
  • the support surface 4 26 is constituted by a set of upper surfaces of a plurality of teeth 4 12 included in the support portion 4 24.
  • the conveyor belts 404 and 406 are provided at positions corresponding to the pair of rails 282 in the left-right direction of the transfer conveyor 206 (direction perpendicular to the pallet transfer direction in the horizontal plane). ing.
  • the transfer conveyor 206 is provided adjacent to the rack 202, and the circulating path of the conveyor belts 404, 406 includes an end portion of the support portion 424 adjacent to the rack 202, and a rail. The distance between them is short so that they are located close to each other.
  • the support members 4 16 and 4 18 also have a plurality of guide pulleys 4 28 rotating around the axis parallel to the guide pulleys 4 20 etc. at portions corresponding to the orbital path of the support portion 4 24 respectively. As possible and arranged side by side in the pallet transport direction. The flat inner peripheral surface is supported.
  • the plurality of guide pulleys 428 constitute a belt support member.
  • Each of the guide pulleys 420, 428, and the timing pulley 422 has a restricting portion extending from each end separated in a direction parallel to the rotation axis in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis.
  • the conveyor belts 404 and 406 are sandwiched from both sides in the width direction so as to restrict displacement in the width direction.
  • One of the plurality of timing pulleys 4 2 2 attached to the support member 4 16 is rotated by the rotary driving device 4 32 so that a pair of conveyors 4 0 4 and 4 6 are simultaneously in the same direction. Then, it is made to orbit along a predetermined orbit.
  • the rotary drive device 432 uses a belt drive motor 434 provided on the support member 433 held by the support members 416 and 418 as a drive source.
  • the rotation is transmitted to a timing pulley 422 that drives a conveyor belt 404 by a rotation transmission device including timing pulleys 436, 438 and a timing belt 439, and the rotation is transmitted by a rotation shaft 4440. It is transmitted to a timing pulley 422 for driving the conveyor belts 406, and the conveyor belts 404, 406 are rotated in synchronization.
  • the holder 4 10 will be described.
  • the retainer 410 is attached to a moving member 444 held in a fixed position by a pair of conveyors 404, 406. It is provided.
  • the moving member 446 has a longitudinal shape, and its both ends in the longitudinal direction are detachably fixed to the conveyor belts 404 and 406, respectively, to the portions constituting the support portion 424. Have been. Therefore, if the conveyor belts 404, 406 are rotated, the moving member 446 is moved integrally with the conveyor belts 404, 406, and is provided on the moving member 446.
  • the holder 410 is moved at the same speed as the conveyor belts 404, 406.
  • the guide pulley 428 supporting the support portions 424 of the conveyor belts 4 ⁇ 4, 406 is provided with a connecting portion between the conveyor belts 404, 406 and the moving member 444.
  • a grooved pulley having an annular groove formed in the outer peripheral surface is formed at the center in a direction parallel to the rotation axis.
  • the movement of the moving member 446 is guided by the guiding device 448 shown in FIG. You.
  • the guide devices 448 are provided on a pair of guide rollers 450, which are rotatably attached to both ends of the moving member 446 in the longitudinal direction, respectively, and on a pair of support members 416, 418. Guide rails 45 2.
  • the pair of guide rollers 450 move across the guide rails 452 and guide the movement of the moving member 446.
  • the holding member 410 is provided at a central portion in the longitudinal direction of the moving member 446 so that the handle 266 provided on the pallet 200 is held. Have been.
  • the holder 410 has a pair of chucks 458 as shown in FIG. 15 (a).
  • These chucks 458 are provided at a distance in the left-right direction of the conveyor 206, and have a pair of gripping claws 460, 462, respectively, as shown in FIG. .
  • These gripping claws 460 and 462 can be opened and closed in a direction parallel to the pallet carrying direction on the chuck body 646, and are provided so that they can approach and separate from each other.
  • positioning recesses 466, 468 as positioning portions extending in the left-right direction of the transport conveyor 206 are provided on the surfaces facing each other.
  • the chuck body 4 6 has a plunger 4 as a driven member or an input member.
  • the plunger 470 is a compression coil as an elastic member which is a kind of urging means disposed between a lower end protruding from the chuck body 464 and the chuck body 464. It is urged downward by a spring 4 72.
  • a chuck driving device 474 is provided at a rear portion of the transfer conveyor 206, that is, at a portion adjacent to the rack 202.
  • a chuck driving device 474 is fixedly provided at the center in the longitudinal direction of the support member 433, and the chuck driving device 474 is provided as shown in FIG.
  • the air cylinder 4778 is driven.
  • the air cylinder 478 is provided upward, and the drive member 4 As a result, the pair of driving portions 4 8 4 push up the respective plungers 4 70 of the pair of chucks 4 8 8 against the urging force of the spring 4 7 2. Release 0 and allow it to descend by the bias of the spring 4 7 2.
  • the plunger 470 is located at the lower end position by the urging of the spring 472 when the driving member 482 is lowered and is separated from the plunger 470, and FIG. As shown in (c), unless the handle 266 is gripped, the gripping claws 460 and 462 are located at the most closed positions. When gripping the handle 266, the gripping claws 460, 462 are held in a state of gripping the handle 266 based on the bias of the spring 472. When the driving member 482 is raised by the air cylinder 478 and the plunger 470 is raised against the urging force of the spring 472, the gripping claw is obtained as shown in FIG. 16 (e). 460, 462 is opened and moved to the release position.
  • the distance between the gripping claws 4 6 0 and 4 6 2 in the most opened state is larger than the outer diameter of the grip 2 6 8 of the handle 2 6 6 of the knob 2 0 0, and the grip 2 6 8
  • the claws can enter and retreat without interfering with the claws 460 and 462.
  • the holding tool 410 configured as described above holds the handle 26 of the pallet 200 by a pair of chucks 458, as will be described later, and the moving member 446 is transported.
  • the pallet 200 is moved by being moved by the conveyor 206, and the movement of the pallet 200 is guided by the pallet guide device (hereinafter abbreviated as a guide device) 208.
  • the guide device 208 includes a fixed rail 490 as a fixed guide member and a movable rail 492 as a movable guide member.
  • the fixed rail 490 has a plate shape, and is fixed to the upper surface of the support member 418 in parallel to the pallet transport direction, as shown in FIG.
  • the fixed rail 490 is provided such that its guide surface or regulating surface is located in the same vertical plane as the surface on which the rail 282 of the rail forming member 283 is provided.
  • the movable rail 492 has a plate-like shape as shown in Fig. 17 or Fig. 19, and a pallet transport direction is provided by a rail holding member 494 which is detachably fixed on the upper surface of the support member 416. It can be moved in the horizontal direction perpendicular to, and is held so that it can approach and separate from the fixed rail 490.
  • the rail holding member 494 has a long plate shape and is fixed in parallel to the pallet transport direction.
  • the movable rail 492 is arranged in parallel to the pallet transport direction, and the rail holding member Lifting is prevented by a holding member or a rising member 496 standing upright at 494.
  • the lifting prevention member 496 is fitted into the elongated hole 500 provided in the movable rail 492 at the shaft portion 498, and the port 5 as a fixing device is provided.
  • the movable rail 492 is prevented from rising from the rail holding member 494 by a head 504 having a diameter larger than that of the shaft portion 498.
  • the movable rail 492 is attached in a direction approaching the fixed rail 490 by a plurality of compression coil springs 510 serving as an elastic member which is a kind of a biasing device disposed in the rail holding member 494. It is being rushed.
  • the movement limit of the movable rail 492 by the bias of the spring 510 is regulated by engaging the longitudinal end face of the elongated hole 509 with the shaft portion 498 of the lifting prevention member 496. Is done.
  • the lifting prevention member 496 also constitutes a movable rail movement restricting device.
  • the fixed rail 490 and the movable rail 492 are a kind of synthetic resin as a flexible material, and have a lower friction coefficient than metal and a low friction material as a low friction material. It is made of polyacetal, a type of resin.
  • the fixed rail 490 is fixed straight to the support member 418 in parallel to the pallet conveyance direction, but the movable rail 492 can approach and separate from the fixed rail 490, and its length It can bend in a direction that intersects the direction and intersects the pallet transport direction in a horizontal plane parallel to the pallet transport surface.
  • the electronic circuit component mounting machine 10 includes a control device 530 shown in FIG.
  • the control device 530 is mainly composed of a computer 540 having a CPU 532, a ROM 534, a RAM 536 and a bus 538 for connecting them.
  • An input / output interface 542 is further connected to the bus 538, and is connected to an X-axis slide drive motor 70 and a Y-axis slide drive motor 86 via a drive circuit 544.
  • a head elevating motor 120, a head rotating motor 130, a rack elevating motor 302 and the like are connected.
  • the reference mark camera 152 and the component camera 182 are connected to the control device 5330 via an image processing computer 546.
  • an input device 548 such as a keyboard and various sensors such as a tray height confirmation sensor 550 and a transfer sensor 312 are connected to the device 530.
  • the tray height confirmation sensor 550 will be described later.
  • the X-axis slide drive motor 70 or the like as a drive source is constituted by a servomotor, and its accumulated rotation angle (rotational position) is detected by an encoder and input to the combi- ter 540.
  • FIG. 21 representatively shows an encoder 556 provided in the head rotation motor 130.
  • the servomotor is an electric motor capable of controlling the rotation angle with high accuracy, and is provided with an encoder in the present embodiment.
  • the X-axis slide drive motor 70 and the like using these servomotors as drive sources can be moved with high accuracy.
  • a step motor may be used instead of the servo motor.
  • the ROM 534 or RAM 536 has a main chin, an electronic circuit component mounting program, and a program for supplying the circuit component 20 to the tray-type component supply device 26.
  • the printed wiring board 14 is carried in by a carry-in device (not shown) and is conveyed to a mounting position where the circuit component 20 is mounted by the wiring board conveyor 16, the printed wiring board 14 is positioned by the wiring board holding device 18 and the mounting surface 2 8 Is held in a horizontal position.
  • the reference mark camera 15 2 together with the component mounting unit 108 by the moving device 96 is positioned at the reference mark imaging position where the reference mark 150 provided on the printed wiring board 14 is imaged. Are captured respectively.
  • the mounting head 60 is moved to the component removal position of the feeder type component supply device 24 or the tray type component supply device 26 by moving the X axis slide 66 and the ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ axis slide 82. .
  • the mounting head 60 is lifted by the head lifting device 104.
  • the circuit component 20 is held by the negative pressure being supplied to the suction nozzles 114.
  • the mounting head 6 holding the circuit component 20 is printed, for example, from the component receiving position for receiving the circuit component 20 from the pallet 200 moved to the component removal allowable position of the tray-type component supply device 26.
  • the component is moved to the component mounting position where the circuit component 20 is mounted on the wiring board 14.
  • the component imaging provided at a position between the component receiving position and the component mounting position of the X-axis slide 66 is performed.
  • the circuit component 20 is imaged by the system. If the rotational position of the circuit component 20 is different between the suction position and the mounting position, after mounting, the mounting head 60 rotates the head rotating device 10 before reaching the component holding position detection position. 6, the circuit component 20 is rotated to change the rotation position to the mounting position, and when the mounting head 60 reaches the component holding position detection position, the circuit component 20 is imaged.
  • the image data obtained by the imaging is processed by the image processing computer 546 and compared with the normal image data without the holding position error, and the center position error (horizontal position error) ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ , ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ and The rotational position error ⁇ is calculated.
  • the center position error X ,, ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ of the component mounting portion of the printed wiring board 14 is changed to the reference mark 150 provided on the printed wiring board 14 in advance by the reference mark camera 15 2.
  • Circuit component generated by correcting these errors ⁇ ⁇ , ⁇ ⁇ , ⁇ , ⁇ , ⁇ ⁇ and the rotational position error ⁇ before moving to the component mounting position The moving position of the mounting head 60 is corrected based on the displacement of the center position of 20 and the mounting head 60 is rotated by the head rotating device 106 to correct the rotational position error ⁇ . Is done.
  • the mounting head 60 is moved to the component mounting location on the printed wiring board 14 and lowered in parallel with the error calculation, etc., and the circuit component 20 is correctly rotated to the correct component mounting location. Attach with This completes one cycle of mounting work.
  • the rack 202 is raised and lowered by the rack elevating device 204, and the plurality of pallets 200 stored in the rack 202 are sequentially and vertically supplied with the component supply position.
  • the stopping position of the rack elevating device 204 for positioning the knurl 200 at the component supply position is set for each of the plurality of pairs of rails 282 provided on the rack 202. That is, a plurality of positions at which the rack elevating device 204 should be stopped among the continuous operating positions of the rack elevating device 204 are acquired.
  • the stop position of the rack elevating device 204 is acquired prior to the start of the work of mounting the circuit components 20 on the series of printed wiring boards 14, and the RAM 5 It is stored in 36.
  • the acquisition of the stop position will be described.
  • the rack 202 is moved up from, for example, the lower end position by the rack elevating device 204. If the part of the rack 202 where the notch 292 is not provided passes between the transmitter and receiver of the transfer sensor 321, the light emitted by the transmitter is blocked and the amount of received light is The passage of the portion where the notch 292 of the rack 202 is not provided is detected.
  • the light receiver When the notch 292 is transferred and reaches the sensor 312, the light receiver receives light, and since the amount of received light exceeds the set amount, the passage of the notch 292 is detected. If the portion exceeding the set amount of the notch 292 deviates from the transfer sensor 312, the amount of light received by the receiver reaches the threshold value, and then further decreases. As described above, the notch 292 is provided for each of the multiple pairs of rails 282, and when the amount of light received by the receiver falls below the threshold, the output signal of the transfer sensor 313 is turned on. Changes from OFF to OFF.
  • the rail 282 is at the transfer sensor position where the transfer sensor 312 is provided and has reached the rail detection position as the component container holding unit detection position.
  • the value of the encoder that detects the cumulative rotation angle (rotation position) of the rack elevating motor 302 at that time is the position of the rail 282 when the transfer sensor position is reached, and the rack elevating device 2 Obtained as the working position of 04.
  • the obtained operating position of the rack elevating device 204 is data that specifies the installation position of the rack 282 in the rack 202 that has reached the above-mentioned transfer sensor position, for example, the rack 202
  • a rack elevating device operating position provided in the RAM 536 of the computer 540 in association with a number which is a type of shelf identification information or storage position identification information attached to each of the plurality of shelves 284.
  • the rack elevator operating position memory is located in the The data remains even if the power is turned off.
  • the operating position of the rack elevating device 204 is acquired for all of the pairs of rails 282. When the rail 282 is detected, the rack 202 is moved at a speed suitable for the detection and at a low speed, and the arrival at the detection position of the rail 282 is accurately detected by the transfer sensor 312. Will be detected at
  • the transfer sensor 312 is provided above the ideal component supply position, and the rail 282 detected by the transfer sensor 312 is shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, it is located above the ideal parts supply position. As described above, the vertical distance L1 with respect to the ideal component supply position of the transfer sensor 312 has been acquired.
  • the notch 292 includes the support surface 2886 of the rail 282 in the vertical direction of the rack 202, and the support surface 28 6 is located so as to be located on the upper and lower sides of the rail, so that the portion exceeding the set amount of the notch 2 92 comes off the transfer sensor 3 1 2, and when the rail 2 8 2 is detected, the detected rail As shown in FIG.
  • the support surface 286 of the 282 is located above the transfer sensor position.
  • the vertical distance of the support surface 286 to the transfer sensor position that is, the distance L 2 between the support surface 286 and the lower surface of the notch 292 is obtained by design. Same for rails 282.
  • the distance L2 is short and has no error. Therefore, when the rail 282 is detected by the transfer sensor 312, the support surface 286 is located at a distance equal to the sum of the distances L1 and L2 and above the ideal component supply position. Based on the operating position and the distance L1 and the distance L2 acquired for the rack elevating device 204, the pallet 200 supported by the rail 282 is set to the ideal component supply position.
  • the stop position of the rack elevating device 204 for stopping the operation at the same time is determined.
  • the set height is a distance L1 and a distance L2 upward from the ideal component supply position, and the set height is different from the arrangement height of the transfer sensor 312. I have. Further, the set height is also different from the height of the support surface 426 of the conveyor belts 404, 406.
  • the stop position of the rack elevating device 204 is defined by the count value of the encoder that detects the cumulative rotation angle of the rack elevating motor 302, and the transfer position is determined for each of the plurality of pairs of rails 282. Is determined each time the position of the rail 312 is detected, and is stored in the memory in association with the number of the rail 282.
  • This memory may be a rack elevating device operating position memory or a memory provided separately therefrom.
  • the memory for storing the stop position of the rack elevating device 204 constitutes the rack elevating device stop position memory.
  • the stop position may be determined when the pallet 200 is positioned at the component supply position.
  • the pallet 200 for supplying the circuit components 20 is positioned at the actual component supply position sufficiently close to the ideal component supply position. Is done. Therefore, despite the relative height error between the rack elevating device 204 and the transport conveyor 206 and the relative height error between the multiple pairs of rails 282, the rail 282
  • the support surface 286 of the transfer conveyor 206 is positioned exactly on the same horizontal plane as the support surface 404 of the transfer conveyor 206, and the rack 202 of the pallet 200 and the transfer conveyor. Delivery to and from 206 is performed smoothly.
  • the rack elevating motor 302 force is controlled so that the elevating speed at the start of elevating the rack 202 is smoothly increased and the speed is smoothly decelerated at the end of elevating.
  • the stop position of the rack lifting / lowering device 204 for positioning the pallet 200 at the component supply position is obtained in advance, and the lifting / lowering speed control can be easily performed based thereon.
  • the pallet 200 positioned at the component supply position is moved by the transport conveyor 206 in a horizontal direction parallel to the component storage plane, and is pulled out from the storage position stored in the rack 202.
  • the mounting head 60 is moved from the S tray 50 to a component extraction allowable position where the circuit component 20 is allowed to be extracted. After the circuit component 20 is supplied, the circuit component 20 is returned to the rack 202.
  • the holders 410 of the transport conveyor 206 are positioned at the holding position and are on standby in preparation for holding the pallets 200.
  • the holding position is the pair of chucks 4 58 force S of the holder 4 10, the pallet transport direction, and the direction parallel to the longitudinal direction of the rail 2 32 This position is located at approximately the same position as the handle 222 of the stored palette 200.
  • the pair of chucks 458 are open and A pair of grips 2 28 of each handle 2 26 of the plurality of stored pallets 200 can pass between them without interfering with the gripping claws 4 0 6 4 6 2. You.
  • the storage position of the pallet 200 stored in the rack 202 in the transport direction is determined by the rotation limit of the first gripping claw 32 2 defined by the stopper 350.
  • the stopper 350 is shared by all of the plurality of pallet gripping devices 320, and the position of each handle 226 of the plurality of pallets 200 in the transport direction in the state of being stored in the rack 202 is as follows. As a result, interference with the chuck 458 during lifting and lowering of the rack is avoided, and the handle 222 of the pallet 200 positioned at the component supply position is gripped by the chuck 458.
  • the pallet 200 is fixed to the rack 202 by the pallet gripping device 320, and the tray 50 cannot be moved with respect to the pallet 200 by the restraining members 272, 274.
  • the pallet 200 does not move with respect to the rack 202 when the rack 202 moves up and down, and the tray 50 does not move with respect to the pallet 200. Even if impact is applied to the pallet 200 via the rack 202 at the start or stop of lifting / lowering, the vibration of the pallet 200 and the tray 50 is suppressed, and the pallet 200 is accommodated in the accommodating recess 216.
  • the deviation of the circuit component 20 and the change of the posture are small.
  • the pallet 200 is provided with a vibration absorbing layer 250, and even if vibration is transmitted to the pallet 200, the vibration is absorbed by the pallet itself.
  • the transmission to the tray 50 can be reduced, and the displacement of the circuit components 20 can be satisfactorily suppressed.
  • the pallet 200 is formed by laminating a vibration absorbing layer 250 and a magnetic material layer 252, 254.
  • the pallet 200 is provided with vibration absorbing capability, has rigidity, and is formed to be thin and light. The vibration transmitted to the knurl 200 is absorbed, and does not continue to vibrate for a long time.
  • the pair of grips 228 of the handle 226 of the pallet 200 are respectively paired. Is located between the gripping claws 460 and 462 of the chuck 458, the chuck 458 is closed, the grip portion 228 is gripped, and the notch 200 is held by the holder. While being held by 410, the pallet gripping device 320 releases the pallet 200 from gripping.
  • the first and second gripping claw rotating devices 352, 374 rotate the claw holders 32, 36, and release the first and second gripping claws 32, 32, 34, respectively. It is pivoted to the position.
  • Holding the handle 2 26 by the holder 4 10 and releasing the palette 2 0 0 by the pallet gripper 3 2 0 means holding the handle 2 6 6 by the holder 4 10 and the pallet gripper 3 2 0 It is desirable that the pallet 200 is held so as not to be held at the same time. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the release of the pallet 200 by the pallet gripping device 320 and the holding of the handle 226 by the holder 410 are performed in parallel, and the gripping claws 3 2 2, 3 2 4 starts rotating to the release position, the gripping claws 4 60, 4 62 start moving to the gripping position, and the gripping claws 3 2 2, 3 2 4 engage the engaging surface 2.
  • the gripping claws 4 60 and 4 62 engage with the grip portion 2 68 and start holding. Therefore, the pallet 200 is not twisted, is held by the holding tool 410, and is in a free state in which the pallet 200 is not held by any of the holding tool 410 and the pallet gripping device 320. There is no danger of changing.
  • the holding tool is held. 4 10 may start holding the handle 2 6 6.
  • the conveyor belts 400 and 400 move in the direction in which the moving member 450 moves forward, that is, from the rack 202. Orbit in the direction away.
  • the knobs 200 held by the holders 410 are pulled out of the rack 202, and the pair of rails 232 is moved from the rails 282 of the rack 202 to the pair of conveyor belts 4. Transfer on the support 4 2 4 of 0 4, 4 6.
  • the pallet 200 for supplying the circuit components 200 is positioned with high positioning accuracy (at the actual component supply position sufficiently close to the ideal component supply position) by moving the rack 202 up and down.
  • the support surfaces 4 2 6 of the conveyor belts 4 4 and 4 6 6 and the support surfaces 2 8 6 of the rail 2 8 2 supporting the palette 2 0 positioned at the actual parts supply position of the rack 2 are located at exactly the same height.
  • a guide surface 236 is provided on the lower surface of the end of the rail 232 of the pallet 200 in the pallet transport direction, and the pallet 200 moves over due to the inclination of the guide surface 236.
  • the pallet 200 can be smoothly moved even if there is a slight difference between the heights of the support surface 426 and the support surface 286.
  • the rail 232 has a flat surface with its lower surface extending in the pallet transport direction.
  • the portion after the tip continues smoothly. Transfer to conveyor belt 4 0 4 '4 0 6. Further, the support portions 426 of the conveyor belts 404, 406 and the rail 282 are provided close to each other with a very short distance therebetween, and the pallet 200 has a During the transfer, almost the entire rail 232 is supported by the rail 282 and the conveyor belts 404, 406, so that the vehicle can move in a stable state.
  • the holding tool 410 holding the pallet 200 is attached to the conveyor belts 404, 406, and moves integrally with the conveyor belts 404, 406, and the holding tool 4
  • the retainer 411 is inevitably moved by the conveyor belt 404. 0 4, 4 0 6 at the same speed, so that the pallet 200 moves from the rail 282 of the rack 202 to the conveyor belt 40, as shown in Figure 15 (b). 4. Transferred to 406 and transported by Comparator 406, 406. Therefore, the pallet 200 moves relatively with respect to the holder 410 and the conveyor belts 404, 406, and hardly vibrates. 50 also hardly vibrates, and a shift or the like of the circuit component 20 accommodated in the tray 50 is avoided.
  • Node 0 200 is transferred from rack 202 to conveyor belts 404 and 406 When it is moved, it enters between the fixed rail 490 of the guide device 208 and the movable rail 492, and is perpendicular to the component accommodation plane of the rail 232 by both rails 490, 492. The movement is guided by being pinched on the side surface 238.
  • the movable rail 492 is located at the forward end position by the bias of the spring 510, but the action of the slope of the guide portion 234 provided at the end of the rail 332 causes the pallet 200 to move. Moves the movable rail 492 away from the fixed rail 490 against the biasing force of the spring 5110, enters between the rails 490, 492, and moves the movable rail 492.
  • the movable rail 492 can bend in a direction intersecting the pallet transport direction in a horizontal plane parallel to the pallet transport surface, and the movable rail 492 urged by the spring 510
  • the pallet 200 can be in contact with the side surface 238 of the rail 230 at three or more places separated in the longitudinal direction, and can be sandwiched together with the fixed rail 490.
  • the pallet 200 is sandwiched between the left and right sides by the fixed rail 490 and the movable rail 492 with an appropriate amount of force. You will be guided to move.
  • the vibration of the pallet 200 is suppressed, and the displacement and the like of the circuit components 20 accommodated in the tray 50 are avoided. Further, the frictional force between the pallet 200 and the fixed rails 490 and the movable rails 492 is small, so that the pallets 200 can move smoothly and vibration is suppressed.
  • the conveyor belts 404 and 406 are made of rubber, and the vibration transmitted to the conveyor 206 is absorbed by the elastic deformation of the conveyor belts 404 and 406. As a result, the transmission to the pallet 200 is suppressed, and the vibration transmitted to the pallet 200 from the holder 410 etc. is also reduced by the elastic deformation and internal friction of the conveyor belts 404, 406. Attenuated.
  • the conveyor belts 404 and 406 support the pallet 200 by the outer peripheral surface provided with the teeth 41, and the guide pulleys 42 on the flat inner peripheral surface having no teeth 41. Since it is guided by 8, the vibrations of the conveyor belts 404 and 406 during orbiting can be reduced. If the conveyor belts 404, 406 are guided by the guide pulley 428 on the side where the teeth 412 are provided, the teeth 412 are guided. While the conveyor belts 404 and 406 are vibrated each time they pass over the pulley 428, the conveyor belts 404 and 406 and the guide pulleys 428 contact each other on a smooth surface and are continuously connected. The conveyor belts 404, 406 are caused to circulate with little vibration, and the vibration of the pallet 200 is suppressed. .
  • the pallet 200 is formed by laminating a vibration absorption layer 250 and magnetic material layers 252 and 254, and the pallet 200 is moved up and down by raising and lowering the rack 202.
  • the effect of reducing the transmission of vibration to the tray 50 due to the absorption of vibration by the vibration itself, a good effect of suppressing the displacement of the circuit component 20, and the effect of early convergence of vibration can be obtained.
  • the conveyor belts 404, 406 are stopped in a state where the pallet 200 has reached a preset component removal allowable position.
  • the belt drive motor 4 3 4 of the orbiting drive device 4 08 is controlled by the control device 5 3 0 when the conveyor belts 4 0 4 and 6 6 are started to rotate and the pallet 2 0
  • the speed is smoothly increased, and control is performed so that the speed is smoothly reduced at the end of the round and at the end of the transport. Therefore, the acceleration and deceleration are smoothly increased and decreased at the start and end of the transport of the palette 200, respectively, and the palette 200 is started and stopped with little impact, and the tray 500 is stopped. Is suppressed.
  • the mounting head 60 When the pallet 200 reaches the component removal allowable position, the mounting head 60 is moved to the component removal position by the 3Y moving device 96 and lowered by the head lifting device 104. Then, the circuit component 20 is taken out from the tray 50 supported by the pallet 200. At this time, the mounting head 60 is lowered to a position corresponding to the height of the tray 50 for supplying the circuit components 20.
  • the pallet 200 may support only one tray 50, or may support a plurality of stacked trays.
  • the uppermost tray 50 supplies the circuit components 20, and when the tray 50 becomes empty, the pallet 20 is provided by the tray extraction device (not shown) provided at the component extraction allowable position.
  • the tray 50 which is taken out from the tray 0 and discharged to a discharge device (not shown), is positioned at the uppermost stage by discharging the tray 50, and supplies the circuit component 20. Therefore, every time the tray 50 is discharged, the distance from the support surface 260 which is the upper surface of the pallet 200 of the uppermost tray 50 is reduced.
  • the height of the pallet 200 at the part removal allowable position is the conveyor belt 4 0 4, 40 6, the height is constant and constant, and among the plurality of trays 50 supported by the knurls 200, the height of the uppermost tray 50 is tray 5 Each time 0 is discharged, it becomes lower and the distance to the mounting head 60 becomes longer.However, by controlling the descending end position of the mounting head 60, it is adjusted according to the height of the uppermost tray 50. The mounting head 60 is lowered to the set position, and the circuit component 20 is sucked without any trouble.
  • the height of the uppermost tray 50 out of the at least one tray 50 supported on the pallet 200 detects the height of the tray 50 with respect to the pallet 200. It is obtained by doing. Therefore, first, the height of the pallet 200 in a state where the tray 500 is not supported is detected by the tray height confirmation sensor 550.
  • the tray height confirmation sensor 550 is constituted by a transmission type photoelectric sensor which is a kind of a photoelectric sensor. Tray height The transmitter and receiver (not shown) of the confirmation sensor 550 are located above the position corresponding to the component supply position of the frame 300, and sandwich the rack 202. The rack is located at a position separated in the pallet transport direction, and is inserted into and removed from the rack 202 at the component supply position. Is detected. The transmitter and receiver of the tray height confirmation sensor 550 must also be able to block the light emitted by the transmitter in the width direction of the rack 202 by the positioning surface 262 and the grip 264. And the height of the support surface 260 and the height of the uppermost tray 50 are detected.
  • empty pallets 200 are stored in all the shelves 284 of the rack 202, and the height of each of the pallets 200 is detected.
  • the rack 202 is raised from the lower end position and the pallet 200 reaches the portion where the tray height confirmation sensor 550 is provided, the light emitted from the projector emits the pallet body 230
  • the output signal of the tray height confirmation sensor 550 changes from ON to OFF. The change in this signal detects that the palette 200 has reached the height confirmation position.
  • the end detecting the accumulated rotation angle (rotational position) of the rack elevating motor 302 is performed.
  • the count value of the coder is the height of the pallet 200
  • data specifying the storage position of the pallet 200 in the rack 202 is attached to each of the plurality of shelves 284 of the rack 202.
  • the information is stored in a palette height memory provided in the RAM 536 of the computer 540, in association with the number which is the shelf identification information or the storage position identification information.
  • the height of the pallet 200 is a unique value for each of the plurality of pallets 200 mounted on the rack 202, is detected and stored in advance, and The data is stored in the backup unit and remains even if the power is turned off.
  • the tray 50 is mounted on the knurl 200, and the height of the tray 50 supported by the pallet 200 is set prior to the start of mounting the circuit components 20 on the series of printed wiring boards 14. Is detected.
  • the rack 202 is raised, and for each of the plurality of pallets 200, the tray 50 blocks the light emitted from the emitter of the tray height confirmation sensor 550, and the amount of light received by the receiver is threshold.
  • the count value of the encoder of the rack elevating motor 302 is acquired as the height of the tray 50, and the pallet 2 supporting the tray 50 Stored together with the height of 00.
  • the difference between the encoder value obtained for pallet 200 and the encoder value obtained for tray 500 corresponds to the sum of the thicknesses of all trays 50 supported on pallet 200, This represents the height of the uppermost tray 50 with respect to the palette 200 (support surface 260).
  • the height of the tray 50 is detected, for example, every time the tray 50 becomes empty and is discharged from the palette 200.
  • the circuit components 20 disappear during the supply, and when the tray 50 is discharged, they are stored in the same pallet 200.
  • the height of the tray 50 is detected and used for controlling the lowering position of the mounting head 60. When the height is detected, the tray 50 is returned to the rack 202.
  • the height of the pallet 200 in a state where the pallet 200 is supported by the conveyor belts 404 and 406 of the transport conveyor 206 at the component take-out allowable position is obtained in advance based on the height of the support surface 426, and is a unique value.
  • the height of palette 200 is the same for all palettes 200 Yes, errors are ignored. Therefore, the height of the pallet 200 at the component take-out allowable position, and the uppermost tray 50 of the trays 50 supported by the pallet 200, which is the tray 5 for supplying the circuit components 20 From the height of the pallet 200 with respect to the pallet 200, the distance between the tray 50 at the component removal allowable position and the mounting head 60 at the rising end position is obtained, and the mounting head 6 is determined based on the distance.
  • the descending end position of 0 is controlled, and the suction nozzle 1 14 is lowered to a position where the circuit components 20 housed in the S tray 50 can be reliably sucked without damage.
  • Pallet 200 moves smoothly when returning. At this time, the transfer of the pallet 200 is performed by the guide surface 236 provided at the longitudinal end of the rail 232 and the guide surface 288 provided at the front end of the rail 282. While being guided, it is guided by a guide portion 234 provided at the longitudinal end of the rail 232.
  • the pallets 200 are returned to the racks 202, and when they are stored, they are conveyed with vibration suppressed as in the case where they are pulled out of the racks 202, and the conveyor belts 404, 406 From the rack 202.
  • the holding tool 4 10 The release of the handle 260 by the pallet and the gripping of the pallet 200 by the pallet gripping device 320 are performed in parallel. Thereafter, the rack 202 is moved up and down, and then the pallet 200 for supplying the circuit component 20 is positioned at the component supply position. Although illustration and detailed description are omitted, in the tray-type component supply device 26, the illustration of the storage of the palette 200 in the rack 202 and the arrival of the component at the component removal allowable position is omitted. The detection is performed by a sensor, and based on the detection, an operation to be performed next, such as lifting and lowering of the rack 202, is performed.
  • the height of the tray 50 supported by the palette 200 of the control device 530 with respect to the palette 200 and the height of the palette 200 are determined. Is the height of all the trays 50 mounted on the pallet 200 and the height of the tray 50 for supplying the circuit components 20 with respect to the palette 200 is calculated as follows.
  • a tray height acquisition unit based on the tray pallet height difference is configured together with the tray height confirmation sensor 550 as a height detection device, and the height is adjusted according to the height of the tray 50 mounted on the pallet 200.
  • a portion that controls the head lifting device 104 and controls the lower end position of the mounting head 60 constitutes a height control unit.
  • the part that controls the belt drive motor 4 3 4 of the control device 530 and controls the transfer speed of the pallet 200 forms a pallet transfer acceleration / deceleration control unit and controls the rack elevating motor 3 02
  • the portion for controlling the vertical speed of the rack 202 constitutes a rack vertical acceleration / deceleration control unit.
  • a part for determining a plurality of stop positions of the rack elevating device 304 of the control device 530 forms a stop position determining unit, and based on the determined stop position, a rack elevating device 204
  • the elevator control unit is configured together with the part that controls the rack and the rack elevating device operating position memory that configures the rack elevating device operating position storage unit, and the height is adjusted together with the transfer sensor 3 1 2 that configures the component container holding unit detection device. Configure the device.
  • the conveyor belts 404, 406 of the transport conveyor 206 are provided.
  • the support portion 424 of the guide rail 428 may be supported by a guide rail 600 as a belt support member, as shown in FIG.
  • the electronic circuit component supply device is a tray-type component supply device, which includes a pallet, a relative movement prevention device, a holder for the transport conveyor, a guide device for guiding the movement of the pallet by the transport conveyor, and a pair of conveyor belts of the transport conveyor.
  • the belt supporting member for supporting the tray type component supply device is different from the tray type component supply device 26 of the embodiment shown in FIGS.
  • the other parts are configured in the same manner as the tray type component supply device 26 and the electronic circuit component mounting machine including the same, and the description is omitted. Also, components having the same functions as the components of the above-described embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the corresponding relationships are shown, and the description is omitted.
  • the pallet 640 and the pallet holding device 650 as a relative movement preventing device will be described.
  • the pallet holding device 65 is provided on the rack 652 in the same manner as the pallet holding device 320.
  • the rack 652 has almost the same configuration as the rack 202, and the pallet holding device 650 corresponds to each pair of the plurality of pairs of rails 6556 of the rack body 654. Each part is provided.
  • the plurality of pallet holding devices 65 0 are respectively a pallet holding pin 660 as a component container movable holding member, a pallet holding surface 66 2, which is a component holder parallel holding surface of the component container fixed holding member. Includes pallet holding pin moving device 6 6 4.
  • the pallet holding pin moving device 666 includes a pin driving member 668 common to the plurality of pallet holding pins 660 and an air cylinder 670 as a driving source. As shown in FIG. 23, mounting members 674 are provided on one outer surface of the pair of side walls 672 of the rack body 654 in a vertical direction, and between the side walls 672. The direction in which the pin driving member 668 is parallel to the support surface 676 supporting the pallet 6400 of the rail 656 from below, and the width direction or the left-right direction of the rack 652 (support surface 6 (In the direction parallel to the longitudinal direction of the rails 656 in a plane parallel to 6).
  • the pin drive member 6 6 8 has a long plate shape, and a plurality of pairs of rails in the vertical direction It is disposed over the entirety of 656 and is moved by an air cylinder 670 mounted on the mounting member 670, and approaches and separates from the pallet holding surface 662 on the other side wall 672 side. Let me do.
  • the movement of the pin driving member 6 6 8 is performed by a guide device 6 8 2 including a pair of guide members 6 8 8 and a guide block 6 8 0 (one is shown in FIG. 23). Guided by
  • Each of the pallet holding pins 660 of the plurality of pallet holding devices 650 corresponds to each of the plurality of pairs of rails 656 of the pin driving member 668, as partially shown in FIG. Each part is fitted linearly and relatively movably in a direction parallel to the left-right direction of the rack 652.
  • the pallet holding pin 660 has a circular cross-sectional shape, and the end of the rack 652 on the side of the rack 652 has a conical shape.
  • the joint is 6 8 6.
  • the pallet holding pin 660 is provided with a pin driving member 66 by a compression coil spring 688 serving as a spring member as an elastic member which is a kind of biasing means disposed between the pin driving member 668 and the pin driving member 668.
  • the movement limit of the pallet holding pin 660 due to the bias of the spring 688 is such that the retaining ring 689 provided on the pallet holding pin 660 and constituting a prescribed portion is driven by a pin. It is defined by abutting on the abutting portion 692 provided on the member 688 and constituting the defining portion.
  • the plurality of pallet holding pins 660 are simultaneously moved by the pin driving member 668 being moved by the air cylinder 670, and a holding position for holding the pallet 640 and a knurl 640 are provided. It is moved to the release position to release 0.
  • the pallet holding surface 662 is formed by a surface perpendicular to the supporting surface 676 of the other side wall 672 of the rack body 654. It is provided. The portion of the side wall 672 where the pallet holding surface 662 is provided constitutes a component container fixing and holding member.
  • An engagement groove 72 having a V-shaped cross section is provided substantially vertically in the center of the one parallel to the pallet conveyance direction.
  • the pin driving member 668 is located at the retreat end position furthest away from the rack 652, and the pallet holding is performed.
  • Pin 660 force As shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 23, the engaging portion 686 is disengaged from the engaging groove 702 and is located at the release position retracted into the opening 690.
  • the knowledge retaining pins 660 do not interfere with the sights 700 of the pallet 640, and allow the knowledge 640 to enter and exit the rack 652. Interference between the knurling pin 660 and the mounting member 674 is avoided by the opening 710 provided in the mounting member 674.
  • Pallet holding device 6 5 0 force When holding a pair of rails 7 0 0 on a pair of rails 6 5 6 and supporting a pallet 6 4 0 supported from below by a support surface 6 7 6
  • the pin driving member 668 is advanced by the air cylinder 680, and the plurality of pallet holding pins 660 are simultaneously advanced, and are protruded into the rack body 654 to engage with the engagement groove 70. Inserted into 2.
  • the engaging portion 686 and the engaging groove are fitted into the engaging grooves 720 by the action of the respective inclined surfaces 92, and the other of the pair of rails 700 is pressed against the pallet holding surface 662.
  • the pallet holding pin 660 and the pallet holding surface 662 engage with each of the pair of pallets 700 of the pallet 640 from a direction parallel to the supporting surface 676 to form the pallet 6.
  • the movement of the pallet holding pin 660 along with the pallet holding surface 626 holds the pallet 6 5 Fix to 2.
  • the pallet 640 is positioned by the pallet holding surface 662 in the left-right direction.
  • the pallet holding surface 662 is also a pallet positioning surface.
  • the pallet 640 can be moved in and out of the rack 652 by, for example, an operator, and the entire rack 652 is deviated from the component supply position, for example, the pallet access area above the component supply position. It is performed in a state where it is moved to the pallet storage work area.
  • the front of the pallet loading / unloading area portion on the conveyor side
  • the storage end position defining member that defines the storage end position of the pallet 640 in the rack 652 in a direction parallel to the longitudinal direction of the rail 656 is the same as the frame 300.
  • the position is fixed on a similar frame (not shown), and the rack is provided over the entire pair of rails 656 of the rack 652.
  • the operator opens the door on the back side of the cart (opposite the conveyor), places the pallet 640 on the rail 656, and pallets until it is specified by the storage end position defining member. Forward and store pallet 640 on the shelf. After storage, if the door of the cart is closed, the pallet 640 is positioned in the front-back direction. In such a position, the engagement groove 720 of the pallet 64 and the pallet holding pin 660 almost coincide with each other in the front-rear direction, and the pallet holding pin 660 is moved forward. Then, the pallet 640 can be held in the engagement groove 732 to hold the pallet 640.
  • the storage end position defining member is not provided at the component supply position, and the transfer of the pallet 64 to the transport conveyor is not hindered.
  • a storage preventing member for preventing the pallet 64 from being stored in the rack 652 is provided, When the storage end position is not specified, the pallet 640 is not stored in the rack 652.
  • the forward end position of the pin driving member 668 is further than the position at which the pallet holding pin 660 fits into the engaging groove 720 and is to be engaged with the groove side surface of the engaging groove 702.
  • the pin drive member 668 is set to the advanced position, and extra movement of the pin drive member 668 causes the spring 688 to be compressed and the pin drive member 668 to move relative to the pallet holding pin 660 Allowed. For this reason, the plurality of pallet holding pins 660 are moved forward simultaneously, but due to a manufacturing error or an assembly error of the rack 652 or the pallet 640, etc., the plurality of pallet holding pins 660 are not moved.
  • the pallet holding pin 660 does not twist the pallet 640,
  • the engagement groove 72 can be securely fitted.
  • the pin drive member 668 is retracted by the air cylinder 670 to be separated from the rack 652, and a plurality of pallets are held.
  • the pins 660 are simultaneously pulled out of the engagement grooves 702, and the engagement portions 686 are retracted into the openings 690 of the side walls 672, and the pallets 640 are latched. Withdrawal from ku 6 52 is possible.
  • the transport conveyor 740 includes a pair of conveyor belts 756, 758 and a circling drive device 760 as in the case of the transport conveyor 206.
  • the support portions 762, 746 of the conveyor belts 756, 758 are supported by guide rails 766, 768 as belt support members, respectively.
  • the orbital driving device 760 is configured similarly to the orbiting driving device 408, and each of the pair of guide rails 766 and 768 is provided with a pair of supporting members 7 7 together with the orbiting driving device 760. It is attached to 0, 7 72.
  • Reference numeral 686 has a similar configuration, and the guide rail 766 will be representatively described with reference to FIG.
  • the conveyor belt 756 supported by the guide rail 766 is a timing belt provided with teeth on the outer peripheral surface in the same manner as the aforementioned conveyor belts 404 and 406, and the guide rail 766 is a conveyor belt 7.
  • the belt support surface 776 which contacts the flat inner peripheral surface of the belt 6 and supports it from below, is provided along both edges parallel to the longitudinal direction of the belt support surface 776, respectively. Regulators projecting at right angles from 6
  • the belt support surface 776 is coated with polytetrafluoroethylene and made of a low-friction material.
  • a groove 7802 is formed, which is opened to the belt support surface 776 and penetrates in parallel with the longitudinal direction of the guide rail 766. Interference with a port nut for fixing the moving member described above to the conveyor belt 756 is avoided.
  • the conveyor belt 756 is wound around a guide pulley 784 constituting the orbiting driving device 760 and the like, and is placed on the belt support surface 776 of the guide rail 766 to form the belt support surface 7.
  • the belt support member is a guide rail, the number of parts required for guiding the conveyor belt is smaller than when a guide pulley is used, and installation is easy.
  • a plurality of guide devices 752 are mounted on the pair of support members 770, 772, respectively. It includes a guide roller 790 (only one is shown in FIG. 27) as a rotation guide member. Each of these three guide rollers 790 is rotatably mounted on supporting members 770, 772 about an axis perpendicular to the pallet transport plane and perpendicular to the component receiving plane, respectively.
  • the three guide rollers 790 on one side are provided side by side along a straight line parallel to the pallet transport direction.
  • the three guide rollers 790 are provided on both sides in the component receiving plane of the pallet 640 conveyed by the conveyer 740.
  • the guide roller 790 is made of rubber, and a part of the outer peripheral surface thereof is projected on the guide rails 766, 768.
  • the holders 750 are provided at both ends of the pair of conveyor belts 756, 758 at the portions constituting the support portions 762, 746 in the longitudinal direction.
  • the section is provided on a movable member 800 detachably fixed, and is moved at the same speed as the conveyor belts 756 and 758.
  • the retainer 750 includes a pair of engagement pins 802, 804 as engagement members, and the engagement pins 800, 804 They are moved by engaging pin moving devices 806 and 808 as engaging member moving devices, respectively.
  • the pair of engaging pins 802, 804 and the engaging pin moving device 806, 808 have the same configuration, respectively, and the engaging pin 802 and the engaging pin moving device 80, respectively. 6 will be described as a representative.
  • the engaging pin 802 has a circular cross-sectional shape and a conical engaging protrusion. It has a unit 8 10.
  • the engaging pin 800 is provided on the rack 652 side surface of the moving member 800 with a guide rail 816 and a guide block 8 as a guide member, respectively.
  • the pallet is guided by a guiding device 8 20 including the pallet 8 and provided so as to be movable in a direction parallel to the pallet transport direction in a plane parallel to the pallet transport plane, and outwardly, that is, the engaging projection 8 1 0 is provided on the conveyor belt 7556 side.
  • the engaging pin 800 has a shaft-like portion 826 parallel to the moving direction of the engaging pin 802 and opposite to the engaging projection 810. And is fitted to a bracket 828 provided on the moving member 800 so as to be relatively movable in the axial direction.
  • the engaging pin 802 is urged outward by a compression coil spring 830 which is a spring member as an elastic member, which is a kind of urging means provided between the bracket 828 and the engaging pin 802, and is engaged.
  • the projection 8100 is urged in a direction to fit into an engagement groove 832 as an engagement recess provided on the front surface of the pallet 6400.
  • the engagement groove 832 has a substantially triangular cross-sectional shape, and is provided to penetrate vertically.
  • the limit of the movement of the engagement pin 802 due to the bias of the spring 830 is defined by the stopper 834 provided on the shaft portion 826 contacting the bracket 828.
  • the engagement pin 8302 is fitted into the engagement groove 832 as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 27 by the bias of the spring 8330, and the engagement groove 832 of the pallet 6400 is The held portion, which is the provided portion, is held in a held state.
  • the engagement pin 8302 fits into the engagement groove 832 before the movement is regulated by the stopper 833, and holds the palette 640.
  • the holding of the pallet 640 of the engaging pin 802 by the bias of the spring 830 is released by the pin releasing device 840.
  • the pin release device 840 includes an air cylinder 850 as a drive source and an arm 852 as a drive member, and is held by the pair of support members 770, 772.
  • the support member 854 (see FIG. 26) is provided at a fixed position.
  • the arm 852 is moved by the air cylinder 850 in a direction parallel to the moving direction of the engaging pin 802, and the engaging pin 802 is moved to the moving end position by the bias of the spring 830.
  • the engaging portion 8 is provided on the outer side (spring 830 side) of the engaging portion 856 provided on the shaft portion 826. Located with a gap between 5 and 6 As shown by the solid line in FIG.
  • the engaging portion 856 is engaged with the non-operating position or the standby position, and the engaging pin 802 is moved against the urging force of the spring 830.
  • the engagement projection 810 is moved to the operation position where the engagement projection 810 comes out of the engagement groove 832.
  • the engagement pin moving device 806 includes the spring 830 and the pin releasing device 840. The same applies to the engagement pin moving device 808.
  • the engagement grooves 832 are provided at two locations separated from each other in the width direction of the front surface of the pallet 64 so as to face each other.
  • the two engaging pins 800, 804 provided opposite to each other with the protruding portions 810 facing outwards with the conveyor belts 756, 758 facing the engaging pin moving device 8 are provided. They are moved in opposite directions by 06 and 808, are fitted into the engagement grooves 832, and are separated.
  • the holder 750 When the rack 652 is moved up and down, as shown in FIG. 25, the holder 750 is positioned at the holding position adjacent to the rack 652 in the pallet transport direction, and the palette 64 In preparation for the holding of The arm 852 is located at the operating position, and the pair of engaging pins 802, 804 are disengaged from the engaging projections 810 from the engaging grooves 832, so that the pallet 6400 is disengaged. It is located at the release position to release. Therefore, the portion of the pallet 640 provided with the engagement groove 832 can be moved up and down without interfering with the engagement pins 802 and 804. When one of the plurality of pallets 640 is positioned at the component supply position, the arm 852 is moved to the standby position by the air cylinder 850.
  • the engaging pins 8 02 and 8 04 are respectively advanced by the bias of the spring 8 30, and the engaging projections 8 10 are fitted into the engaging grooves 8 32.
  • the movement limit of the engaging pins 802, 804 due to the bias of the spring 830 is limited to the stopper portion 834 and the bracket 828.
  • the engagement projection 810 engages with the groove side surface of the engagement groove 832 before being specified by the contact with the engagement groove 832, and the pair of engagement pins 800, 804 move in opposite directions. As a result, a state is obtained in which the palettes 64 are held in a state of being stretched against each other.
  • the arm 852 is moved to a preset standby position, and the arm 852 is moved to the engagement portion.
  • the engagement pins 800 and 804 are inserted into the engagement grooves 832 by the bias of the springs 8300, and are held in a state where the pallet 6400 is held. Dripping. Also, The arm 852 is separated from the engaging portion 856 to allow the holder 750 to hold the pallet 64 and move.
  • the conveyor belts 756, 758 are circulated by the circulating drive device 760, and the moving member 800 is moved and held.
  • the pallet 640 held by the tool 750 is moved, pulled out of the rack 652, transferred to the conveyor belts 756, 758, and transported.
  • the guide roller 790 has a part of its outer peripheral surface on the guide rails 766, 768, and slightly protrudes into the transport path of the pallet 640.
  • the guide is guided by the inside 860, which is inclined at the front end of the pair of rails 700 and a pair of rails, and is made of rubber between the guide rollers 790 on both sides of the pallet 6400.
  • the guide roller 790 enters while being elastically deformed, and is pinched from both sides by the guide roller 790 to restrict the movement in the left-right direction, thereby guiding the movement in a positioned state.
  • the pallet 640 is held in the left and right direction by the rack 652 and is held by the holder 750, and is transferred from the rail 702 of the rack 652 to the conveyor belts 756, 758. At this time, it is housed in a position where it can enter smoothly between the guide rollers 790 on both sides.
  • the bearing surface 776 of the guide rails 766, 768 has a low coefficient of friction, and the conveyor belts 756, 758 have low friction, are smoothly oscillated with little vibration, Pallet 640 is conveyed with less vibration.
  • each arm 852 of the pair of engagement pin moving devices 806, 808 is located at the standby position, and each of the engagement portions of the pair of engagement pins 800, 804 is engaged. 8 5 6 is advanced between the arms 8 52.
  • the arm 852 After the holder 750 is moved to the holding position, the arm 852 is moved to the operating position, but engages with the engaging portion 856 on the way, and the engaging pins 802, 804 Is retracted against the urging force of the spring 8300, the engaging projection 8100 is disengaged from the engaging groove 832, and the pallet 6400 is released.
  • the timing of holding and releasing the pallet 640 by the holding tool 650 and the holding and releasing of the pallet 640 by the pallet holding device 650, and positioning the elevation position of the rack 652 And the like are performed in the same manner as in the above-described embodiment, and thus the description is omitted.
  • the holding surface (pallet holding surface 662) of the component container holding device (pallet holding device 650) in the component container parallel direction may be formed of a low friction material.
  • the low friction material can be made of, for example, polytetrafluoroethylene.
  • the fixed engagement member of the component container holding device may be a pallet holding pin similar to the pallet holding pin 660.
  • the fixed engagement member of the component container holding device may be a roller. At least one roller is provided on a portion of the rack where the rail is provided so that it can rotate around a rotation axis perpendicular to the container support surface, and a part of the outer peripheral surface protrudes above the rail.
  • each of the plurality of component container holders includes a container support surface that supports the component container from below.
  • the relative movement preventing device engages each of the plurality of parts of the component container from a direction parallel to the container support surface, and moves the component container at least in a direction parallel to the component container support surface. It can be considered to include a parallel movement prevention device for preventing the movement.
  • Each of the plurality of parallel movement preventing devices provided corresponding to each of the plurality of component container holders constitutes a relative movement preventing device.
  • the pallet holding device 320 and the pallet holding device 65 are one embodiment of the parallel movement preventing device.
  • Each of the plurality of component container holding portions has a container support surface for supporting the component container from below, and the relative movement preventing device is provided at a plurality of positions of the component container from a direction perpendicular to the container support surface. May be included to prevent movement in a direction perpendicular to at least the component container support surface of the component container.
  • the device which is one mode of the parallel movement prevention device, includes: a plurality of engagement members that engage with each of a plurality of locations of the component container; and at least one of the plurality of engagement members includes the container support surface. And an engaging member moving device for moving the member in a direction parallel to the moving direction. A pair of the first and second gripping claws 32 2 and 3 24 of the pallet gripping device 320 are engaged with each other. , And the first and second gripping claw rotating devices 3552 and 374 correspond to the engaging member moving device. At least one of the plurality of engaging members is a stationary engaging member provided at rest, and another at least one of the plurality of engaging members is moved toward and away from the fixed engaging member by the engaging member moving device.
  • the movable engagement member can be used.
  • the pallet holding pin 660 of the pallet holding device 650 is provided on the movable engaging member, and the portion of the rack body 654 provided with the pallet holding surface 662 is provided on the fixed engaging member.
  • the holding pin moving devices 664 correspond to the engaging member moving devices, respectively.
  • the pallet gripping device 320 is an embodiment of a parallel movement preventing device in which all of the plurality of engaging members are movable engaging members.
  • a plurality of movable engagement members provided for each of the plurality of component container holding portions are combined with a drive member common to the plurality of movable engagement members and a drive source for driving the drive member.
  • the movable member is moved by the engaging member moving device, and the plurality of movable members are relatively movable with respect to a common driving member, and each movable member is movable between the movable engaging member and the common driving member.
  • An urging means for urging the member toward a common drive member in a direction approaching the component container can be provided.
  • the claw holders 32 6 and 36 0 and the pin driving member 668 each correspond to a common driving member, and the air cylinders 34 0, 36 6 and 67 0 correspond to a common driving source. .
  • the plurality of engagement member moving devices that move the plurality of movable engagement members, respectively, may be devices each including a dedicated driving member and a driving source.
  • the movable engagement members can be individually engaged and disengaged with respect to the plurality of component containers. For example, only the component container that is pulled out from the rack and supplies the electronic circuit components can be moved. The engagement of the engaging member is released and the movable member is disengaged, and the component container that does not supply the electronic circuit component can keep the engaging member engaged, and there is no danger of movement. Even when the plurality of movable engagement members share the same drive member and drive source, the engagement of the movable engagement member may be released only for the component container that supplies the electronic circuit components.
  • an engagement release device for releasing the engagement of the movable engagement member with the component container is provided at a portion corresponding to the component supply position of the rack. For example, if the pallet is held by the pallet holding device 650, the pallet holding pin 660 is retracted against the urging force of the spring 688, and the engaging portion 686 is engaged. If you leave from 70 2
  • a disengagement / engagement permitting device that allows the pallet holding pin 660 to engage with the pallet 640 by the bias of the spring 688 is provided.
  • the electronic circuit component supply device may be configured such that the holding tool that holds the held portion of the component container and moves at the same speed as the pair of endless transport members holds the held portion. It can be considered to include an urging means for keeping, and a holder releasing device for causing the holder to release the held portion against the urging force of the urging means.
  • the holder releasing device can be provided at least in a fixed position in the transport direction of the component container by the endless transport member.
  • the spring 4 72 of the holder 4 10 and the spring 8 3 0 of the holder 7 5 0 correspond to biasing means, and the chuck driving device 4 7 4 and the pin release device 8 4 0 hold respectively. It is equivalent to a tool release device.
  • the holder includes at least one movable holding member
  • the electronic circuit component supply device includes a holding member moving device that moves the at least one movable holding member.
  • the holding member moving device includes the urging means and the holder releasing device.
  • Each of the pair of chucks 458 and each of the pair of engagement pins 800, 804 correspond to a movable holding member, and a spring 472 and a chuck driving device 474 are used as a holding member moving device.
  • the engaging pin moving devices 806 and 808 each correspond to a holding member moving device.
  • the holding member moving device may be configured to move the at least one movable holding member in a direction intersecting with the direction of transport of the component container by the endless transport member.
  • the engaging pin moving devices 806 and 808 each correspond to the holding member moving device.
  • the holding member moving device is configured to move the at least one pair of the movable holding members in directions opposite to each other in a direction orthogonal to the direction of transport of the component container by the endless transport member. It can be moved.
  • the pair of engaging pins 800 and 804 correspond to a movable holding member
  • the engaging pin moving devices 806 and 808 correspond to holding member moving devices, respectively.
  • the holding member moving device may be provided on each of the pair of movable holding members, or at least a portion may be provided in common. For example, it can be a device that moves a pair of movable holding members by one driving source.
  • One of the held portion and the movable holding member has a concave portion, and the other has a protruding portion that can be fitted to the concave portion. Can be held.
  • the positioning recesses 4 6 6 and 4 6 8 of the gripping claws 4 6 0 and 4 6 2 correspond to recesses
  • the grips 2 6 8 of the handle 2 6 6 correspond to projections
  • the engaging grooves 8 3 2 correspond to the protrusions.
  • the engaging projections 8100 of the engaging pins 802, 804 correspond to the engaging projections.
  • the guide device for guiding the movement of the component container by the component container moving device includes a pair of guide members, for example, the pair of guide members are provided on both sides of the component container in the component storage plane. And a guide roller rotatably provided around an axis intersecting the component housing plane.
  • a plurality of guide rollers are provided on each side of the component container in the component receiving plane, for example, three or more guide rollers are provided on each side, and a plurality of guide rollers on each side are provided. It can be provided side by side along a straight line parallel to the moving direction of the component container.
  • at least a portion of the guide roller that contacts the component container is formed of rubber or the like.
  • the guide roller 790 of the guide device 752 corresponds to the guide roller.
  • the conveyor belt of the conveyor may be a timing belt having a large number of teeth on its inner peripheral surface, and its supporting portion may be supported by a guide rail, or may be supported by a plurality of guide pulleys.
  • first gripping member driving device and the second gripping member driving device may be provided exclusively for each of the plurality of first gripping members and the second gripping members.
  • the gripping of only the first and second gripping members for gripping the component container positioned at the component supply position is released to make the component container movable, and the component for supplying the circuit component is provided.
  • the component containers other than the container can be fixed to the rack.
  • the first and second gripping members and the first and second gripping member driving devices of the component container gripping device are arranged such that the first and second gripping members move from the direction intersecting the component storage plane to the component container. It may be engaged and gripped.
  • the tray may be made of a vibration absorbing material.
  • the mounting head is moved in XY by the mounting head moving device.
  • the so-called XY robot-type electronic component mounting machine that can be moved to any position in the coordinate plane, but also other types of electronic circuit component mounting machines, such as index table type (or rotary type) heads It can be a rotating electronic circuit component mounting machine.
  • An index table type electronic circuit component mounting machine includes a rotating body and a rotating body rotating device for rotating the rotating body, and a plurality of mounting heads held by the rotating body are respectively held by rotation of the rotating body.
  • At least one of the suction holders is sequentially moved to a plurality of stop positions, receives electronic circuit components from the component supply device at the component receiving position, and mounts the electronic circuit components on the circuit board at the component mounting position. is there.
  • the board holding device is moved by the board holding device moving device, and the component mounting position of the circuit board is positioned at a position corresponding to the component holder positioned at the component mounting position.
  • the rotating body and the rotating body rotating device constitute a head turning device, and together with the substrate holding device moving device, constitute a relative moving device for relatively moving the mounting head and the substrate holding device.
  • Head turning type electronic circuit component mounting machines also include a plurality of mounting heads, each of which is provided on a plurality of turning members that can turn independently of each other about a common turning axis. is there.
  • Each of the plurality of turning members makes a round around the above-mentioned turning axis, includes one or more stops during the round, and a turning motion having a certain time difference from each other by the turning motion applying device. Granted.
  • an electronic circuit mounting machine including a plurality of mounting units in series may be used.
  • Each of these mounting units has a component supply unit, a circuit board holding unit, and a component mounting unit, and mounts electronic circuit components supplied from the component supply unit on the circuit board held by the circuit board holding unit by the component mounting unit. Then, multiple mounting units work together to mount electronic circuit components on one circuit board.
  • a plurality of mounting units can be modularized, making it easy to change the configuration of the electronic circuit component mounting machine and replace mounting units.
  • Each of the plurality of mounting units can be considered as an electronic circuit component mounting machine.

Abstract

In an electronic circuit component supplying device for (1) storing electronic circuit components one in each of a plurality of component storage sections planarly disposed in component storage vessel and (2) supplying them, the supply accuracy is improved. There is installed a pallet gripping device (320) having first and second gripping pawls (322, 324) respectively corresponding to a plurality of pairs of rails (282) for racks (202). A pallet (200) is gripped and fixed on a rack main body (280). A rack (202) is lifted/lowered while suppressing the vibration of the pallet (200), and the pallet (200) is positioned at a component supply position. The conveyor belt of a transfer conveyor is provided with a holder. The pallet (200) positioned at the component supply position is held and transferred onto the conveyor belt, whereupon it is unitarily moved as it is held from opposite sides by fixed and movable rails. While movement of the pallet (200) is guided, its right and left movement is controlled. In this manner, the pallet (200) is transferred while its vibration is suppressed. Suppression of vibration of the pallet (200) suppresses positional deviation or the like of the electronic circuit components in the tray.

Description

電子回路部品供給装置および電子回路部品装着機 技術分野 Electronic circuit component supply device and electronic circuit component mounting machine
本発明は電子回路部品供給装置に関するものであり、 特に、 平面状に配置され た複数の部品収容部の各々に電子明回路部品を 1個ずつ取出し可能に収容した部品 収容器により電子回路部品を供給する装置の供給精度の向上に関するものであ る。 . ' 書  The present invention relates to an electronic circuit component supply apparatus, and in particular, to a component container in which a plurality of electronic bright circuit components are removably accommodated in each of a plurality of component accommodation units arranged in a plane so as to take out the electronic circuit components. This is related to improving the supply accuracy of the supply device. . ' book
背景技術 Background art
この種の電子回路部品供給装置には、 例えば、 特開平 9一 1 3 0 0 8 6号公報 に記载されているように、 電子回路部品が収容されたトレイをパレツトに支持さ せて電子回路部品を供給させる装置がある。 トレイには複数の部品収容凹部が一 平面状に設けられ、 それぞれ電子回路部品が収容されている。 特許文献 1に記载 の電子回路部品供給装置においては、 トレィを支持した複数のパレツトはそれぞ れ、 昇降部材に支持された複数のトレイセッタに载置され、 昇降部材に鉛直方向 に並んで保持されており、 昇降部材が昇降装置によつて昇降させられることによ り、 複数のパレッ トが順次、 予め設定された部品供給位置に位置決めされる。 部 品供給位置にはパレット移動装置が設けられており、 部品供給位置に位置決めさ れたパレツトを水平方向に移動させてトレイセッタから出し、 トレイに収容され た電子回路部品の取出しを許容する部品取出許容位置へ移動させる。 発明の開示  In this type of electronic circuit component supply device, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. Hei 9-130886, a tray containing electronic circuit components is supported by a pallet and electronically. There are devices that supply circuit components. The tray is provided with a plurality of component receiving recesses in one plane, each of which holds an electronic circuit component. In the electronic circuit component supply device described in Patent Document 1, a plurality of pallets supporting a tray are respectively set on a plurality of tray setters supported by an elevating member, and are held vertically by the elevating member. A plurality of pallets are sequentially positioned at a preset component supply position by raising and lowering the lifting member by the lifting device. A pallet moving device is provided at the component supply position. The pallet positioned at the component supply position is moved horizontally to take it out of the tray setter, and to take out electronic circuit components contained in the tray. Move to the allowed position. Disclosure of the invention
しかしながら、 特許文献 1に記載の電子回路部品供給装置においては、 トレイ セッタが昇降部材から引き出し可能に支持されるとともに、 パレットはトレイセ ッタに載置されているのみであり、 昇降部材が昇降させられるとき、 昇降開始, 停止時の加速, 減速によって昇降部材に加えられる衝撃により、 トレイセッタぉ よぴパレットがそれぞれ昇降部材ぉょぴトレイセッタに対して相対移動して振動 し、 トレイに収容されている電子回路部品がずれたり、 姿勢が変わったりするこ とがあり、 電子回路部品の供給が信頼性高くあるいは精度良く行われないことが ある。 However, in the electronic circuit component supply device described in Patent Document 1, the tray setter is supported so as to be able to be pulled out from the elevating member, and the pallet is merely placed on the tray setter. The pallet and the pallet move relative to the pallet and the pallet due to the impact applied to the pallet by the acceleration and deceleration at the start and stop of the lift. However, the electronic circuit components contained in the tray may shift or change posture, and the supply of the electronic circuit components may not be reliable or accurate.
また、 パレット移動装置によってパレットが移動させられるとき、 パレット は、 フレームに設けられた一対の支持部により下方から支持されるが、 左右方向 の移動は規制されないため、 移動開始, 停止時に加えられる衝撃や、 支持部との 間の摺動抵抗によってパレツトが振動し、 電子回路部品のずれ等が生ずることが ある。  When the pallet is moved by the pallet moving device, the pallet is supported from below by a pair of supports provided on the frame. However, since the movement in the left and right directions is not restricted, the impact applied when the movement starts and stops In addition, the pallet may vibrate due to sliding resistance between the support and the supporting portion, and the electronic circuit components may be displaced.
昇降部材の昇降速度ゃパレツト移動装置によるパレットの移動速度を小さくす れば、 振動の発生を抑制することができるが、 パレットの部品供給位置および部 品取出許容位置への位置決めに時間を要し、 供給能率が低下する。  If the pallet moving speed of the pallet moving device is reduced by lowering the pallet moving speed, vibration can be suppressed.However, it takes time to position the pallet to the parts supply position and the parts removal allowable position. However, supply efficiency is reduced.
本発明は、 以上の事情を背景とし、 部品収容器の平面状に設けられた複数の部 品収容部の各々に電子回路部品を収容して供給する電子回路部品供給装置におい て、 供給能率の低下を抑えつつ、 供給の信頼性ないし精度を向上させることを課 題としてなされたものであり、 本発明によって、 下記各態様の電子回路部品供給 装置および電子回路部品装着機が得られる。 各態様は請求項と同様に、 項に区分 し、 各項に番号を付し、 必要に応じて他の項の番号を引用する形式で記载する。 これは、 あくまでも本発明の理解を容易にするためであり、 本明細書に記載の技 術的特徴およびそれらの組合わせが以下の各項に記載のものに限定されると解釈 されるべきではない。 また、 一つの項に複数の事項が記載されている場合、 それ ら複数の事項を常に一緒に採用しなければならないわけではない。 一部の事項の みを選択して採用することも可能なのである。  SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION In view of the above circumstances, the present invention provides an electronic circuit component supply device that accommodates and supplies electronic circuit components to each of a plurality of component storage units provided in a planar shape of a component container. The object of the present invention is to improve the reliability or accuracy of the supply while suppressing the decrease. According to the present invention, the following electronic circuit component supply device and electronic circuit component mounting machine can be obtained. As in the case of the claims, each mode is divided into sections, each section is numbered, and if necessary, the form is cited in a form in which the numbers of other sections are cited. This is merely to facilitate understanding of the present invention, and it should not be construed that the technical features and combinations thereof described in this specification are limited to those described in the following sections. Absent. In addition, when two or more items are described in one section, it is not always necessary to adopt these items together. It is also possible to select and adopt only some of the matters.
( 1 ) 平面状に配置された複数の部品収容部をそれぞれ有し、 それら部品収容部 の各々に電子回路部品が 1個ずつ取出し可能に収容される複数の部品収容器と、 それら複数の部品収容器の少なくとも 1つを、 前記部品収容部が配置された部 品収容平面に平行な方向に移動可能にそれぞれ保持する複数の部品収容器保持部 を備えたラックと、  (1) A plurality of component housings each having a plurality of component housings arranged in a plane, and each of the component housings accommodating an electronic circuit component one by one, and a plurality of the components. A rack including a plurality of component container holding portions each of which holds at least one of the containers so as to be movable in a direction parallel to a component receiving plane in which the component receiving portion is arranged;
そのラックを前記部品収容平面と交差する方向に昇降させるラック昇降装置 と、 そのラック昇降装置の停止状態において部品収容器を前記部品収容平面に平行 な方向に移動させ、 前記ラックに収納された収納位置と、 ラックから引き出さ れ、 前記部品収容部に収容された電子回路部品の取出しを許容する部品取出許容 位置とに移動させる部品収容器移動装置と A rack elevating device that raises and lowers the rack in a direction intersecting with the component storage plane; When the rack elevating device is stopped, the component container is moved in a direction parallel to the component storage plane, and the storage position stored in the rack, and the electronic circuit component pulled out of the rack and stored in the component storage unit And a parts container moving device that moves the parts
を含む電子回路部品供給装置であって、 An electronic circuit component supply device including:
前記ラック昇降装置による前記ラックの昇降時と、 前記部品収容器移動装置に よる前記部品収容器の移動時との少なくとも一方において前記部品収容器の振動 を抑制する振動抑制装置を含む電子回路部品供給装置。  An electronic circuit component supply including a vibration suppressing device that suppresses vibration of the component container at least one of when the rack is moved up and down by the rack elevating device and when the component container is moved by the component container moving device. apparatus.
部品収容器は、 電子回路部品を直接収容するものでもよく、 トレイパレットの ように、 トレィを介して間接的に収容するものでもよい。 前者においては、 部品 収容部が部品収容器自体に設けられ、 後者においては、 部品収容部を備えたトレ ィが部品収容器に収容されることにより、 トレイの部品収容部が部品収容器の部 品収容部として機能することとなる。  The component container may directly accommodate electronic circuit components, or may indirectly accommodate electronic circuit components via a tray, such as a tray pallet. In the former, the component housing is provided in the component housing itself, and in the latter, the tray provided with the component housing is housed in the component housing, so that the component housing of the tray becomes the part of the component housing. It will function as a product storage unit.
部品収容部は、 例えば、 電子回路部品を位置決めしつつ収容する部品収容凹部 とされる。  The component accommodating portion is, for example, a component accommodating recess for accommodating and positioning the electronic circuit component.
部品収容平面は、 一平面に限らず、 多段の平面 (例えば、 部品収容部が部品収 容凹部の場合、 一つの部品収容器内で部品収容凹部の深さが異なる) でもよい。 ラックは、 複数の部品収容器保持部を備え、 各部品収容器保持部において少な くとも 1つの部品収容器を、 電子回路部品の供給時と同様の姿勢で保持し、 昇降 装置によって昇降させられるものであればよい。 実施形態の項において説明する ように、 部品収容器移動装置による移動方向の正逆両方向に開口する 2つの開口 のみを有し、 部品収容器をその開口方向においてのみ着脱可能であり、 複数の部 品収容器をそれら全部を覆う状態で収納するものでもよく、 多段に配設された複 数の板状部品収容器保持部材の各々に部品収容器保持部が設けられ、 部品収容器 を覆うことなく収納するものでもよい。  The component storage plane is not limited to one plane, and may be a multi-level plane (for example, when the component storage unit is a component storage recess, the depth of the component storage recess is different in one component container). The rack has a plurality of component container holders, and at least one component container is held in each of the component container holders in the same posture as when electronic circuit components are supplied, and is moved up and down by the elevating device. Anything should do. As described in the section of the embodiment, the component container has only two openings that open in both the forward and reverse directions of movement by the component container moving device, and the component container can be attached and detached only in the opening direction. The component container may be stored so as to cover all of them.A plurality of plate-like component container holding members arranged in multiple stages each have a component container holding portion provided to cover the component container. It may be stored without.
ラック昇降装置は、 ラックを昇降させることにより、 複数の部品収容器保持部 によりそれぞれ保持された部品収容器の各々を部品供給位置に順次位置決めする ものとされることが望ましく、 部品収容器移動装置は、 それら部品供給位置に位 置決めされた部品収容器をラックから引き出すものとされることが望ましい。 本項の電子回路部品供給装置においては、'ラックの昇降時における部品収容器 の振動と、 部品収容器移動装置による部品収容器の移動時における振動との少な くとも一方が抑制される。 ラックの昇降速度や部品収容器の移動速度を小さくし なくても振動を抑制することができるのであり、 供給能率の低下を抑えつつ、 供 ,袷精度を向上させることができる。 The rack elevating device preferably moves the rack up and down to sequentially position each of the component containers respectively held by the plurality of component container holding units at the component supply position. It is desirable that the component containers positioned at those component supply positions be pulled out of the rack. In the electronic circuit component supply device of this section, at least one of the vibration of the component container when the rack is moved up and down and the vibration when the component container is moved by the component container moving device are suppressed. Vibration can be suppressed without reducing the speed of moving the rack up and down or moving the parts container, so that the supply efficiency can be improved while suppressing the decrease in supply efficiency.
ラックの昇降時と部品収容器の移動時との両方において部品収容器の振動を抑 制すれば、 振動が最も良好に抑制されるが、 一方のみについて振動を抑制しても それに対応した効果が得られ、 供給能率の低下を小さく抑えつつ、 電子回路部品 のずれや姿勢変更による部品収容部からの取出しミスの発生、 あるいは部品保持 具による電子回路部品の保持位置誤差が減少させられる。  If the vibration of the component case is suppressed both when the rack is moved up and down and when the component case is moved, the vibration is best suppressed. As a result, it is possible to minimize the drop in the supply efficiency and to reduce the occurrence of an error in taking out the electronic circuit component from the component housing due to the shift or change in the posture of the electronic circuit component, or to reduce the error in the holding position of the electronic circuit component by the component holder.
( 2 ) 前記振動抑制装置が、 前記ラックと前記複数の部品収容器の各々との間の 相対移動を、 少なくとも前記ラックの昇降時に阻止する相対移動阻止装置を含む (2) The vibration suppressing device includes a relative movement preventing device that prevents relative movement between the rack and each of the plurality of component containers at least when the rack moves up and down.
(1)項に記載の電子回路部品供給装置。 The electronic circuit component supply device according to item (1).
部品収容器のラックに対する相対移動を阻止すれば、 ラックの昇降時等に部品 収容器に衝撃が加えられても、 部品収容器がラックに対して相対移動することが なく、 部品収容器がラックに対して相対移動可能である場合に比較して部品収容 器の振動が抑制される。  If the component container is prevented from moving relative to the rack, the component container does not move relative to the rack even if an impact is applied to the component container when the rack moves up and down, and the component container is moved to the rack. Vibration of the parts container is suppressed as compared with the case where the parts can be moved relative to.
相対移動阻止装置は、 例えば、 部品収容器を保持部材により保持してラックに 対する移動を阻止する部品収容器保持装置とすることができる。 部品収容器保持 装置は、 例えば、 (3)項に記載の電子回路部品供給装置におけるように、 部品収 容器を把持してラックに固定する部品収容器把持装置としてもよく、 あるいは、 負圧により部品収容器を吸着して保持する吸着部材を備えた部品収容器吸着装置 としてもよい。  The relative movement preventing device may be, for example, a component container holding device that holds the component container by a holding member and prevents movement of the component container with respect to the rack. The component container holding device may be, for example, a component container holding device that holds a component container and fixes it to a rack, as in the electronic circuit component supply device described in (3), or A component container suction device including a suction member that suctions and holds the component container may be used.
( 3 ) 前記相対移動阻止装置が、 前記ラックの前記複数の部品収容器保持部のそ れぞれに対応する部分に設けられ、 それら部品収容器保持部に保持された前記部 品収容器を把持することによりラックに固定する部品収容器把持装置を含む (2) 項に記載の電子回路部品供給装置。  (3) The relative movement preventing device is provided at a portion corresponding to each of the plurality of component container holding portions of the rack, and the component container held by the component container holding portions is provided. The electronic circuit component supply device according to (2), including a component container gripping device that is fixed to the rack by gripping.
部品収容器は部品収容器把持装置によってラックに固定されることにより、 ラ ックに対する移動が阻止され、 振動が抑制される。 ( 4 ) 前記部品収容器把持装置が、 前記ラックの、 前記部品収容器移動装置によ る前記部品収容器の移動方向に隔たった二箇所にそれぞれ一対ずつ設けられた第 一把持部材および第二把持部材と、 それら一対ずつの把持部材をそれぞれ、 互い に独立して駆動する一対ずつの第一把持部材駆動装置および第二把持部材駆動装 置とを含む (3)項に記載の電子回路部品供給装置。 The component container is fixed to the rack by the component container holding device, so that movement of the component container relative to the rack is prevented, and vibration is suppressed. (4) The component container holding device includes a first holding member and a second component provided at a pair of two positions of the rack separated from each other in a moving direction of the component container by the component container moving device. The electronic circuit component according to (3), including: a gripping member; and a pair of first gripping member driving devices and a second gripping member driving device that respectively drive the pair of gripping members independently of each other. Feeding device.
第一, 第二把持部材はそれぞれ、 第一, 第二把持部材駆動装置により駆動され て、 部品収容器を把持する把持位置と、 解放する解放位置とに移動させられる。 二つの第一把持部材は、 部品収容平面に平行な平面内において部品収容器移動方 向と交差する方向に隔たって設けられる。 二つの第二把持部材も同様である。 し たがって、 部品収容器は、 部品収容平面に平行な平面内において互いに隔たった 4箇所にそれぞれ第一, 第二把持部材が係合することにより、 部品収容平面に平 行な平面内において部品収容器移動方向と交差する方向に互いに隔たった 2部分 をそれぞれ第一把持部材と第二把持部材とにより把持されることとなり、 ラック に強固に固定され、 振動が良好に抑制される。  The first and second gripping members are driven by the first and second gripping member driving devices, respectively, and are moved to a gripping position for gripping the component container and a release position for releasing. The two first gripping members are provided in a plane parallel to the component housing plane and separated from each other in a direction intersecting with the component container moving direction. The same applies to the two second gripping members. Accordingly, the component container is configured such that the first and second gripping members engage with each other at four positions separated from each other in a plane parallel to the component storage plane, and thereby the components are stored in a plane parallel to the component storage plane. The two parts separated from each other in the direction intersecting the container movement direction are gripped by the first gripping member and the second gripping member, respectively, and are firmly fixed to the rack, and the vibration is favorably suppressed.
( 5 ) 前記一対ずつの第一把持部材駆動装置および第二把持部材駆動装置がそれ ぞれ、 複数の部品収容器保持部の各々について設けられた複数の第一把持部材ぉ ょぴ第二把持部材に共通に設けられた (4)項に記載の電子回路部品供給装置。 本項によれば、 部品収容器把持装置を簡易に構成することができる。  (5) Each of the pair of first gripping member driving devices and the second gripping member driving devices is provided with a plurality of first gripping members and a second gripping portion provided for each of the plurality of component container holders. The electronic circuit component supply device according to (4), which is provided commonly to the members. According to this aspect, the component container holding device can be easily configured.
( 6 ) 前記ラックの昇降方向が鉛直方向であり、 前記部品収容平面が水平面であ り、 前記第一把持部材および第二把持部材がそれぞれ、 前記ラックに鉛直軸線ま わりに回動可能に設けられた第一把持爪および第二把持爪を含み、 前記第一把持 部材駆動装置および第二把持部材駆動装置がそれぞれ第一把持爪回動装置および 第二把持爪回動装置を含む (4)項または (5)項に記載の電子回路部品供給装置。 第一, 第二把持爪は、 直線移動する爪としてもよいが、 回動爪とすれば、 例え ば、 把持爪が部品収容器を把持し、 解放するための運動に要するスペースが少な くて済み、 部品収容器把持装置をコンパクトに構成することができる。  (6) The vertical direction of the rack is the vertical direction, the component receiving plane is a horizontal plane, and the first gripping member and the second gripping member are provided on the rack so as to be rotatable around a vertical axis. (4) The first gripping member driving device and the second gripping member driving device include a first gripping claw rotation device and a second gripping claw rotation device, respectively. Or The electronic circuit component supply device according to the above (5). The first and second gripping claws may be linearly moving claws, but if they are rotating claws, for example, the gripping claws require less space for movement for gripping and releasing the component container. Thus, the component container holding device can be configured compactly.
( 7 ) 前記第一把持爪の前記部品収容器を把持する方向の回動限度を規定する回 動限度規定装置を含み、 前記第二把持爪駆動装置の駆動力が前記第一把持爪駆動 装置の駆動力より小さくされた (6)項に記載の電子回路部品供給装置。 第一把持爪の回動限度が規定されることにより、 ラックにおける部品収容器の 部品収容器移動方向における収納位置が決められ、 部品収容器は、 ラックに、 部 品収容器移動方向において、 ほぼ予め設定された位置に収納される。 (7) A rotation limit specifying device that defines a rotation limit of the first gripping claw in a direction of gripping the component container, wherein the driving force of the second gripping claw driving device is the first gripping claw driving device. The electronic circuit component supply device according to (6), wherein the driving force is smaller than the driving force of the electronic circuit component. By defining the rotation limit of the first gripping claw, the storage position of the component container in the rack in the component container moving direction is determined, and the component container is substantially mounted on the rack in the component container moving direction. It is stored in a preset position.
( 8 ) 前記第一把持爪が、 それの回動軸線に平行な中心線を有する部分円筒面状 の把持面を備えている (6)項または (7)項に記載の電子回路部品供給装置。 本項の電子回路部品供給装置によれば、 部品収容器把持装置を構成する一対の 第一把持爪にそれぞれ製造誤差や組付位置誤差等があっても、 部品収容器の把持 面に係合する部分の、 部品収容平面内において部品収容器移動方向に直角な方向 におけるずれが小さくて済む。  (8) The electronic circuit component supply device according to the above item (6) or (7), wherein the first gripping claw has a partially cylindrical gripping surface having a center line parallel to a rotation axis thereof. . According to the electronic circuit component supply device of this section, even if there is a manufacturing error, an assembling position error, or the like in each of the pair of first gripping claws constituting the component container gripping device, the engagement is performed with the gripping surface of the component container. The displacement of the portion to be moved in the direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the component container in the component receiving plane can be small.
( 9 ) 前記第二把持爪が、 前記部品収容器を把持する際にその部品収容器の被係 合部に係合する係合部と、 その係合部が前記被係合部に接触した後に弾性変形 し、 その弾性変形の復元力に基づいて前記係合部を前記被係合部に係合し続けさ せる弹性部変形部とを備えた (6)項ないし (8)項のいずれかに記載の電子回路部 品供給装置。  (9) The second gripping claw engages with the engaged portion of the component container when gripping the component container, and the engaging portion contacts the engaged portion. (6) any of (6) to (8), further including: a deformable portion that is elastically deformed later and keeps the engaging portion engaged with the engaged portion based on a restoring force of the elastic deformation. An electronic circuit component supply device according to (1).
例えば、 第二把持爪を板ばね材により構成することができる。 板ばね材の被係 合部に係合する部分が係合部として機能し、 その係合部と基端部との間の部分が 弾性変形部として機能するようにするのである。 また、 第二把持爪を、 互いに相 対移動 (相対回動でも相対平行移動でもよい) 可能に連結された固定部材および 可動部材と、 それら両部材の間に配設された弹性部材とを備えたものとすること も可能である。 可動部材が被係合部に係合する係合部として機能するようにする のである。  For example, the second gripping claw can be made of a leaf spring material. The portion of the leaf spring material that engages with the engaged portion functions as an engaging portion, and the portion between the engaging portion and the base end portion functions as an elastic deformation portion. Also, a fixed member and a movable member are connected to each other so that the second gripping claws can move relative to each other (either relative rotation or relative parallel movement), and an elastic member disposed between the two members. It is also possible to use The movable member functions as an engaging portion that engages with the engaged portion.
第二把持爪は、 係合部が被係合部に係合し、 第一, 第二把持爪が共に部品収容 器に係合する状態となつてから更に、 弾性変形部を弾性変形させつつ回動させる ことができ、 係合部を被係合部に係合し続けさせ、 第一, 第二把持つめんが部品 収容器を確実に把持することができる。 また、 部品収容器や第一, 第二把持爪等 に製造誤差等があっても、 弾性変形部の弾性変形により吸収され、 部品収容器等 の損傷を生じることなく、 部品収容器把持装置に部品収容器を確実に把持させる ことができる。 さらに、 第二把持爪が部品収容器に弾性的に係合し、 第一, 第二 把持爪が部品収容器を確実に把持するため、 第一, 第二把持爪と部品収容器との 間の摩擦力により、 部品収容器は、 部品収容平面に交差する方向および部品収容 平面内において部品収容器移動方向と交差する方向におけるラックとの間の相対 移動が規制され、 振動が抑制される。 The second gripping claw is configured such that, after the engaging portion is engaged with the engaged portion and the first and second gripping claws are both engaged with the component container, the elastically deforming portion is further elastically deformed. The first and second gripping pawls can reliably grip the component container. Also, even if there is a manufacturing error or the like in the component container or the first and second gripping claws, it is absorbed by the elastic deformation of the elastically deforming portion, and the component container is not damaged. The component container can be securely held. Further, the second gripping claw elastically engages with the component container, and the first and second gripping claws securely grip the component container. Due to the frictional force between the components, the relative movement between the component container and the rack in the direction intersecting with the component receiving plane and in the direction intersecting with the component container moving direction in the component receiving plane is regulated, and vibration is suppressed. .
( 1 0 ) 前記部品収容器保持部が、 前記部品収容器移動装置による部品収容器の 移動方向に平行に延びる状態で設けられた一対のレールを含み、 前記部品収容器 がそれら一対のレールに支持される一対の被支持部を含む (1)項ないし (9)項の いずれかに記載の電子回路部品供給装置。  (10) The component container holding portion includes a pair of rails provided so as to extend in parallel with a moving direction of the component container by the component container moving device, and the component container is provided on the pair of rails. The electronic circuit component supply device according to any one of (1) to (9), including a pair of supported portions to be supported.
( 1 1 ) 前記部品収容器移動装置が搬送コンペャを含む (1)項ないし(10)項のい ずれかに記載の電子回路部品供給装置。  (11) The electronic circuit component supply device according to any one of (1) to (10), wherein the component container moving device includes a transfer conveyor.
( 1 2 ) 前記搬送コンペャが、 一対の無端搬送部材と、 それら無端搬送部材を予 め定められた経路に沿って周回させる周回駆動装置と、 前記部品収容器の被保持 部を保持して前記一対の無端搬送部材と同じ速度で移動する保持具とを含み、 そ の保持具が前記部品収容器の被保持部を保持した状態において、 前記一対の無端 搬送部材が周回駆動装置によって周回させられるとき、 その保持具がそれら無端 搬送部材と同じ速度で移動することにより、 前記部品収容器が前記ラックの部品 収容器保持部から前記一対の無端搬送部材上に移載され、 それら無端搬送部材に より搬送されるようにされた構成が前記振動抑制装置を構成する(11)項に記载の 電子回路部品供給装置。  (12) The transport conveyor holds a pair of endless transport members, a circulating drive for rotating the endless transport members along a predetermined path, and a held portion of the component container. A holder that moves at the same speed as the pair of endless transport members, and the pair of endless transport members are rotated by the orbital driving device in a state where the holders hold the held portions of the component container. When the holder moves at the same speed as the endless transport members, the component container is transferred from the component container holder of the rack onto the pair of endless transport members, and The electronic circuit component supply device according to the above mode (11), wherein the configuration adapted to be further conveyed constitutes the vibration suppressing device.
保持具を専用の保持具移動装置により無端搬送部材と同じ速度で移動させるこ とも可能である。 しかし、 保持具を一対の無端搬送部材に取り付ければ、 専用の 保持具移動装置を省略することができる。 保持具は、 搬送コンペャに設けられた 保持具駆動装置により駆動されて被保持部を保持, 解放することが望ましい。 無端搬送部材には、 例えば、 ベルト, チェーン等がある。  It is also possible to move the holder at the same speed as the endless transport member by a dedicated holder moving device. However, if the holder is attached to the pair of endless transport members, a dedicated holder moving device can be omitted. It is desirable that the holder is driven by a holder driving device provided on the conveyor to hold and release the held portion. Examples of the endless transport member include a belt and a chain.
保持具が無端搬送部材と同じ速度で移動させられることにより、 部品収容器は 無端搬送部材と同じ速度で移動させられる。 したがって、 無端搬送部材と部品収 容器とがー体的に移動し、 それらの間にすべりがなく、 部品収容器が保持具に保 持されることなく、 無端搬送部材上に載せられて搬送される場合のように、 部品 収容器と無端搬送部材とが相対移動と一体的な移動とを繰り返して部品収容器が 振動することが回避される。 また、 部品収容器がそれを支持する面に対して摺動 する場合に比較して部品収容器の振動が小さくて済み、 かつ、 部品収容器とそれ を支持する面とが摩耗することがなく、 寿命が向上する。 By moving the holder at the same speed as the endless transport member, the component container is moved at the same speed as the endless transport member. Therefore, the endless transport member and the component container move physically, there is no slippage between them, and the component container is carried on the endless transport member without being held by the holder. In such a case, the component container and the endless transport member are prevented from vibrating due to repeated relative movement and integral movement. Also, the parts container slides against the surface that supports it. In this case, the vibration of the component container can be reduced as compared with the case where the component container is mounted, and the component container and the surface supporting the component container are not worn, so that the life is improved.
搬送コンべャは、 一対の無端搬送部材によつて部品収容器を搬送するものとす れば、 無端搬送部材による部品収容器の支持面積を小さくしつつ、 安定して支持 し、 搬送することができるが、 搬送コンペャを無端搬送部材を一対有するものと することは不可欠ではなく、 無端搬送部材を 1つ有するものとしてもよく、 例え ば、 幅の広い 1本のベルトによって部品収容器を支持させて搬送させてもよい。 If the transport conveyor transports the component container by a pair of endless transport members, it should be stably supported and transported while reducing the supporting area of the component container by the endless transport member. However, it is not indispensable that the conveyor has a pair of endless conveying members, and the conveyor may have one endless conveying member.For example, the component container is supported by one wide belt. And may be transported.
( 1 3 ) 前記一対の無端搬送部材がゴムまたはその類似物から成るコンペャベル トであり、 そのコンペャベルトが前記振動抑制装置を構成する(12)項に記載の電 子回路部品供給装置。 (13) The electronic circuit component supply device according to the mode (12), wherein the pair of endless transport members is a conveyor made of rubber or the like, and the conveyor belt constitutes the vibration suppressing device.
本項の電子回路部品供給装置においては、 無端搬送部材の弾性変形と、 内部摩 擦による振動減衰とによって、 部品収容器の振動が抑制される。  In the electronic circuit component supply device of this section, the vibration of the component container is suppressed by the elastic deformation of the endless transport member and the vibration damping due to internal friction.
( 1 4 ) 前記コンペャベルトが外周面に多数の歯を備えたタイミングベルトであ り、 前記周回駆動装置が、  (14) The conveyor belt is a timing belt provided with a large number of teeth on an outer peripheral surface, and the circling drive device includes:
そのタイミングベルトが巻き掛けられる 2個以上のガイドプーリと、 前記外周面の歯と嚙み合うタイミングプーリと、  Two or more guide pulleys around which the timing belt is wound, a timing pulley engaging with the teeth on the outer peripheral surface,
そのタイミングプーリを回転駆動する回転駆動装置と、  A rotation drive device for rotating the timing pulley,
前記タイミングベルトの前記部品収容器を支持する部分の内周面を支持するべ ルト支持部材と  A belt support member for supporting an inner peripheral surface of a portion of the timing belt supporting the component container;
を備えた(13)項に記載の電子回路部品供給装置。 The electronic circuit component supply device according to the above mode (13), comprising:
ベルト支持部材は、 例えば、 ガイドプーリとされ、 あるいはガイドレールとさ れる。 無端搬送部材としてタイミングベルトを用いれば、 無端搬送部材と周回駆 動装置との間にすべりがなく、 無端搬送部材を正確に周回させ、 部品収容器を精 度良く位置決めすることができる。  The belt support member is, for example, a guide pulley or a guide rail. If a timing belt is used as the endless transport member, there is no slippage between the endless transport member and the orbiting driving device, and the endless transport member can be accurately rotated to position the component container accurately.
タイミングベルトは外周面に多数の歯を備えたものとし、 ベルト支持部材には タイミングベルトの平坦な内周面を支持させれば、 タイミングベルトが周回させ られるときの振動を抑制することができる。 コンべャベルトが内周面に歯を備え たタイミングベルトであれば、 タイミングベルトの多数の歯とベルト支持部材と が衝突を繰り返して振動を引き起こし易いのであるが、 外周面に歯を備えたタイ ミングベルトであれば、 支持部材がガイドレールであってもガイドプーリであつ ても歯との衝突の繰返しによる振動の発生を回避することができる。 特に支持部 材がガイドプーリであれば、 タイミングベルトとの間にすベりがなく、 振動の発 生を一層良好に回避し得る。 The timing belt is provided with a large number of teeth on the outer peripheral surface, and the belt supporting member supports the flat inner peripheral surface of the timing belt, so that the vibration when the timing belt rotates can be suppressed. If the conveyor belt is a timing belt that has teeth on the inner peripheral surface, many teeth of the timing belt and the belt support member repeatedly collide with each other and can easily cause vibration. If the support belt is a guide belt or a guide pulley, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of vibration due to repeated collision with the teeth. In particular, if the supporting member is a guide pulley, there is no slip with the timing belt, and the generation of vibrations can be more favorably avoided.
ベルト支持部材がガイドレールとされる場合は、 そのガイドレールとタイミン グベルトとの両接触面の少なくとも一方が、 低摩擦材によって形成されることが 望ましい。 低摩擦材は、 例えば、 ポリテトラフルォロエチレン製とすることがで きる。 タイミングベルトとガイドレールとの少なくとも一方が、 本体部とその本 体部の表面に形成された減摩材層とを備えたものとされる場合には、 減摩材層を 本体部を形成する材料より摩擦係数の低い材料で形成すれば減摩効果が得られ る。  When the belt support member is a guide rail, it is desirable that at least one of the contact surfaces between the guide rail and the timing belt be formed of a low friction material. The low friction material can be made of, for example, polytetrafluoroethylene. When at least one of the timing belt and the guide rail is provided with the main body and the antifriction material layer formed on the surface of the main body, the antifriction material layer forms the main body. If it is formed of a material having a lower friction coefficient than the material, an antifriction effect can be obtained.
( 1 5 ) 前記部品収容器移動装置による前記部品収容器の移動を案内する案内装 置を含む(11)項ないし(14)項のいずれかに記載の電子回路部品供給装置。  (15) The electronic circuit component supply device according to any one of (11) to (14), including a guide device for guiding movement of the component container by the component container moving device.
( 1 6 ) 前記案内装置が一対の案内部材を含み、 前記部品収容器の移動を、 前記 部品収容平面に直角な側面において案内する(15)項に記載の電子回路部品供給装 置。  (16) The electronic circuit component supply device according to (15), wherein the guide device includes a pair of guide members, and guides movement of the component container on a side surface perpendicular to the component storage plane.
案内部材は、 例えば、 レールとされ、 あるいはローラとされる。  The guide member is, for example, a rail or a roller.
( 1 7 ) 前記一対の案内部材がそれぞれレール状をなし、 一方が固定レール、 他 方が固定レールに接近, 離間可能に設けられた可動レールとされるとともに、 可 動レールを固定レールに接近する方向に付勢する付勢装置を含み、 当該案内装置 が前記振動抑制装置を構成する(16)項に記載の電子回路部品供給装置。  (17) Each of the pair of guide members has a rail shape, one is a fixed rail, and the other is a movable rail provided so as to be able to approach and separate from the fixed rail, and the movable rail is approaching the fixed rail. The electronic circuit component supply device according to the above mode, further comprising an urging device that urges the vibration device in a direction in which the vibration suppressing device is configured.
可動レールは、 固定レールとの間 部品収容器を弾性的に挟み、 部品収容器の 部品収容平面内において部品収容器の移動方向と交差する方向における振れを防 止し、 部品収容器の振動が抑制される。  The movable rail elastically sandwiches the component container between the fixed rail and the movable rail, prevents vibration in a direction intersecting the moving direction of the component container in the component receiving plane of the component container, and reduces vibration of the component container. Is suppressed.
( 1 8 ) 少なくとも前記周回駆動装置を制御する制御装置を含み、 その制御装置 が前記無端搬送部材による前記部品収容器の搬送開始時に搬送速度を滑らかに増 大させ、 搬送終了時に滑らかに減速させる加減速度制御部を含み、 その加減速度 制御部が前記振動抑制装置を構成する(12)項ないし(17)項のいずれかに記載の電 子回路部品供給装置。 本項の電子回路部品供給装置によれば、 部品収容器の搬送開始時および搬送終 了時においてそれぞれ、 加速度および減速度が滑らかに増大, 減少させられ、 部 品収容器が衝撃少なく移動を開始, 停止させられ、 移動開始時および停止時にお ける部品収容器の振動が抑制される。 (18) At least a control device for controlling the orbiting driving device, the control device smoothly increasing the transport speed when the endless transport member starts transporting the component container and smoothly reducing the transport speed when the transport is completed. The electronic circuit component supply device according to any one of (12) to (17), including an acceleration / deceleration control unit, wherein the acceleration / deceleration control unit constitutes the vibration suppression device. According to the electronic circuit component supply device in this section, the acceleration and deceleration are smoothly increased and decreased at the start and end of the transport of the component container, respectively, and the component container starts moving with little impact. , Stopped, and vibration of the parts container at the start and stop of movement is suppressed.
ラック昇降装置によるラックの昇降についても、 加減速度制御部を設け、 ラッ クの昇降開始時および昇降終了時にそれぞれ、 昇降速度が滑らかに増大、 減少さ せられるようにすることが望ましい。  It is also desirable to provide an acceleration / deceleration control unit for raising and lowering the rack by the rack lifting device so that the lifting speed can be smoothly increased and decreased at the start and end of lifting and lowering of the rack, respectively.
( 1 9 ) 前記部品収容器がトレィを介して前記電子回路部品を収容するものであ る (1)項ないし(18)項のいずれかに記載の電子回路部品供給装置。  (19) The electronic circuit component supply device according to any one of (1) to (18), wherein the component container accommodates the electronic circuit component via a tray.
( 2 0 ) 前記トレィが振動吸収材科製である(19)項に記載の電子回路部品供給装 置。  (20) The electronic circuit component supply device according to the mode (19), wherein the tray is made of a vibration absorbing material.
振動吸収材料には、 例えば、 発泡樹脂等の多孔質樹脂、 例えば、 発泡性のポリ エチレンがある。  Examples of the vibration absorbing material include a porous resin such as a foamed resin, for example, foamable polyethylene.
本項の電子回路部品供給装置によれば、 トレイに衝撃が加えられても振動し難 く、 電子回路部品のずれ等が少なくて済む。  According to the electronic circuit component supply device of this section, even if an impact is applied to the tray, the tray does not easily vibrate, and the displacement of the electronic circuit component can be reduced.
( 2 1 ) 前記部品収容器が前記トレィを支持するパレツトを含む(19)項または(2 0)項に記載の電子回路部品供給装置。  (21) The electronic circuit component supply device according to the mode (19) or (20), wherein the component container includes a pallet for supporting the tray.
電子回路部品の種類や供給数等に応じて形状, 寸法の異なる複数種類のトレイ をパレツトを介して共通のラックに収納させることができ、 ラックをトレイの種 類に応じて複数種類設けなくてもよく、 電子回路部品の供給を安価に行うことが できる。  Multiple types of trays with different shapes and dimensions according to the type and supply number of electronic circuit components can be stored in a common rack via a pallet, eliminating the need to provide multiple types of racks according to the type of tray. It is possible to supply electronic circuit components at low cost.
( 2 2 ) 前記振動抑制装置が、 前記パレッ トに支持された前記トレィを、 パレツ トに対して前記部品収容平面に平行な方向に移動不能に拘束する拘束装置を含む (21)項に記載の電子回路部品供給装置。  (22) The vibration suppressing device includes a restraining device for restraining the tray supported by the pallet immovably with respect to the pallet in a direction parallel to the component receiving plane. Electronic circuit parts supply equipment.
本項の電子回路部品供給装置によれば、 パレッ トの昇降および移動により、 パ レツトと共にトレイが移動させられるとき、 トレイがパレツトに対して移動する ことがなく、 パレツト内の予め定められた位置において電子回路部品を供給する ことができるとともに、 振動が抑制される。  According to the electronic circuit component supply device of this section, when the tray is moved together with the pallet by raising and lowering and moving the pallet, the tray does not move with respect to the pallet, and the predetermined position in the pallet is maintained. In this way, electronic circuit components can be supplied, and vibration is suppressed.
( 2 3 ) 前記パレットが振動吸収材料製である(21)項または(22)項に記載の電子 回路部品供給装置。 (23) The electronic device according to the mode (21) or (22), wherein the pallet is made of a vibration absorbing material. Circuit component supply device.
パレツトに振動が伝達されることがあっても、 その振動はパレツト自体により 吸収され、 トレイへの伝達が少なくて済み、 電子回路部品のずれ等が良好に抑制 される。  Even if vibration is transmitted to the pallet, the vibration is absorbed by the pallet itself, so that the transmission to the tray is small, and the displacement of the electronic circuit components is well suppressed.
( 2 4 ) 前記パレットが、 前記振動吸収材料製の振動吸収層と、 その振動吸収層 を表裏両面側から挟む金属材料層とを含む(23)項に記載の電子回路部品供給装 置。  (24) The electronic circuit component supply device according to (23), wherein the pallet includes a vibration absorbing layer made of the vibration absorbing material, and a metal material layer sandwiching the vibration absorbing layer from both front and back surfaces.
このようにすれば、 軽量で強度が大きいパレットが得られる。 そのため、 作業 者がパレットを扱い易く、 また、 ラック昇降装置の駆動源を容量の小さいものと することができ、 さらに、 トレイが重くても橈み難く、 良好に支持することがで きる。 また、 強度を得るために全部を金属材料製とする場合に比較して厚さを薄 くすることができ、 例えば、 ラックに収納された状態において占めるスペースが 少なくて済み、 例えば、 より多くのトレィを支持することができ、 あるいは余裕 を持ってラックに収納することができる。 また、 金属材料層を導電性を有する金 属製とすれば、 パレット, トレイ等の帯電を防止し、 静電気の発生を防止するこ とができる。  In this way, a light-weight, high-strength pallet can be obtained. Therefore, the pallet can be easily handled by the operator, the drive source of the rack elevating device can be made small, and even if the tray is heavy, it is hard to bend and can be favorably supported. Also, in order to obtain strength, the thickness can be reduced as compared with the case where the whole is made of a metal material. For example, the space occupied in a rack is small, and for example, more space is required. The tray can be supported, or it can be stored in a rack with a margin. In addition, if the metal material layer is made of a conductive metal, it is possible to prevent pallets and trays from being charged, thereby preventing static electricity from being generated.
( 2 5 ) 前記振動抑制装置が、 前記パレッ トに支持された前記トレィを、 前記部 品収容平面に平行な方向において移動不能に拘束する拘束装置を含み、 前記金属 材料層が磁性材料層であり、 前記拘束装置が少なくとも永久磁石部を有する拘束 部材を含む(24)項に記載の電子回路部品供給装置。  (25) The vibration suppressing device includes a restraint device for restraining the tray supported by the pallet immovably in a direction parallel to the component housing plane, wherein the metal material layer is a magnetic material layer. The electronic circuit component supply device according to (24), wherein the restraining device includes a restraining member having at least a permanent magnet portion.
拘束部材は磁力によってパレツトに着脱可能に固定され、 トレィを移動不能に 拘束する。 拘束部材はパレツトのいずれの位置にも固定することができ、 形状, 寸法等の異なる複数種類のトレイの拘束に使用することができる。  The restraining member is detachably fixed to the pallet by magnetic force, and restrains the tray immovably. The restraining member can be fixed at any position on the pallet, and can be used to restrain a plurality of types of trays having different shapes, dimensions, and the like.
( 2 6 ) 前記振動抑制装置が、 前記ラック昇降装置と前記部品収容器移動装置と の間の相対高さ誤差と、 前記複数の部品収容器保持部間の相対高さ誤差との少な くとも一方の存在にかかわらず、 前記複数の部品収容器保持部の前記部品収容器 を保持する保持面と、 前記部品収容器移動装置の部品収容器を支持する支持面と の高さを合わせる高さ合わせ装置を含む (1)項ないし(25)項のいずれかに記載の 電子回路部品供給装置。 本項の発明によれば、 ラック昇降装置と部品収容器移動装置との間の相対高さ 誤差と、 複数の部品収容器保持部の相対高さ誤差、 例えば、 複数の部品収容器保 持部が等ピッチで配設される場合におけるピッチ誤差との少なくとも一方の存在 にもかかわらず、 複数の部品収容器保持部の各々の部品収容器を保持する保持面 を、 部品収容器移動装置の部品収容器を支持する支持面と正確に同一面内に位置 させることができる。 そのため、 ラックと部品収容器移動装置との間における部 品収容器の移載をスムーズに行うことができ、 部品収容器の振動を抑制すること ができる。 (26) The vibration suppression device is configured to have at least a relative height error between the rack elevating device and the component container moving device and a relative height error between the plurality of component container holding units. Irrespective of the presence of one, the height of the height of the height of the holding surface of the plurality of component container holders that holds the component container and the height of the support surface of the component container moving device that supports the component container. The electronic circuit component supply device according to any one of (1) to (25), including a matching device. According to the invention of this aspect, the relative height error between the rack elevating device and the component container moving device and the relative height error of the plurality of component container holding units, for example, the plurality of component container holding units Despite the presence of at least one of the pitch errors when the components are arranged at the same pitch, the holding surfaces for holding the respective component containers of the plurality of component container holders are replaced by the components of the component container moving device. It can be located exactly in the same plane as the support surface supporting the container. Therefore, the component container can be smoothly transferred between the rack and the component container moving device, and the vibration of the component container can be suppressed.
( 2 7 ) 前記ラックの昇降方向の一位置に設けられ、 前記複数の部品収容器保持 部の少なくとも 1つが設定高さに到達したことを検出し、 検出信号を発する部品 収容器保持部検出装置と、  (27) A component container holder detecting device that is provided at one position in the vertical direction of the rack, detects that at least one of the plurality of component container holders has reached a set height, and issues a detection signal. When,
その部品収容器保持部検出装置が検出信号を発したときの前記ラック昇降装置 の作動位置と、 前記部品収容器移動装置の部品収容器を支持する支持面の高さと 前記設定高さとの差とに基づいて決まる複数の作動位置において前記ラック昇降 装置を停止させることによって、 前記複数の部品収容器保持部の各々の前記部品 収容器を保持する保持面を、 前記支持面と同一面内に位置させる昇降制御部と を含み、 それら部品収容器保持部検出装置および昇降制御部が、 前記部品収容器 移動装置による前記部品収容器の移動時に前記部品収容器の振動を抑制する振動 抑制装置を構成している (1)項ないし(25)項のいずれかに記載の電子回路部品供 給装置。  The operation position of the rack elevating device when the component container holding unit detection device outputs a detection signal, and the difference between the height of the support surface supporting the component container of the component container moving device and the set height. By stopping the rack elevating and lowering device at a plurality of operating positions determined on the basis of the above, the holding surface for holding the component container of each of the plurality of component container holding portions is located in the same plane as the support surface. A lifting / lowering control unit for causing the component container holding unit detection device and the lifting / lowering control unit to constitute a vibration suppressing device that suppresses vibration of the component container when the component container is moved by the component container moving device. The electronic circuit component supply device according to any one of (1) to (25).
本項の発明によれば、 複数の部品収容器保持部の各々の部品収容器を保持する 保持面を、 部品収容器移動装置の部品収容器を支持する支持面と正確に同一面内 に位置させることができる。 そのため、 ラヅクと部品収容器移動装置との間にお ける部品収容器の移載をスムーズに行うことができ、 部品収容器の振動を抑制す ることができる。 部品収容器保持部検出装置自体が前記設定高さに設けられ、 複 数の部品収容器保持部の少なくとも 1つがその設定高さに到達したことを検出す るようにされることが望ましいが、 不可欠ではない。 部品収容器保持部検出装置 の配設高さと、 設定高さとの間に既知の関係があればよいのである。  According to the invention of this aspect, the holding surface for holding each of the component containers of the plurality of component container holding portions is positioned exactly in the same plane as the support surface for supporting the component container of the component container moving device. Can be done. Therefore, the transfer of the component container between the rack and the component container moving device can be performed smoothly, and the vibration of the component container can be suppressed. It is desirable that the component container holder detecting device itself is provided at the set height, and that at least one of the plurality of component container holders detects that the set height has been reached, Not essential. What is necessary is that there is a known relationship between the arrangement height of the component container holder detection device and the set height.
部品収容器保持部検出装置による部品収容器保持部の検出に基づいて、 ラック 昇降装置の停止位置を決定してもよく、 あるいはラック昇降装置を停止させても よい。 また、 上記 「設定高さと支持面の高さとの差」 は 0を含む。 すなわち、 部 品収容器保持部検出装置が部品収容器保持部を検出する位置と、 ラック昇降装置 が停止させられる位置とが同じであってもよいのである。 ただし、 部品収容器保 持部の検出に基づいてラック昇降装置を、 保持面を支持面と同一平面内に位置さ せるための位置に停止させる場合、 例えば、 支持面の高さを設定高さより設定距 離上にし (あるいは下にし) 、 部品収容器保持部検出装置の検出信号に基づいてBased on the detection of the component container holder by the component container holder detector, the rack The stop position of the lifting device may be determined, or the rack lifting device may be stopped. The “difference between the set height and the height of the support surface” includes 0. That is, the position at which the component container holding unit detecting device detects the component container holding unit may be the same as the position at which the rack elevating device is stopped. However, when the rack elevating device is stopped at the position for positioning the holding surface in the same plane as the supporting surface based on the detection of the component container holding part, for example, the height of the supporting surface is set higher than the set height. Set the distance above (or below) the distance and set it based on the detection signal of the component container holder detection device.
(望ましくは検出信号が発せられるやいなや) ラック昇降装置の減速を開始し、 減速開始後、 上記設定距離上昇 (あるいは下降) した場合にラック昇降装置が停 止さられるようにすることが望ましい。 設定高さと支持面の高さとの差が 0の場 合であっても、 部品収容器保持部検出装置が検出信号を発する位置はおよそ判つ ているため、 事前に減速しておくことも可能であるが、 その場合には、 減速後の 微速でラック昇降装置が作動させられる時間が長くなり、 部品供給作業の能率が 低下することを避け得ない。 それに対し、 部品収容器保持部検出装置の検出信号 に基づいてラック昇降装置の減速が開始されるようにすれば、 その不都合を回避 できるのである。 (Preferably, as soon as a detection signal is issued.) It is desirable to start deceleration of the rack elevating device, and to stop the rack elevating device when the set distance is increased (or lowered) after the deceleration is started. Even if the difference between the set height and the height of the support surface is 0, the position at which the component container holder detection device emits a detection signal is known, so it is possible to decelerate in advance. However, in this case, the time during which the rack elevating device is operated at a very low speed after the deceleration becomes longer, and it is inevitable that the efficiency of the parts supply work is reduced. On the other hand, if the deceleration of the rack elevating device is started based on the detection signal of the component container holding unit detecting device, the inconvenience can be avoided.
なお、 複数の部品収容器保持部の少なくとも 1つが設定高さに到達したことを 部品収容器保持部検出装置によって自動で検出することは不可欠ではなく、 治具 や検出装置を用いて人が検出するようにしてもよい。 例えば、 設定高さと支持面 の高さとの差を 0とし、 隙間ゲージを用いて、 部品収容器保持部の保持面を、 支 持面と実質的に同一面内に位置するとすることができる位置に位置させ、 その際 のラック昇降装置の作動位置を取得する。 取得した作動位置は、 例えば、 入力装 置を用いて、 ラック昇降装置の昇降を制御する制御部の記憶部に、 部品収容器保 持部を、 それが設けられたラックにおいて特定し得る情報と対応付けて記憶させ る。 電子回路部品の供給時には、 この記憶された作動位置を用いてラック昇降装 置が制御され、 部品収容器保持部の保持面が自動的に支持面と同一面内に位置さ せられる。  It is not essential that the component container holder detection device automatically detect that at least one of the plurality of component container holders has reached the set height. You may make it. For example, the difference between the set height and the height of the support surface is set to 0, and the position where the holding surface of the component container holding portion can be positioned substantially in the same plane as the support surface using a clearance gauge is used. And obtain the operating position of the rack elevating device at that time. The acquired operation position is, for example, using an input device, a storage unit of a control unit that controls the elevation of the rack elevating device, information that can specify the component container holding unit, and information that can be specified in the rack provided with the component storage unit. Store them in association with each other. When supplying the electronic circuit components, the rack elevating device is controlled using the stored operating position, and the holding surface of the component container holding portion is automatically positioned in the same plane as the support surface.
. ( 2 8 ) 前記部品収容器保持部検出装置が、 前記複数の部品収容器保持部のうち の 2つ以上のものがそれぞれ前記設定高さに到達したことを検出するものであ り、 前記昇降制御部が、 それら 2つ以上の部品収容器保持部に対する検出信号が 発せられたときの前記ラック昇降装置の 2つ以上の作動位置に基づいて、 前記ラ ック昇降装置を制御する(27)項に記載の電子回路部品供給装置。 (28) The component container holder detecting device detects that two or more of the plurality of component container holders have reached the set height, respectively. The lifting control unit controls the rack lifting device based on two or more operating positions of the rack lifting device when the detection signals for the two or more component container holding units are issued. The electronic circuit component supply device according to the above mode (27).
本項に係る電子回路部品供給装置においては、 部品収容器保持部検出装置は、 複数の部品収容器保持部の 2つ以上のものがそれぞれ設定高さに到達したことを 検出し、 検出信号を発する。 部品収容器保持部検出装置が複数の部品収容器保持 部のすべてについて設定高さへの到達を検出するようにすることが望ましいが、 不可欠ではなく、 複数の部品収容器保持部のうちの 2つ以上のものについて、 設 定高さへの到達を検出するようにすれば、 本項に係る発明の効果が得られる。 例 えば、 複数の部品収容器保持部のうちの最も上のものと最も下のものとについて 設定高さへの到達を検出するようにし、 その検出信号が発せられた 2つのラック 昇降装置作動位置を取得し、 その 2つの作動位置に基づく内揷補間演算によって 決まる複数の位置にラック昇降装置を停止させれば、 ラック昇降装置による複数 の部品収容器保持部の位置決め誤差の累積を排除して、 各部品収容器保持部を部 品収容器移動装置に対して正確に適切な相対位置 (相対高さ) に位置決めするこ とができるのである。 最も上からやや下がった高さのものと、 最も下からやや上 がった高さのものとの 2つの部品収容器保持部について部品収容器保持部検出装 置による検出が行われるようにし、 その 2つに対応するラック昇降装置の作動位 置に基づく内挿およぴ外揷捕間演算によつて決まる複数の位置にラック昇降装置 を停止させるようにしてもよい。 また、 例えば、 最も上と、 中間と、 最も下との 3つの部品収容器保持部について設定位置への到達が検出されるようにすれば、 複数の部品収容器保持部をさらに正確に位置決めし得、 4つ以上の部品収容器保 持部について設定位置への到達が検出されるようにすればさらに良好に本発明の 効果を享受することができる。 なお、 ラック昇降装置の作動位置は、 ラック昇降 装置の駆動源 (例えばサーボモータ等回転角度の正確な制御が可能な電動モー タ) またはその運動を伝達する伝達装置に設けられたエンコーダや、 ラックある いはそれと共に移動する可動部材の昇降方向位置を検出するリニァエンコーダ 等、 作動量ないし作動位置検出器により検出することができる。  In the electronic circuit component supply device according to this item, the component container holding unit detecting device detects that two or more of the plurality of component container holding units have reached the set heights, respectively, and outputs a detection signal. Emit. It is desirable that the component container holder detection device should detect that all of the multiple component container holders have reached the set height, but this is not essential and two of the multiple component container holders can be detected. The effect of the invention according to this item can be obtained by detecting arrival of at least one of them at the set height. For example, the uppermost and the lowermost of the plurality of component container holders are detected to reach the set height, and the two rack elevating device operating positions at which the detection signals are issued are detected. If the rack elevating device is stopped at a plurality of positions determined by interpolation calculation based on the two operating positions, the accumulation of positioning errors of the plurality of component container holders by the rack elevating device is eliminated. However, it is possible to accurately position each of the component container holders at an appropriate relative position (relative height) with respect to the component container moving device. The two component container holders, one with a height slightly lower from the top and one with a height slightly higher from the bottom, are detected by the component container holder detection device, The rack elevating device may be stopped at a plurality of positions determined by the interpolation and extrapolation calculation based on the operating positions of the two corresponding rack elevating devices. In addition, for example, if the arrival at the set position is detected for the three uppermost, middle, and lowermost component container holders, the plurality of component container holders can be positioned more accurately. Moreover, if the arrival of the four or more component container holding portions to the set position is detected, the effects of the present invention can be more favorably enjoyed. The operating position of the rack elevating device is determined by the drive source of the rack elevating device (for example, an electric motor such as a servo motor that can accurately control the rotation angle) or an encoder provided in a transmission device that transmits the movement of the rack elevating device. Alternatively, it can be detected by an operation amount or an operation position detector such as a linear encoder for detecting the position of the movable member moving in the vertical direction.
( 2 9 ) 前記複数の部品収容器保持部のすべてが前記部品収容器保持部検出装置 により検出されるべき被検出部を有し、 部品収容器保持部検出装置がそれら被検 出部のすべてを検出する(28)項に記載の電子回路部品供給装置。 (29) All of the plurality of component container holders are the component container holder detectors. The electronic circuit component supply device according to the above mode (28), further comprising a part to be detected to be detected by the component container holder detecting device, wherein the component container holding part detection device detects all of the parts to be detected.
( 3 0 ) 前記昇降制御部が、 前記部品収容器保持部検出装置が検出信号を発した ときの前記ラック昇降装置の作動位置を記憶するラック昇降装置作動位置記憶部 を備える(27)項ないし(29)項のいずれかに記載の電子回路部品供給装置。  (30) The elevating control unit includes a rack elevating device operating position storage unit that stores an operating position of the rack elevating device when the component container holding unit detecting device issues a detection signal. (29) The electronic circuit component supply device according to any one of the above (29).
ラック昇降装置がラックを昇降させ、 複数の部品収容器保持部の各々を部品収 容器移動装置の高さに位置決めする際、 毎回、 部品収容器保持部検出装置が部品 収容器保持部の設定高さへの到達を検出し、 その検出に基づいて昇降制御部がラ ック昇降装置を停止させるようにすることが可能であり、 その場合には、 ラック 昇降装置作動位置記憶部は不可欠ではなくなる。 他方、 ラック昇降装置作動位置 記憶部を設ければ、 毎回、 部品収容器保持部検出装置が部品収容器保持部の設定 高さへの到達を検出することは不可欠ではなくなる利点がある。 例えば、 部品収 容器保持部検出装置による部品収容器保持部の設定高さへの到達の検出精度を高 めるためには、 ラック昇降装置の作動速度が低くすることが望ましく、 そのよう にする場合には、 毎回、 部品収容器保持部検出装置が部品収容器保持部の設定高 さへの到達を検出する必要がなくなれば、 作業能率が向上する効果が得られる。 Whenever the rack elevating device raises and lowers the rack and positions each of the plurality of component container holders at the height of the component container moving device, the component container holder detector detects the set height of the component container holder each time. The rack elevating control unit can stop the rack elevating device based on the detection, in which case the rack elevating device operating position storage unit becomes indispensable. . On the other hand, if the rack elevating device operating position storage unit is provided, there is an advantage that it is not indispensable that the component container holder detecting device detects that the component container holder reaches the set height every time. For example, it is desirable to lower the operating speed of the rack elevating and lowering device in order to increase the detection accuracy of the reaching of the component container holding portion to the set height by the component container holding portion detecting device. In this case, if the component container holder detection device does not need to detect the arrival of the component container holder at the set height every time, the effect of improving work efficiency can be obtained.
( 3 1 ) 前記昇降制御部が、 前記部品収容器保持部検出装置が検出信号を発した ときの前記ラック昇降装置の作動位置と、 前記設定高さと前記支持面の高さとの 差とに基づいて、 前記保持面を前記支持面と同一面内に位置させるための前記ラ ック昇降装置の複数の停止位置を決定する停止位置決定部を備える(27)項ないし (30)項のいずれかに記載の含む電子回路部品供給装置。 (31) The elevation control unit is configured to operate based on an operation position of the rack elevating device when the component container holding unit detection device outputs a detection signal, and a difference between the set height and the height of the support surface. And a stop position determining section for determining a plurality of stop positions of the rack elevating device for positioning the holding surface in the same plane as the support surface (27) to (30). An electronic circuit component supply device according to claim 1.
( 3 2 ) (1)項ないし(31)項のいずれかに記載の電子回路部品供給装置と、 電子回路部品が装着されるべき回路基板を保持する基板保持装置と、 装着ヘッドを備え、 その装着ヘッドにより、 前記部品供給装置から電子回路部 品を受け取り、 前記基板保持装置に保持された回路基板に装着する装着装置と、 少なくとも前記装着装置を制御する制御装置と  (32) An electronic circuit component supply device according to any one of (1) to (31), a board holding device for holding a circuit board on which the electronic circuit component is to be mounted, and a mounting head. A mounting device that receives an electronic circuit component from the component supply device by a mounting head and mounts the electronic circuit component on a circuit board held by the substrate holding device; and a control device that controls at least the mounting device.
を含む電子回路部品装着機。 Electronic circuit component mounting machine.
本項によれば、 電子回路部品供給装置による供給精度および信頼性が高く、 装 着へッドによる電子回路部品供給装置からの電子回路部品の取出エラーが少なく て済み、 あるいは装着へッドによる電子回路部品の保持位置誤差が減少させられ る。 したがって、 回路部品の取り直し等の余分な動作の実行が減少させられ、 電 子回路部品装着機の稼動効率が向上する。 According to this section, the supply accuracy and reliability by the electronic circuit component supply device are high, and the removal error of the electronic circuit component from the electronic circuit component supply device by the mounting head is small. The error of the holding position of the electronic circuit component by the mounting head or the mounting head is reduced. Therefore, the execution of extra operations such as re-installation of circuit components is reduced, and the operation efficiency of the electronic circuit component mounting machine is improved.
( 3 3 ) 前記電子回路部品供給装置の前記部品収容器がトレイを支持するパレッ トを含み、 かつ、  (33) the component container of the electronic circuit component supply device includes a pallet for supporting a tray, and
そのパレットに支持された全部のトレイのパレツト上における高さを取得する 高さ取得部と、  A height acquisition unit for acquiring heights of all trays supported by the pallet on the pallet;
その高さ取得部により取得された高さに基づいて前記装着へッドの前記トレイ からの電子回路部品取出し時の高さを制御する高さ制御部と  A height control unit that controls the height of the mounting head when the electronic circuit components are removed from the tray based on the height acquired by the height acquisition unit;
を含む(32)項に記載の電子回路部品装着機。 (32) The electronic circuit component mounting machine according to (32).
本項の電子回路部品装着機によれば、 装着へッドによるトレイからの電子回路 部品の取出しを精度良く行うことができる。  According to the electronic circuit component mounting machine of this section, it is possible to accurately take out the electronic circuit components from the tray using the mounting head.
例えば、 トレイがパレツト内に複数、 積み上げられているとき、 収容された全 部の電子回路部品を供給した後の空のトレイはパレツトから取り出され、 排出さ れる。 そのため、 部品取出許容位置におけるパレッ トの高さが常に同じであると すれば、 電子回路部品を供給する最上段のトレイの高さが変わる。 したがって、 現にパレット上に载置されている全部のトレイのパレツト上における高さが取得 されれば、 その高さおよび部品取出許容位置におけるパレッ トの高さから、 最上 段のトレイの高さが得られ、 装着へッドゃ電子回路部品を損傷したりすることな く、 電子回路部品を取り出すことができる位置へ装着ヘッドを下降させることが できる。 図面の簡単な説明  For example, when a plurality of trays are stacked in a pallet, an empty tray after supplying all the contained electronic circuit components is taken out of the pallet and discharged. Therefore, assuming that the height of the pallet is always the same at the component removal allowable position, the height of the uppermost tray for supplying electronic circuit components changes. Therefore, if the height on the pallet of all the trays that are actually placed on the pallet is obtained, the height of the uppermost tray is determined from the height and the height of the pallet at the part removal allowable position. Thus, the mounting head can be lowered to a position where the electronic circuit component can be taken out without damaging the mounting head / electronic circuit component. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES
図 1は本発明の実施形態である電子回路部品装着機を示す平面図である。 図 2は上記電子回路部品装着機を示す側面図である。  FIG. 1 is a plan view showing an electronic circuit component mounting machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a side view showing the electronic circuit component mounting machine.
図 3は上記電子回路部品装着機の装着装置を示す正面図 (一部断面) である。 図 4は上記装着装置の装着へッドを基準マーク撮像システムと共に示す側面図 である。  FIG. 3 is a front view (partially sectional) showing a mounting device of the electronic circuit component mounting machine. FIG. 4 is a side view showing the mounting head of the mounting device together with the fiducial mark imaging system.
図 5は上記電子回路部品装着機のトレイ型部品供給装置が台車に搭載された状 態を示す側面図である。 Fig. 5 shows a state in which the tray-type component supply device of the electronic circuit component mounting machine is mounted on a cart. It is a side view which shows a state.
図 6は上記トレイ型部品供給装置のトレイに電子回路部品が収容された状態を 示す正面断面図である。  FIG. 6 is a front sectional view showing a state in which electronic circuit components are accommodated in a tray of the tray-type component supply device.
図 7は上記トレイ型部品供給装置のパレットがラックに収納され、 パレット把 持装置によって把持された状態を示す平面図 (一部断面) である。  FIG. 7 is a plan view (partial cross section) showing a state in which the pallet of the tray-type component supply device is stored in a rack and is held by the pallet holding device.
図 8は上記パレットを示す側面図である。  FIG. 8 is a side view showing the pallet.
図 9は上記パレットのパレツト本体の一部を断面にして示す図である。  FIG. 9 is a sectional view showing a part of the pallet body of the pallet.
図 1 0は上記ラックおよぴラック昇降装置を示す背面図である。  FIG. 10 is a rear view showing the rack and the rack elevating device.
図 1 1は上記ラックおよびラック昇降装置を示す側面図である。  FIG. 11 is a side view showing the rack and the rack elevating device.
図 1 2は上記パレットがパレツト把持装置によって把持された状態を拡大して 示す平面図である。  FIG. 12 is an enlarged plan view showing a state where the pallet is gripped by the pallet gripping device.
図 1 3は上記トレイ型部品供給装置のパレツト移動装置を示す平面図である。 図 1 4は上記パレット移動装置の搬送コンべャを示す側面図である。  FIG. 13 is a plan view showing a pallet moving device of the tray-type component supply device. FIG. 14 is a side view showing a transport conveyor of the pallet moving device.
図 1 5は上記パレット移動装置の保持具をコンペャベルト等と共に示す図であ り、 図 1 5 (a)は全体の背面図 (一部断面) 、 図 1 5 (b)は前記パレットがコン べャベルトにより支持された部分を示す背面図である。  Fig. 15 is a diagram showing the holder of the pallet moving device together with a conveyor belt, etc. Fig. 15 (a) is a rear view (partial cross section) of the whole, and Fig. 15 (b) is FIG. 4 is a rear view showing a portion supported by the belt.
図 1 6は上記保持具によるパレツ トの保持, 解放を説明する図である。  Fig. 16 is a diagram for explaining the holding and release of the pallet by the holding tool.
図 1 7は上記パレットの移動を案内する可動レールを示す平面図である。 図 1 8は上記可動レールがレール保持部材に移動可能に保持されるとともに、 浮き上がり防止部材によって浮き上がりを防止された状態を示す背面断面図であ る。  FIG. 17 is a plan view showing a movable rail for guiding the movement of the pallet. FIG. 18 is a rear cross-sectional view showing a state in which the movable rail is movably held by a rail holding member, and is prevented from being lifted by a lifting prevention member.
図 1 9は上記可動レールがスプリングにより固定レールに接近する向きに付勢 された状態を示す背面断面図である。  FIG. 19 is a rear sectional view showing a state where the movable rail is urged by a spring in a direction to approach the fixed rail.
図 2 0は前記ラックに設けられた切欠を示すとともに、 パレツ トの部品供給位 置への位置決めを説明する図であり、 図 2 0 (a)はラックの切欠が設けられた部 分を示す正面図、 図 2 0 (b)および図 2 0 (c)はそれぞれ側面図である。  FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating notches provided in the rack and explaining positioning of the pallet at the component supply position, and FIG. 20 (a) illustrates a portion where the notches are provided in the rack. The front view, FIG. 20 (b) and FIG. 20 (c) are side views, respectively.
図 2 1は上記電子回路部品装着機を制御する制御装置のうち、 本発明に関連の 深い部分を概略的に示すプロック図である。  FIG. 21 is a block diagram schematically showing a portion deeply relevant to the present invention in a control device for controlling the electronic circuit component mounting machine.
図 2 2は本発明の別の実施形態であるトレィ型部品供給装置の搬送コンペャの コンペャベルトがガイドレールにより支持された状態を示す側面図である。 FIG. 22 shows a transfer conveyor of a tray-type component supply device according to another embodiment of the present invention. It is a side view which shows the state in which the conveyor belt was supported by the guide rail.
図 2 3は本発明のさらに別の実施形態であるトレィ型部品供給装置のパレツト 保持装置がパレットを保持した状態の一部を示す平面図 (一部断面) である。 図 2 4は図 2 3に示すパレット保持装置を示す側面図である。  FIG. 23 is a plan view (partial cross section) showing a part of a state in which a pallet is held by a pallet holding device of a tray-type component supply device as still another embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 24 is a side view showing the pallet holding device shown in FIG.
図 2 5は図 2 3に示すパレット保持装置を備えたトレイ型部品供給装置の搬送 コンべャおよび案内装置をパレットと共に示す平面図である。  FIG. 25 is a plan view showing the transport conveyor and the guide device of the tray-type component supply device provided with the pallet holding device shown in FIG. 23 together with the pallet.
図 2 6は図 2 5に示す搬送コンペャの保持具および係合ピン移動装置を示す正 面図である。  FIG. 26 is a front view showing the holder and the engaging pin moving device of the transport conveyor shown in FIG. 25.
図 2 7は図 2 6に示す保持具の一方の係合ピン, その係合ピンを移動させる係 合ピン移動装置およぴ案内装置等を示す平面図である。 発明を実施するための最良の形態  FIG. 27 is a plan view showing one engagement pin of the holder shown in FIG. 26, an engagement pin moving device for moving the engagement pin, a guide device, and the like. BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION
本発明の一実施形態である電子回路部品装着機 1 0を図 1ないし図 2 1に基づ いて説明する。 この種の電子回路部品装着機 1 0は、 本発明に関する部分を除い て、 例えば、 特許第 2 8 2 4 3 7 8号公報等において既に知られており、 簡単に 説明する。  An electronic circuit component mounting machine 10 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 21. This type of electronic circuit component mounting machine 10 is already known, for example, in Japanese Patent No. 2824378, except for the part relating to the present invention, and will be briefly described.
図 1において 1 2は電子回路部品装着機 1 0の装着機本体としてのベースであ る。 ベース 1 2上には、 回路基板の一種であるプリント配線板 1 4を X軸方向 (図 1においては左右方向) に搬送する基板搬送装置としての配線板コンペャ 1 6 , プリント配線板 1 4を保持する基板保持装置たるプリント配線板保持装置 (以後、 配線板保持装置と略称する) 1 8 , プリント配線板 1 4に電子回路部品 2 0 (図 4参照。 電子回路部品 2 0は回路基板に装着されて電子回路を構成する 部品であり、 以後、 回路部品 2 0と略称する。 ) を装着する装着装置 2 2および 装着装置 2 2に回路部品 2 0を供給する電子回路部品供給装置 (以後、 部品供給 装置と略称する) 2 4 , 2 6等が設けられている。  In FIG. 1, reference numeral 12 denotes a base as a mounting machine main body of the electronic circuit component mounting machine 10. On the base 12, a printed circuit board conveyor 16 and a printed circuit board 14 as a board transfer device for transferring a printed circuit board 14, which is a kind of a circuit board, in the X-axis direction (left and right directions in FIG. 1). A printed circuit board holding device (hereinafter abbreviated as a “wiring board holding device”) as a substrate holding device for holding 18, an electronic circuit component 20 on the printed wiring board 14 (see FIG. 4. This is a component that is mounted to form an electronic circuit, and is hereafter abbreviated as a circuit component 20.) A mounting device 22 for mounting the circuit component 20, and an electronic circuit component supply device (hereinafter, a circuit component supply device for supplying the circuit component 20 to the mounting device 22) , A component supply device) 24, 26, etc. are provided.
本実施形態においてプリント配線板 1 4は、 配線板コンペャ 1 6により水平な 姿勢で搬送され、 図示を省略する停止装置によって予め定められた作業位置にお いて停止させられるとともに、 ベース 1 2の作業位置に対応する部分に設けられ た配線板保持装置 1 8により保持される。 本実施形態においてプリント配線板 1 .4は、 その回路部品 2 0が装着される装着面 2 8 (図 4参照。 本実施形態では、 上面である。 ) が水平な姿勢で支持される。 In the present embodiment, the printed wiring board 14 is conveyed in a horizontal position by the wiring board conveyor 16 and stopped at a predetermined work position by a stop device (not shown), and the work of the base 12 is performed. The wiring board is held by a wiring board holding device 18 provided at a portion corresponding to the position. In the present embodiment, the printed wiring board 1 .4, the mounting surface 28 on which the circuit component 20 is mounted (see FIG. 4, which is the upper surface in this embodiment) is supported in a horizontal posture.
本実施形態においては、 電子回路部品装着機 1 0全体について XY座標面が設 定され、 この X Y座標面上において装着装置 2 2の後述する装着へッド等の移動 データ等が設定される。 この X Y座標面は、 本実施形態では、 図 1に示すよう に、 電子回路部品装着機 1 0を上方から、 部品供給装置 2 6が上側、 部品供給装 置 2 4が下側に位置する状態で平面視した場合における左右方向を X軸方向、 上 下方向を Y軸方向とし、 右方および上方をそれぞれ正方向とする水平な座標面と されている。  In the present embodiment, an XY coordinate plane is set for the entire electronic circuit component mounting machine 10, and on the XY coordinate plane, movement data and the like of a mounting head and the like of the mounting device 22 described later are set. In the present embodiment, the XY coordinate plane is, as shown in FIG. 1, a state in which the electronic circuit component mounting machine 10 is positioned from above, the component supply device 26 is positioned on the upper side, and the component supply device 24 is positioned on the lower side. When viewed in plan, the horizontal coordinate plane is defined as the X-axis direction in the left-right direction, the Y-axis direction in the upper and lower directions, and the positive direction in the right and upper directions.
部品供給装置 2 4, 2 6は、 図 2に示すように、 XY座標面内において X軸方 向と直交する Y軸方向に互いに隔たって、 配線板コンペャ 1 6の両側に位置を固 定して静止して設けられている。 図示の例においては、 部品供給装置 2 4がフィ ーダ型部品供給装置とされ、 部品供給装置 2 6力 Sトレイ型部品供給装置とされて いる。  As shown in Fig. 2, the parts supply devices 24 and 26 are fixed on both sides of the circuit board conveyor 16 so as to be separated from each other in the Y-axis direction orthogonal to the X-axis direction in the XY coordinate plane. It is provided stationary. In the illustrated example, the component supply device 24 is a feeder type component supply device, and the component supply device 26 is a S-tray type component supply device.
フィーダ型部品供給装置 2 4は、 多数のフィーダ 3 0がフィーダ支持テーブル 3 2上に、 各部品供給部が一線に沿って、 例えば X軸方向に平行な方向に沿って 配列された部品供給テーブル 3 4を有する。 各フィーダ 3 0は、 例えば、 回路部 品 2 0を部品保持テープ (図示省略) に保持させ、 テープ化電子回路部品とした 状態で供給する。 テープ化電子回路部品は、 図示を省略する送り装置により一定 ピッチずつ送られ、 回路部品 2 0が部品供給部から 1個ずつ供給される。  The feeder type component supply device 24 includes a component supply table in which a number of feeders 30 are arranged on a feeder support table 32, and each component supply unit is arranged along a line, for example, in a direction parallel to the X-axis direction. Has 3 4 For example, each feeder 30 holds the circuit component 20 on a component holding tape (not shown) and supplies the circuit component 20 as a taped electronic circuit component. The taped electronic circuit components are sent at a constant pitch by a feeding device (not shown), and the circuit components 20 are supplied one by one from a component supply unit.
トレイ型部品供給装置 2 6は、 図 6に示すように、 回路部品 2 0をトレイ 5 0 に収容して供給する。 トレィ型部品供給装置 2 6については、 後に詳細に説明す る。  As shown in FIG. 6, the tray-type component supply device 26 accommodates the circuit components 20 in a tray 50 and supplies them. The tray-type component supply device 26 will be described later in detail.
装着装置 2 2は、 図 4に示す装着へッド 6 0が互いに直交する X軸方向おょぴ Y軸方向の成分を有する方向に平行移動して回路部品 2 0を搬送し、 プリント配 線板 1 4の装着面 2 8に装着するものとされている。 そのため、 図 1に示すよう に、 ベース 1 2の配線板コンペャ 1 6の Y軸方向における両側にはそれぞれ、 ボ ールねじ 6 4が X軸方向に平行に設けられるとともに、 移動部材としての X軸ス ライド 6 6に設けられた 2個のナット 6 8 (図 3に 1個のみ図示されている) の 各々に螺合されており、 これらボールねじ 6 4がそれぞれ、 X軸スライド駆動用 モータ 7 0によって回転させられることにより、 X軸スライド 6 6が X軸に平行 な方向の任意の位置へ移動させられる。 The mounting device 22 conveys the circuit component 20 by moving the mounting head 60 shown in FIG. 4 in a direction having components in the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction which are orthogonal to each other, and conveys the circuit component 20. It is to be mounted on the mounting surface 28 of the plate 14. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 1, ball screws 64 are provided on both sides of the circuit board conveyor 16 of the base 12 in the Y-axis direction in parallel with the X-axis direction, and the X-axis as a moving member is provided. The two nuts 6 8 (only one is shown in FIG. 3) provided on the shaft slide 66 These ball screws 64 are rotated by an X-axis slide drive motor 70, respectively, so that the X-axis slide 66 is moved to an arbitrary position in a direction parallel to the X-axis. Can be
X軸スライド 6 6は、 図 1に示すように、 フィーダ型部品供給装置 2 4から配 線板コンペャ 1 6を越えてトレィ型部品供給装置 2 6にわたる長さを有する。 X 軸スライド 6 6は、 案内部材たるガイドレール 7 2 (図 3参照) を含む案内装置 により、 移動が案内される。 以上、 ナット 6 8, ボールねじ 6 4および X軸スラ ィド駆動用モータ 7 0等が X軸スライド移動装置 7 6を構成している。  The X-axis slide 66 has a length from the feeder type component supply device 24 to the tray type component supply device 26 beyond the wiring board conveyor 16 as shown in FIG. The movement of the X-axis slide 66 is guided by a guide device including a guide rail 72 (see FIG. 3) as a guide member. As described above, the nut 68, the ball screw 64, the X-axis slide driving motor 70, and the like constitute the X-axis slide moving device 76.
X軸スライ ド 6 6上には、 ポールねじ 8 0 (図 3参照) が Y軸方向に平行に設 けられるとともに、 移動部材としての Y軸スライ ド 8 2がナット 8 4において螺 合されている。 このボールねじ 8 0が Y軸スライド駆動用モータ 8 6 (図 1参 照) によって回転させられることにより、 Y軸スライド 8 2は案内部材たる一対 のガイドレール 9 2 (図 3参照) を含む案内装置により案内されて Y軸方向に平 行な任意の位置に移動させられる。 以上、 ナット 8 4 , ボールねじ 8 0および Y 軸スライド駆動用モータ 8 6等が Y軸スライド移動装置 9 4を構成し、 前記 X軸 スライド 6 6 , X軸スライド移動装置 7 6および Y軸スライド 8 2と共に、 プリ ント配線板 1 4およぴ部品供給装置 2 4, 2 6と装着へッド 6 0とを相対移動さ せる相対移動装置としての X Y移動装置 9 6を構成しており、 装着へッド 6 0は XY移動装置 9 6により、 装着面 2 8に平行であって、 水平面内の任意の位置へ 移動させられる。  On the X-axis slide 66, a pole screw 80 (see FIG. 3) is set parallel to the Y-axis direction, and a Y-axis slide 82 as a moving member is screwed with a nut 84. I have. When the ball screw 80 is rotated by a Y-axis slide drive motor 86 (see FIG. 1), the Y-axis slide 82 becomes a guide including a pair of guide rails 92 (see FIG. 3) serving as guide members. It is guided by the device and moved to any position parallel to the Y-axis direction. As described above, the nut 84, the ball screw 80 and the Y-axis slide driving motor 86 constitute a Y-axis slide movement device 94, and the X-axis slide 66, the X-axis slide movement device 76 and the Y-axis slide Along with 82, an XY moving device 96 as a relative moving device for relatively moving the printed wiring board 14 and the component supply devices 24, 26 and the mounting head 60 is constituted. The mounting head 60 is moved by the XY moving device 96 to any position in the horizontal plane that is parallel to the mounting surface 28.
Y軸スライド 8 2に設けられた支持部 1 0 2には、 図 3および図 4に示すよう に、 装着へッド 6 0, 装着へッド 6 0を昇降させるへッド軸方向移動装置たるへ ッド昇降装置 1 0 4, 装着へッド 6 0をその軸線まわりに回転させるへッド回転 装置 1 0 6が設けられており、 これら装着へッド 6 0等が部品装着ュニット 1 0 8を構成している。 本実施形態では、 部品装着ュニット 1 0 8は 1組設けられて いるのであるが、 複数組設けてもよい。 例えば、 Y軸スライド 8 2に複数の部品 装着ュニット 1 0 8を Y軸方向に平行に 1列に並べて設けることができる。 本実施形態の部品装着ュニット 1 0 8は、 特許第 3 0 9 3 3 3 9号公報に記載 の部品装着ュニットと同様に構成されており、 簡単に説明する。 支持部 1 0 2には、 軸 1 1 0が Z軸方向 (X軸, Y軸方向に直角な方向であつ て、 鉛直方向) に平行な方向に移動可能かつ軸線まわりに回転可能に設けられ、 その下端部に設けられたホルダ 1 1 2によって部品保持具としての吸着ノズル 1 1 4が着脱可能に保持される。 本実施形態においては、 軸 1 1 0およびホルダ 1 1 2が装着ヘッド 6 0を構成している。 As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the support portion 102 provided on the Y-axis slide 82 has a head axial moving device for moving the mounting head 60 and the mounting head 60 up and down. A bar head elevating device 104 and a head rotating device 106 for rotating the mounting head 60 around its axis are provided. 0 8 In the present embodiment, one set of the component mounting unit 108 is provided, but a plurality of sets may be provided. For example, a plurality of component mounting units 108 can be provided on the Y-axis slide 82 in a row in parallel with the Y-axis direction. The component mounting unit 108 of the present embodiment has the same configuration as the component mounting unit described in Japanese Patent No. 3933339, and will be described briefly. The support 110 has an axis 110 provided so as to be movable in a direction parallel to the Z-axis direction (a direction perpendicular to the X-axis and Y-axis directions and a vertical direction) and rotatable around the axis. The suction nozzle 114 serving as a component holder is detachably held by a holder 112 provided at the lower end of the suction nozzle. In the present embodiment, the shaft 110 and the holder 112 constitute a mounting head 60.
へッド昇降装置 1 0 4は、 へッド昇降モータ 1 2 0を駆動源とし、 へッド昇降 モータ 1 2 0の回転がギヤ 1 2 2 , 1 2 4を含む回転伝達装置によりナット 1 2 6に伝達され、 ナット 1 2 6が回転させられることにより、 ナット 1 2 6に螺合 された軸 1 1 0が昇降させられ、 装着へッド 6 0が昇降させられる。 へッド昇降 装置 1 0 4は、 装着へッド 6 0を作業対象物に接近, f間させる接近 ·離間装置 でもあり、 前記 X Y移動装置 9 6と共に相対移動装置を構成していると考えるこ ともできる。 へッド回転装置 1 0 6は、 へッド回転モータ 1 3 0 (図 2 1参照) を駆動源とし、 その回転がギヤ 1 3 2を含む回転伝達装置により軸 1 1◦に伝達 され、 軸 1 1 0が軸線まわりに回転させられて、 装着へッド 6 0が自身の鉛直な 回転軸線まわりに回転させられる。  The head lifting / lowering device 104 uses a head lifting / lowering motor 120 as a drive source, and the rotation of the head lifting / lowering motor 120 is controlled by a rotation transmitting device including gears 122, 124 and nuts 1104. The rotation is transmitted to the nut 26 and the nut 126 is rotated, whereby the shaft 110 screwed to the nut 126 is raised and lowered, and the mounting head 60 is raised and lowered. The head lifting / lowering device 104 is also an approach / separation device for moving the mounting head 60 toward and away from the work object, and is considered to constitute a relative moving device together with the XY moving device 96. You can do that too. The head rotation device 106 uses a head rotation motor 130 (see FIG. 21) as a drive source, and its rotation is transmitted to a shaft 11 ° by a rotation transmission device including a gear 132, The axis 110 is rotated about the axis and the mounting head 60 is rotated about its own vertical axis of rotation.
吸着ノズル 1 1 4は本体部としてのノズル本体 1 3 8およぴ吸着部としての吸 着管 1 4 0を備え、 回路部品 2 0を負圧により吸着し、 プリント配線板 1 4に装 着する。 そのため、 吸着ノズル 1 1 4は、 図示を省略する負圧源, 正圧源および 大気に接続されており、 電磁方向切換弁装置 (図示省略) の切換えにより、 吸着 管 1 4 0が負圧源, 正圧源および大気に択一的に連通させられる。 吸着管 1 4 0 は下向きの吸着面 1 4 2を備え、 回路部品 2 0を吸着する。  The suction nozzle 1 14 has a nozzle body 1 38 as a main body and a suction pipe 140 as a suction unit, and sucks circuit components 20 by negative pressure and mounts it on the printed wiring board 14 I do. Therefore, the suction nozzle 114 is connected to a negative pressure source (not shown), a positive pressure source (not shown), and the atmosphere. , It is alternatively connected to the positive pressure source and the atmosphere. The suction tube 140 has a downward suction surface 142, and sucks the circuit component 20.
Y軸スライド 8 2にはまた、 プリント配線板 1 4に設けられた複数の基準マー ク 1 5 0 (図 1参照) を撮像する撮像装置たる基準マークカメラ 1 5 2 (図 1 , 図 4参照) が移動不能に設けられている。 基準マークカメラ 1 5 2は、 本実施形 態においては、 C C Dカメラ より構成されるとともに、 面撮像装置とされてい る。 基準マークカメラ 1 5 2に対応して照明装置 1 5 4が配設されており、 基準 マーク 1 5 0およびその周辺を照明する。 これら基準マークカメラ 1 5 2および 照明装置 1 5 4が基準マーク撮像システムを構成している。  The Y-axis slide 82 also has a fiducial mark camera 15 2 (see FIGS. 1 and 4), which is an imaging device that images a plurality of fiducial marks 150 (see FIG. 1) provided on the printed wiring board 14. ) Is immovable. In the present embodiment, the fiducial mark camera 152 is composed of a CCD camera and is a surface imaging device. An illumination device 154 is provided corresponding to the fiducial mark camera 152 to illuminate the fiducial mark 150 and its surroundings. The fiducial mark camera 15 2 and the lighting device 15 4 constitute a fiducial mark imaging system.
X軸スライド 6 6には、 ちょうど X軸スライド 6 6を移動させる 2つのボール ねじ 6 4にそれぞれ対応する位置であって、 フィーダ型部品供給装置 2 4とプリ ント配線板 1 4との間およびトレィ型部品供給装置 2 6とプリント配線板 1 4と の間の位置にそれぞれ、 撮像装置 1 8 0が移動不能に取り付けられている。 これら撮像装置 1 8 0の構成は同じであり、 図 3に一方を代表的に示すよう に、 回路部品 2 0を撮像する部品カメラ 1 8 2およぴ導光装置 1 8 4を備えてい る。 部品カメラ 1 8 2は、 本実施形態においては、 前記基準マークカメラ 1 5 2 と同様に、 C C Dカメラとされるとともに面撮像装置とされている。 また、 X軸 スライ ド 6 6の装着へッド 6 0の移動経路の下方には照明装置 1 8 6が設けられ ており、 これら撮像装置 1 8 0および照明装置 1 8 6を含む部品撮像システムに より、 回路部品 2 0の正面像と投影像とが選択的に撮像される。 部品撮像システ ムは装着へッド 6 0の Y軸方向における移動経路の途中に設けられており、 部品 供給装置 2 4, 2 6からプリント配線板 1 4へ移動させられる途中に撮像されX ball slide 6 6 has two balls just to move X axis slide 6 6 Positions corresponding to the screws 64, respectively, between the feeder type component supply device 24 and the printed wiring board 14 and between the tray type component supply device 26 and the printed wiring board 14 respectively. The imaging device 180 is immovably mounted. The configuration of these imaging devices 180 is the same, and includes a component camera 182 for capturing an image of the circuit component 20 and a light guide device 184, as typically shown in FIG. . In the present embodiment, similarly to the fiducial mark camera 152, the component camera 1822 is a CCD camera and a surface imaging device. An illumination device 186 is provided below the moving path of the mounting head 60 for the X-axis slide 66, and a component imaging system including the imaging device 180 and the illumination device 186 is provided. Thereby, a front image and a projected image of the circuit component 20 are selectively captured. The component imaging system is provided in the middle of the movement path of the mounting head 60 in the Y-axis direction, and is imaged while being moved from the component supply devices 24 and 26 to the printed wiring board 14.
0。 0.
前記トレイ型部品供給装置 2 6を図 5ないし図 2 0に基づいて説明する。 トレイ型部品供給装置 2 6は、 本実施形態においては、 図 6およぴ図 7に示す ように、 前記トレィ 5 0を支持し、 部品収容器を構成するトレイパレッ ト (以 後、 ノ《レットと略称する) 2 0 0, パレット 2 0 0が収納されるラック 2 0 2, ラック昇降装置 2 0 4 (図 1 0参照) , 部品収容器移動装置としての搬送コンペ ャ 2 0 6および部品収容器案内装置としてのパレツ ト案内装置 2 0 8 (図 1 3参 照) を含み、 台車 2 1 0 (図 5参照) に搭載されてベース 1 2に取り付けられ、 回路部品 2 0を供給する。 ラック 2 0 2およびラック昇降装置 2 0 4が部品収容 器収納部としてのパレツト収納部ないし部品収納部を構成し、 搬送コンペャ 2 0 6およぴパレツ ト案内装置 2 0 8がパレツ トシヤ トル部ないしパレツ トシヤ トル システムを構成している。  The tray-type component supply device 26 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the tray-type component supply device 26 supports the tray 50 and forms a tray pallet (hereinafter referred to as a “nolet”) that configures a component container. 200), a rack 202 for storing pallets 200, a rack elevating device 204 (see Fig. 10), a conveyor 206 as a component container moving device, and a component housing It includes a pallet guide device 208 (see Fig. 13) as a container guide device, is mounted on a trolley 210 (see Fig. 5), is mounted on a base 12, and supplies circuit components 20. The rack 202 and the rack elevating device 204 constitute a pallet storage portion or a component storage portion as a component container storage portion, and the transport conveyor 206 and the pallet guide device 208 are pallet shuttle portions. Or a pallet shuttle system.
トレイ 5 0は、 図 6に示すように、 一平面状の板材を、 周囲を残し、 中央側の 部分を板面に直角な方向に突出させ、 横断面形状が矩形の突部 2 1 2および凹部 2 1 4を設けた形状を有する。 突部 2 1 2の突出端面は一平面状をなし、 その突 出端面に開口する部品収容部としての収容凹部 2 1 6が複数、 一平面状に設けら れ、 各収容凹部 2 1 6にそれぞれ回路部品 2 0が位置決めされて、 1個ずつ取出 し可能に収容される。 本実施形態では、 収容凹部 2 1 6が配置された部品収容平 面は、 トレイ 5 0の軸線に直角な一平面状をなす。 また、 1つのトレィ 5 0には 一種類ずつの回路部品 2 0が収容される。 突部 2 1 2の外周面 2 1 8およぴ凹部 2 1 4の内周面 2 2 0は同じ傾斜のテーパ状をなし、 トレイ 5 0の凹部 2 1 4に 別のトレイ 5 0の突部 2 1 2を嵌合することにより、 複数のトレイ 5 0を、 部品 収容平面に平行な方向において位置決めし、 相対移動不能かつ相対回転不能な状 態で重ねて積むことができる。 As shown in FIG. 6, the tray 50 is made by projecting a flat plate material, leaving its periphery, and protruding the central portion in a direction perpendicular to the plate surface. It has a shape with recesses 214. The protruding end surface of the protrusion 2 12 has a flat shape, and a plurality of housing recesses 2 16 serving as component housing portions that are open to the protruding end surface are provided in a single plane. Each circuit component 20 is positioned and taken out one by one It is housed as possible. In the present embodiment, the component housing plane in which the housing recesses 2 16 are arranged has a single plane perpendicular to the axis of the tray 50. One tray 50 accommodates one type of circuit component 20. The outer peripheral surface 2 18 of the projection 2 1 2 and the inner peripheral surface 2 20 of the concave portion 2 14 have the same tapered shape, and the concave portion 2 14 of the tray 50 is By fitting the parts 212, the plurality of trays 50 can be positioned in a direction parallel to the component housing plane, and stacked one on top of the other in a state in which they cannot be relatively moved and cannot be rotated.
ノ レット 2 0 0を説明する。  The knurl 200 will be described.
パレツト 2 0 0はトレイ 5 0を支持し、 トレイ 5 0を介して回路部品 2 0を収 容する。 ノ レッ ト 2 0 0のパレツ ト本体 2 3 0は、 本実施形態においては、 図 7 および図 8に示すように、 平面視形状が矩形をなすとともに、 薄い板状をなし、 その両側部にそれぞれ、 レール 2 3 2が設けられ、 被支持部ないし被案内部を構 成している。 これらレール 2 3 2の各長手方向の両端部はそれぞれ、 先端ほど幅 が狭くされて案内部 2 3 4が設けられている。 また、 2つのレール 2 3 2の下面 の各長手方向の両端部にはそれぞれ、 図 8に示すように、 端側ほど上方に向かう 向きに傾斜する傾斜面が設けられ、 案内面 2 3 6を構成している。 さらに、 2つ のレール 2 3 2にはそれぞれ、 図 7に示すように、 長手方向に隔たった 2箇所に それぞれ、 レール 2 3 2の長手方向に平行で前記部品収容平面に直角な側面 2 3 8および上面に開口する被係合部としての係合凹部 2 4 2 , 2 4 4が設けられて いる。 これら係合凹部 2 4 2 , 2 4 4の、 レール 2 3 2の長手方向に直角な側面 であって、 互いに近い側の面が係合面 2 4 6 , 2 4 8を構成している。  The pallet 200 supports the tray 50, and receives the circuit components 20 via the tray 50. In this embodiment, the pallet main body 230 of the knurl 200 has a rectangular shape in plan view and a thin plate shape, as shown in FIGS. Each is provided with rails 232 and constitutes a supported portion or a guided portion. Each of both ends in the longitudinal direction of each of the rails 232 has a guide portion 234 provided so that its width becomes narrower toward its tip. As shown in FIG. 8, inclined surfaces are provided at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the lower surface of the two rails 2 32 so as to be inclined upward toward the end. Make up. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 7, the two rails 2 32 each have side surfaces 2 3 parallel to the longitudinal direction of the rails 2 3 2 and perpendicular to the component receiving plane, as shown in FIG. 8 and engagement recesses 2 4 2 and 2 4 4 are provided as engaged portions that open on the upper surface. The side surfaces of these engagement concave portions 242 and 244 that are perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rail 232 and are close to each other constitute the engagement surfaces 246 and 248.
パレツト本体 2 3 0は、 本実施形態においては、 例えば、 積水樹脂プラメタル 株式会社製のスチールアートパネル (商品名) によって作られており、 図 9に模 型的に示すように、 振動吸収層 2 5 0と、 その振動吸収層 2 5 0を表裏両面側か ら挟む磁性材料層 2 5 2 , 2 5 4とが積層されて成る。 振動吸収層 2 5 0は、 本 実施形態においては、 振動吸収材料の一種である発泡樹脂、 例えば、 ポリエチレ ンにより作られ、 磁性材料層 2 5 2 , 2 5 4は金属材料の一種である磁性材料、 例えば、 スチールにより作られている。 磁性材料層 2 5 2 , 2 5 4は金属材料層 であり、 その表面にそれぞれ、 塗装 2 5 6 , 2 5 8が施されている。 したがつ て、 パレッ ト本体 2 3 0は磁性を有するとともに、 振動吸収能を備えながら、 軽 量で薄く、 剛性の高いものとされている。 なお、 塗装を施すことは不可欠ではな い。 In this embodiment, the pallet body 230 is made of, for example, a steel art panel (trade name) manufactured by Sekisui Jushi Plastics Co., Ltd. As shown schematically in FIG. 50 and a magnetic material layer 25 2, 25 4 sandwiching the vibration absorbing layer 250 from both sides. In the present embodiment, the vibration absorbing layer 250 is made of a foamed resin that is a kind of vibration absorbing material, for example, polyethylene, and the magnetic material layers 255 and 254 are made of a magnetic material that is a kind of metal material. Made of material, for example steel. The magnetic material layers 25 2 and 25 4 are metal material layers, and the surfaces thereof are coated with paints 256 and 258, respectively. According to In addition, the pallet body 230 is made of a material that is light, thin, and highly rigid, while having magnetism and vibration absorption capability. It is not essential to paint.
ノ《レッ ト本体 2 3 0には、 前記一対のレール 2 3 2が設けられた 2辺と、 レー ル 2 3 2の長手方向に直角な 2辺のうちの 1辺とにそれぞれ、 パレット本体 2 3 0の上面ないしトレイ 5 0を支持する支持面 2 6 0から直角に立ち上がる位置決 め面 2 6 2が設けられている。 パレツト本体 2 3 0のレール 2 3 2の長手方向に 平行な方向を前後方向ないし搬送コンペャ 2 0 6によるパレツ ト 2 0 0の搬送方 向であって部品収容器移動方向としてのパレツト搬送方向とし、 レール 2 3 2に 直角な 2辺のうちの、 位置決め面 2 6 2が設けられた側を前部とし、 一対のレー ル 2 3 2が隔たった方向であって、 支持面 2 6 0内においてパレツト搬送方向と 直交する方向を左右方向ないし幅方向とする。 パレツト本体 2 3 0の後部には、 パレツト本体 2 3 0の支持面 2 6 0から直角に立ち上がる把持部 2 6 4が設けら れている。 把持部 2 6 4は左右方向に長く、 取手として機能するとともに、 パレ ット本体 2 3 0を補強する役割を果たす。  The pallet main body 230 has two sides each having the pair of rails 232 and one of the two sides perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rail 232, respectively. A positioning surface 262 which rises at right angles from the upper surface of 230 or the support surface 260 supporting the tray 50 is provided. The direction parallel to the longitudinal direction of the rail 2 32 of the pallet body 230 is the forward / backward direction or the pallet conveyance direction as the pallet 200 conveyance direction by the conveyance conveyor 206 and the component container movement direction. The side on which the positioning surface 262 is provided, of the two sides perpendicular to the rail 2332, is a front portion, and is a direction in which a pair of rails 2332 are separated from each other. , The direction perpendicular to the pallet transport direction is defined as the left-right direction or the width direction. At the rear of the pallet body 230, a grip portion 264 that rises at a right angle from the support surface 260 of the pallet body 230 is provided. The grip portion 264 is long in the left-right direction, functions as a handle, and serves to reinforce the pallet body 230.
また、 パレッ ト本体 2 3 0の前面の左右方向の中央部には、 図 7および図 8に 示すように、 取手 2 6 6が前方へ延び出す向きに突設され、 被保持部を構成して いる。 取手 2 6 6の突出端部に、 パレッ ト 2 0 0の左右方向に平行に一対の握り 部 2 6 8が設けられている。 これら握り部 2 6 8は、 本実施形態においては、 横 断面形状が円形をなし、 同心状に設けられている。  At the center of the front of the pallet body 230 in the left-right direction, as shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, a handle 266 is provided so as to protrude forward so as to form a held portion. ing. At the protruding end of the handle 266, a pair of grip portions 268 are provided in parallel with the left and right directions of the pallet 200. In the present embodiment, these grip portions 268 are concentrically provided with a circular cross section.
前記トレイ 5 0は、 パレッ ト 2 0 0により少なくとも一つ、 支持される。 トレ ィ 5 0は、 その大きさに応じて、 パレット 2 0 0内の 1箇所において支持される こともあれば、 複数箇所、 例えば、 2箇所において支持されることもある。 ま た、 複数のトレイ 5 0が互いに重ねられ、 積載されることもある。 いずれにして もトレイ 5 0は支持面 2 6 0上に载置されて支持され、 パレット 2 0 0内におい て拘束装置 2 7 0により、 前記部品収容平面に平行な方向に移動不能に拘束され る。  At least one tray 500 is supported by a pallet 200. The tray 50 may be supported at one location in the pallet 200 or may be supported at multiple locations, for example, two locations, depending on its size. Further, a plurality of trays 50 may be stacked and stacked on each other. In any case, the tray 50 is placed and supported on the support surface 260, and is restrained immovably in a direction parallel to the component receiving plane by the restraining device 270 in the pallet 200. You.
本実施形態において拘束装置 2 7 0は、 図 7に示すように、 複数種類の拘束部 材 2 7 2 , 2 7 4を含む。 これら拘束部材 2 7 2 , 2 7 4はそれぞれ、 非磁性材 料製の磁石保持体としてのケーシング 2 7 5, 2 7 7と、 ケーシング 2 7 5 , 2 7 7内に収容されて永久磁石部を構成する永久磁石 2 7 6 , 2 7 8とを備え、 磁 性材料製のパレット本体 2 3 0の支持面 2 6 0上の任意の位置に載置し、 固定す ることができる。 トレイ 5 0は、 その 4つの側面のうちの少なくとも 2面が、 前 記位置決め面 2 6 2に当接させられて位置決めされ、 トレイ 5 0の、 位置決め面 2 6 2に当接させられていない 2側面に拘束部材 2 7 2 , 2 7 4の少なくとも一 方を接触させるとともに、 支持面 2 6 0上に置き、 トレイ 5 0の移動を規制し、 拘束する。 In the present embodiment, the restraining device 270 includes a plurality of types of restraining members 272 and 274 as shown in FIG. These restraining members 2 7 2, 2 7 4 are each made of non-magnetic material Casings 275 and 277 as permanent magnet holders, and permanent magnets 276 and 278 that are housed in the casings 275 and 277 to form a permanent magnet portion, It can be placed and fixed at any position on the support surface 260 of the magnetic material pallet body 230. At least two of the four side surfaces of the tray 50 are positioned by being brought into contact with the positioning surface 262, and are not brought into contact with the positioning surface 262 of the tray 50. At least one of the restraining members 27 2 and 27 4 is brought into contact with the two side surfaces, and is placed on the support surface 260 to restrict the movement of the tray 50 and restrain it.
前述のように、 トレイ 5 0は、 部品収容平面に平行な方向において互いに位置 決めされた状態で複数、 重ねられるように設けられており、 拘束部材 2 7 2, 2 7 4は、 互いに重ねられた複数のトレイ 5 0のうち、 少なくとも一番下のトレィ 5 0の側面に当接させられて拘束するものとされている。 複数のトレイ 5 0は互 いに嵌合されて部品収容平面に平行な方向の位置ずれを防止されており、 少なく とも一番下のトレイ 5 0の移動を拘束部材 2 7 2, 2 7 4によつて拘束すること により、 他のトレィ 5 0のずれも規制される。 このようにトレイ 5 0がパレッ ト 2 0 0に収容され、 支持されることにより、 トレイ 5 0の収容凹部 2 1 6カパレ ット 2 0 0の部品収容部として機能し、 トレイ 5 0の一平面上の部品収容平面が ノ レッ ト 2 0 0の部品収容平面を構成する。 この部品収容平面は支持面 2 6 0と 平行である。  As described above, the plurality of trays 50 are provided so as to be stacked one on another in a direction parallel to the component storage plane, and the restraining members 27 2 and 27 4 are stacked on each other. Among the plurality of trays 50, at least the lowermost tray 50 is brought into contact with and restrained. The plurality of trays 50 are fitted together to prevent displacement in the direction parallel to the component receiving plane, and at least the movement of the lowermost tray 50 is restricted by the restraint members 27 2 and 27 4. The displacement of other trays 50 is also restricted by the constraint by. As described above, the tray 50 is accommodated in the pallet 200 and supported, thereby functioning as a component accommodating portion of the accommodating recess 2 16 of the tray 50 and a part of the tray 50. The component receiving plane on the plane constitutes the component receiving plane of the knowledge 200. This component receiving plane is parallel to the support surface 260.
前記ラック 2 0 2は、 図 1 0に示すように、 本実施形態においては、 パレッ ト 収納方向に直角な縦断面形状が口の字形をなし、 パレッ ト 2 0 2の搬送コンペャ 2 0 6による搬送方向において正逆両方向に開口する 2つの開口を有し、 複数の パレッ ト 2 0 2をそれら全部を覆う状態で収納し、 パレッ ト 2 0 0をラック 2 0 2に対して、 その開口方向においてのみ着脱可能である。  As shown in FIG. 10, in the present embodiment, the rack 202 has a vertical cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the pallet storage direction in the shape of a mouth, and is formed by a transfer conveyor 206 of the pallet 202. It has two openings that open in both the forward and reverse directions in the transport direction. A plurality of pallets 202 are stored so as to cover all of them. Can be attached and detached only at.
ラック 2 0 2のラック本体 2 8 0には、 図 1 0に示すように、 2本を一対とす るパレツ ト支持部材としてのレール 2 8 2が複数対、 ラック昇降方向に等間隔に 並ぶ状態で設けられ、 部品収容器保持部を構成している。 これら複数対のレール 2 8 2は、 本実施形態においては、 ラック本体 2 8 0を構成するレール形成部材 2 8 3に一体的に設けられており、 それにより、 ラック 2 0 2には複数の棚 2 8 4が上下方向に等間隔に設けられ、 パレッ ト 2 0 0を多段に収納することが可能 であり、 複数種類の回路部品 2 0を収納することができ、 多数の回路部品 2 0を 収納することができる。 台車 2 1 0に支持されたトレイ型部品供給装置 2 6のラ ック 2 0 2は鉛直に設けられ、 レール 2 8 2は、 前記パレット搬送方向ないし前 後方向に平行に延びる状態で水平に設けられている。 As shown in Fig. 10, the rack body 280 of the rack 202 has a plurality of pairs of rails 282 as a pair of pallet support members, which are arranged at equal intervals in the rack elevating direction. It is provided in a state and constitutes a component container holder. In the present embodiment, the plurality of pairs of rails 282 are provided integrally with the rail forming member 283 constituting the rack main body 280, whereby the rack 202 has a plurality of rails 282. Shelf 2 8 4 are provided at equal intervals in the vertical direction, and pallets 200 can be stored in multiple stages, a plurality of types of circuit components 20 can be stored, and a large number of circuit components 20 can be stored. be able to. The rack 202 of the tray-type component supply device 26 supported by the cart 210 is provided vertically, and the rail 282 is horizontally extended in a state of extending parallel to the pallet transport direction or the front and rear directions. Is provided.
ノ、。レッ ト 2 0 0は一対のレール 2 3 2において一対のレール 2 8 2上に載置さ れ、 それらレール 2 8 2により水平な姿勢で支持され、 部品収容平面は水平面で あり、 レール 2 8 2の長手方向に平行な方向であって、 部品収容平面に平行な水 平方向に移動可能に保持される。 レール 2 8 2の上面がパレツト 2 0 0を下方か ら支持して保持する保持面としての支持面 2 8 6を構成しており、 支持面 2 8 6 の、 レール 2 8 2の前端部、 すなわち搬送ロンべャ 2 0 6に隣接する側の端部に は、 図 8に示すように、 前方ほど下方へ傾斜する傾斜面が設けられ、 案内面 2 8 8を構成している。 支持面 2 8 6は、 本実施形態においては水平面である。 パレ ット 2 0 0はラック 2 0 2に左右方向においては、 一対のレール 2 3 2とレール 形成部材 2 8 3との間に、 パレッ ト 2 0 0の前後方向の移動を許容する極く僅か な隙間を残して収納される。  No ,. The let 200 is mounted on the pair of rails 282 on the pair of rails 232 and is supported by the rails 282 in a horizontal posture, the component receiving plane is a horizontal plane, and the rail 282 is provided. 2 is held so as to be movable in a direction parallel to the longitudinal direction and in a horizontal direction parallel to the component housing plane. The upper surface of the rail 282 constitutes a supporting surface 286 as a holding surface for supporting and holding the pallet 200 from below, and the front end of the rail 282 of the supporting surface 286, That is, at the end portion on the side adjacent to the transport roller 206, as shown in FIG. 8, an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the front is provided, forming a guide surface 288. The support surface 286 is a horizontal surface in the present embodiment. The pallet 200 has a very small distance between the pair of rails 232 and the rail forming member 283 that allows the pallet 200 to move in the front-rear direction. It is stored with a slight gap left.
また、 ラック 2 0 2の前記レール形成部材 2 8 3およびレール 2 8 2の前記ラ ック本体 2 8 0の側壁 3 2 8 (図 1 2参照) より前方へ突出させられた前端部に は、 図 8および図 2 0 (a) , (b)に示すように切欠 2 9 2が設けられている。 切 欠 2 9 2は、 複数対のレール 2 8 2およびそれらレール 2 8 2が設けられたレー ル形成部材 2 8 3の各々を左右方向に貫通して設けられている。  In addition, a front end protruding forward from the rail forming member 283 of the rack 202 and the side wall 328 of the rack body 280 of the rail 282 (see FIG. 12) is provided. As shown in FIG. 8 and FIGS. 20 (a) and (b), a notch 292 is provided. The notch 292 is provided to penetrate a plurality of pairs of rails 282 and a rail forming member 283 provided with the rails 282 in the left-right direction.
ラック 2 0 2は、 前記ラック昇降装置 2 0 4により昇降させられる。 ラック昇 降装置 2 0 4は、 図 1 0に示すように、 トレイ型部品供給装置 2 6の装置本体を 構成するフレーム 3 0 0に取り付けられた駆動源としてのラック昇降モータ 3 0 2 , フレーム 3 0 0に鉛直軸線まわりに回転可能に設けられた一対のねじ軸 3 0 4およびラック 2 0 2に固定の一対のナツト 3 0 6を含む。 ねじ軸 3 0 4がラッ ク昇降モータ 3 0 2によって回転させられることにより、 ラック 2 0 2が案内部 材としての一対のガイドレール 3 0 8 (図 1 1参照) を含む案内装置により案内 されて、 鉛直方向の任意の位置へ昇降させられる。 ラック 2 0 2は、 水平な部品 収容平面と直角な方向に昇降させられるのであり、 レール 2 8 2により支持され た複数のパレツト 2 0 0が順次、 部品供給位置に位置決めされる。 The rack 202 is moved up and down by the rack elevating device 204. As shown in FIG. 10, the rack elevating device 204 includes a rack elevating motor 300 as a driving source attached to a frame 300 constituting an apparatus body of the tray-type component supply device 26, and a frame. 300 includes a pair of screw shafts 304 provided rotatably about a vertical axis and a pair of nuts 360 fixed to the rack 202. When the screw shaft 304 is rotated by the rack elevating motor 302, the rack 202 is guided by a guide device including a pair of guide rails 300 (see FIG. 11) as guide members. To be moved up and down to any position in the vertical direction. Rack 202 is a horizontal part The pallet 200 is raised and lowered in a direction perpendicular to the housing plane, and the plurality of pallets 200 supported by the rails 282 are sequentially positioned at the component supply position.
理想的な部品供給位置は、 搬送コンべャ 2 0 6の後述するコンべャベルトのパ レット 2 0 0を支持する支持面により決まる。 ノ、。レット 2 0 0を支持するレール 2 8 2の支持面 2 8 6が、 コンペャベルトの支持面と正確に同一平面内、 本実施 形態においては同一水平面内に位置する位置がパレツト 2 0 0の理想的な部品供 給位置であり、 コンべャベルトの支持面を含む水平な一平面がパレット 2 0 0の 搬送面である。 搬送コンペャ 2 0 6のコンペャベルトの支持面の上下方向の位置 は、 設計上、 所定の高さに設定されているが、 搬送コンペャ 2 0 6の構成部品の 製造誤差や組付誤差等に起因する高さ方向の誤差により、 必ずしも設計上の位置 に位置するとは限らず、 理想的な部品供給位置も設計上の位置にあるとは限らな い。 ラック昇降装置 2 0 4においても構成部品の製造誤差や組付誤差等により高 さ方向の誤差があるのが普通であり、 また、 複数対のレール 2 8 2のピッチに誤 差があることもあり、 理想的な部品供給位置が設計上の位置にあつたとしても、 ラック 2 0 2の昇降によってパレット 2 0 0がその理想的な部品供給位置に位置 決めされるとは限らない。 そのため、 これら種々の誤差を可及的に打ち消して、 パレット 2 0 2を当該トレイ型部品供給装置 2 6における理想的な部品供給位置 にできる限り高い精度で位置決めすべく、 乗り移りセンサ 3 1 2が設けられてい る。  An ideal component supply position is determined by a support surface of the conveyor 206 that supports a pallet 200 of a conveyor belt described later. No ,. The support surface 286 of the rail 282 supporting the ret 200 is exactly in the same plane as the support surface of the conveyor belt, and in this embodiment, the position located in the same horizontal plane is the ideal position of the palette 200. And a horizontal plane including the conveyor belt support surface is the pallet 200 transfer surface. The vertical position of the support surface of the conveyor belt of the conveyor 206 is set to a predetermined height by design, but it is caused by a manufacturing error or an assembly error of the components of the conveyor 206. Due to errors in the height direction, it is not always located at the design position, and the ideal component supply position is not always at the design position. Also in the rack elevating device 204, there is usually an error in the height direction due to a manufacturing error or an assembly error of the component parts, and there may be an error in the pitch of the plurality of pairs of rails 282. Therefore, even if the ideal component supply position is located at the design position, the pallet 200 is not necessarily positioned at the ideal component supply position by moving the rack 202 up and down. Therefore, the transfer sensor 3 1 2 is arranged so that these various errors are canceled as much as possible and the pallet 202 is positioned at the ideal component supply position in the tray-type component supply device 26 with as high accuracy as possible. Provided.
乗り移りセンサ 3 1 2は、 設計上、 部品供給位置に対してラック昇降方向にお いて離れた位置、 本実施形態においては、 図 2 0 (b)に示すように、 部品供給位 置の上方に設けられている。 乗り移りセンサ 3 1 2はできる限り設計上設定され た位置の近くに設けられるとともに、 搬送コンペャ 2 0 6のコンペャベルトの支 持面に対する上下方向の距離が測定装置により測定され、 理想的な部品供給位置 に対する正確な位置が取得されている。 あるいは乗り移りセンサ 3 1 2の組付け 時に組付け位置を調整し、 コンべャベルトの支持面の高さによつて決まる理想的 な部品供給位置に対して予め設定された距離、 離れた位置に設けられるようにし てもよレ、。 いずれにしても、 乗り移りセンサ 3 1 2の理想的な部品供給位置 (搬 送コンペャ 2 0 6のコンペャベルトの支持面) に対する実際の距離 L 1 (図 2 0 (c)参照) が判っている。 The transfer sensor 3 12 is designed to be located away from the component supply position in the rack elevating direction, and in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20 (b), above the component supply position. Is provided. The transfer sensor 3 1 2 is installed as close as possible to the position set in the design as much as possible, and the distance in the vertical direction with respect to the support surface of the conveyor belt of the transport conveyor 206 is measured by a measuring device, and the ideal component supply position The exact position for has been obtained. Alternatively, adjust the mounting position when assembling the transfer sensor 312, and install it at a position that is a predetermined distance away from the ideal component supply position determined by the height of the conveyor belt support surface. You can do it. In any case, the actual distance L 1 (see FIG. 20) of the transfer sensor 3 12 to the ideal component supply position (the support surface of the conveyor belt of the transport conveyor 206). (See (c)).
乗り移りセンサ 3 1 2は、 本実施形態においては、 光電センサの一種である透 過式の光電センサにより構成され、 投光器および受光器は、 その光軸がラック 2 0 2の左右方向に平行であって水平となり、 かつ、 ラック 2 0 2に設けられた前 記切欠 2 9 2を光が通る位置に設けられている。 したがって、 ラック 2 0 2が昇 降させられれば、 投光器が放射する光が切欠 2 9 2を通って受光器により受光さ れ、 あるいはラック 2 0 2により遮られ、 それら受光および遮光に基づいて、 複 数対のレール 2 8 2が順次検出される。 本実施形態においては、 レール 2 8 2の 切欠 2 9 2が設けられた部分が被検出部を構成している。 なお、 パレット 2 0 0 のレール 2 3 2の端部の下面は、 案内面 2 3 6を形成すべく、 傾斜させられてお り、 パレッ ト 2 0 0がラック 2 0 2に収納された状態では、 図 2 0 (b)に示すよ うに、 レール 2 3 2の先端部が切欠 2 9 2から外れる。 したがって、 ラック 2 0 2にパレツ ト 2 0 0が収納された状態でレール 2 8 2が乗り移りセンサ 3 1 2に よって検出される場合でも、 投光器が放射する光の透過をパレット 2 0 0が妨げ ることはない。 レール 2 3 2に傾斜した案内面 2 3 6を設けるべく、 レール 2 3 2の先端部に設けられた切欠ないし傾斜部が部品収容器保持部検出許容部を構成 している。 乗り移りセンサ 3 1 2による検出に基づくレール 2 8 2の昇降制御に ついては、 後述する。  In the present embodiment, the transfer sensor 312 is constituted by a transmissive photoelectric sensor which is a type of photoelectric sensor. The light emitter and the light receiver have their optical axes parallel to the left and right directions of the rack 202. It is provided at a position where light passes through the notch 292 provided in the rack 202. Therefore, if the rack 202 is moved up and down, the light emitted from the emitter is received by the receiver through the notch 292 or blocked by the rack 202, and based on the light reception and the light blocking, Multiple pairs of rails 2 82 are detected sequentially. In the present embodiment, the portion of the rail 282 where the notch 292 is provided constitutes the detected part. The lower surface of the end of the rail 230 of the pallet 200 is inclined so as to form the guide surface 236, and the pallet 200 is stored in the rack 202. Then, as shown in FIG. 20 (b), the distal end of the rail 2332 comes off the notch 292. Therefore, even if the rail 282 is detected by the transfer sensor 312 while the pallet 200 is stored in the rack 202, the pallet 200 prevents transmission of the light emitted from the projector. Never. In order to provide the inclined guide surface 236 on the rail 232, a notch or an inclined portion provided at the tip of the rail 232 constitutes a component container holding portion detection permitting portion. The elevation control of the rail 282 based on the detection by the transfer sensor 312 will be described later.
ラック 2 0 2には、 図 7および図 1 1に示すように、 部品収容器把持装置とし てのパレッ ト把持装置 3 2 0が設けられている。 パレッ ト把持装置 3 2 0は、 ラ ック本体 2 8 0の、 複数対のレール 2 8 2の各対に対応する部分にそれぞれ設け られ、 ノ、。レッ ト 2 0 0を把持することによ'りラック 2 0 2に固定する。 ノ、。レッ ト 把持装置 3 2 0がレール 2 8 2 、 1本毎に設けられ、 1つの棚 2 8 4についてパ レツ ト把持装置 3 2 0がー対ずつ設けられていると考えてもよレ、。  As shown in FIGS. 7 and 11, the rack 202 is provided with a pallet gripping device 320 as a component container gripping device. The pallet gripping device 320 is provided at a portion of the rack body 280 corresponding to each pair of the plurality of pairs of rails 282, respectively. The rack 200 is fixed to the rack 202 by gripping the ledge 200. No ,. It can be considered that a pair of rail grippers 320 are provided for each rail 282, and a pair of palette grippers 320 are provided for one shelf 284. .
上記複数のパレット把持装置 3 2 0はそれぞれ、 図 7に示すように、 ラック本 体 2 8 0の、 ノ、。レツト搬送方向、 すなわちレール 2 8 2の長手方向に平行な方向 に隔たった 2箇所にそれぞれ、 一対ずつ設けられた第一把持部材としての第一把 持爪 3 2 2と、 第二把持部材としての第二把持爪 3 2 4とを含む。 第一把持爪 3 2 2は、 ラック本体 2 8 0の前部側 (前記搬送コンべャ 2 0 6に隣接する側であ つて、 装着装置 2 2側) に設けられ、 第二把持爪 3 2 4は後部側に設けられてい る。 2つずつの第一把持爪 3 2 2および第二把持爪 3 2 4の各一方は、 一対のレ ール 2 8 2の一方の側に設けられ、 他方は他方のレール 2 8 2側に設けられてい る。 パレツト把持装置 3 2 0の 2つの第一把持爪 3 2 2は、 部品収容平面に平行 な平面内においてパレツト搬送方向と直交する方向である左右方向に隔たって設 けられているのである。 2つの第二把持爪 3 2 4も同様である。 As shown in FIG. 7, each of the plurality of pallet gripping devices 320 is provided with a rack body 280. A pair of first gripping claws 32 2 as a first gripping member and a second gripping member provided at a pair in each of two locations separated in the let transport direction, that is, in a direction parallel to the longitudinal direction of the rail 282. And second gripping claws 3 2 4. The first gripping claw 3 222 is located on the front side of the rack body 280 (on the side adjacent to the transport conveyor 206). On the other hand, the second gripping claws 324 are provided on the rear side. One of the two first gripping claws 3 2 2 and the second gripping claw 3 2 4 is provided on one side of a pair of rails 282, and the other is provided on the other rail 282 side. Provided. The two first gripping claws 3222 of the pallet gripping device 320 are provided in a plane parallel to the component housing plane and separated in the left-right direction that is a direction orthogonal to the pallet transport direction. The same applies to the two second gripping claws 3 2 4.
図 1 2に示すように、 複数のパレツト把持装置 3 2 0の各一対ずつの第一把持 爪 3 2 2のうち、 同じレール 2 8 2側に設けられた第一把持爪 3 2 2はそれぞ れ、 共通の爪保持体 3 2 6に着脱可能に固定されており、 それぞれ、 ラック本体 2 8 0の側壁 3 2 8に設けられた開口 3 3 0 , レール形成部材 2 8 3に設けられ た開口 3 3 1を通ってラック本体 2 8 0内に進入可能とされている。 開口 3 3 0 , 3 3 1は、 複数対のレール 2 8 2の各々に対応して設けられている。 なお、 レール形成部材 2 8 3の前端部 (搬送コンペャ 2 0 6側の端部) は、 側壁 3 2 8 の前端部より前方へ突出させられている。 爪保持体 3 2 6は、 図 1 1に示すよう に、 長手形状をなし、 上下方向に隔たった 2箇所においてそれぞれ、 軸 3 3 2 (図 1 2に一方の箇所の軸 3 3 2を示す) によってラック本体 2 8 0に鉛直軸線 まわりに回動可能に取り付けられている。 また、 第一把持爪 3 2 2の先端部に は、 第一把持爪 3 2 2の回動軸線 (軸 3 3 2の軸線) に平行な中心線を有する部 分円筒面状の把持面 3 3 4が設けられている。  As shown in FIG. 12, among the pair of first gripping claws 3 2 2 of the plurality of pallet gripping devices 3 20, the first gripping claws 3 2 2 provided on the same rail 28 2 side are the same. Each of them is detachably fixed to a common claw holder 3 26, and is provided in an opening 3 30 provided in a side wall 3 28 of the rack body 2 80 and a rail forming member 2 83 respectively. The rack body 280 can enter the rack body 280 through the opening 33 1. The openings 330 and 331 are provided corresponding to each of the plurality of pairs of rails 282. The front end of the rail forming member 283 (the end on the side of the conveyor 206) is projected forward from the front end of the side wall 328. As shown in Fig. 11, the claw holder 3 26 has a longitudinal shape, and each of the two vertically spaced shafts 3 32 (Fig. 12 shows one shaft 3 32 ) Is attached to the rack body 280 so as to be rotatable around the vertical axis. The distal end of the first gripping claw 3 2 2 has a cylindrical gripping surface 3 having a center line parallel to the rotation axis of the first gripping claw 3 2 2 (the axis of the axis 3 32). 3 4 are provided.
爪保持体 3 2 6は、 図 1 1および図 1 2に示すように、 その上下方向の中間部 において、 ラック本体 2 8 0に前後方向に延びる向きに設けられたエアシリンダ 3 4 0のピストンロッ ド 3 4 2の先端部に連結されている。 爪保持体 3 2 6に上 下方向に設けられた連結軸 3 4 4が、 ビストンロッ ド 3 4 2の先端部に設けられ た長穴 3 4 6に、 長穴 3 4 6の長手方向に相対移動可能に嵌合されているのであ る。 エアシリンダ 3 6 0は、 流体圧ァクチユエータの一種である流体圧シリンダ であり、 駆動源を構成しており、 ピス トンロッド 3 4 2の伸縮により、 爪保持体 3 2 6が鉛直軸線まわりに回動させられ、 複数の第一把持爪 3 2 2が鉛直軸線ま わりに一斉に回動させられる。  As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the claw holder 326 has a piston lock of an air cylinder 340 provided in the rack body 280 at a middle portion in the vertical direction so as to extend in the front-rear direction. It is connected to the tip of the door 342. The connecting shaft 344 provided on the claw holder 326 in the upward and downward directions is opposed to the long hole 346 provided at the tip of the biston rod 342 in the longitudinal direction of the long hole 346. They are movably fitted. The air cylinder 360 is a type of fluid pressure actuator that is a type of fluid pressure actuator, and constitutes a driving source. The expansion and contraction of the piston rod 34 rotates the claw holder 3 26 around the vertical axis. The plurality of first gripping claws 3 2 2 are simultaneously rotated about a vertical axis.
ピストンロッド 3 4 2の伸長端は、 ラック本体 2 8 0に設けられたストッパ 3 5 0により規定される。 その状態では、 図 1 2に実線で示すように、 第一把持爪 3 2 2がパレット 2 0 0を把持する把持位置へ回動させられ、 把持面 3 3 4にお いて、 ノ レット 2 0 0のレール 2 3 2に設けられた係合凹部 2 4 2の係合面 2 4 6に係合し、 第二把持爪 3 2 4と共同してパレッ ト 2 0 0を把持し、 ラック 2 0 2に固定し、 ノ レッ ト 2 0 0はパレツ ト本体 2 8 0に対してもレール 2 8 2に対 しても固定される。 第一把持爪 3 2 2の係合位置ないし把持位置はストツパ 3 5 0によって規定されるのである。 ピストンロッド 3 4 2が収縮させられれば、 図 1 2に二点鎖線で示すように、 第一把持爪 3 2 2が解放位置へ回動させられ、 把 持面 3 3 4が係合凹部 2 4 2から抜け出させられてパレツト 3 2 2を解放し、 パ レッ ト 3 2 2のラック本体 2 8 0に対する固定が解かれる。 なお、 ピストンロッ ド 3 4 2の収縮端は、 例えば、 ピストンのストロークエンドにより規定される。 本実施形態においては、 爪保持体 3 2 6およびエアシリンダ 3 4 0が第一把持部 材駆動装置としての第一把持爪回動装置 3 5 2を構成し、 第一把持爪回動装置 3 5 2が複数のパレツト把持装置 3 2 0の各第一把持爪 3 2 2に共通に設けられて いる。 また、 ストッパ 3 5 0が第一把持爪 3 2 2の把持位置へ回動する側であつ て、 パレツト 2 0 0を把持する方向の回動限度を規定する回動限度規定装置を構 成してレ、 。 The extended end of the piston rod 3 4 2 is connected to the stopper 3 provided on the rack Specified by 50. In this state, as shown by a solid line in FIG. 12, the first gripping claw 32 2 is rotated to a gripping position for gripping the pallet 200, and on the gripping surface 33 4, the knurl 20 No. 2 engages with the engaging surface 2 46 of the engaging concave portion 2 42 provided on the rail 2 32 and grips the pallet 200 in cooperation with the second gripping claw 3 2 4. The knurl 200 is fixed both to the pallet body 280 and to the rail 282. The engaging position or the holding position of the first holding claw 3 222 is defined by the stopper 350. When the piston rod 3 42 is contracted, the first gripping claw 32 2 is rotated to the release position as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. The pallet 322 is released by being pulled out of the 422, and the fixing of the pallet 322 to the rack body 280 is released. The contracted end of the piston rod 342 is defined, for example, by the stroke end of the piston. In the present embodiment, the claw holder 3 26 and the air cylinder 340 constitute a first holding claw rotating device 3 52 as a first holding member driving device, and the first holding claw rotating device 3 Reference numeral 52 is provided in common for each of the first gripping claws 32 of the plurality of palette gripping devices 320. Further, a stopper is provided on the side on which the stopper 350 rotates to the gripping position of the first gripping claw 322, and the rotation limit defining device for defining the rotation limit in the direction of gripping the palette 200 is constituted. .
複数のパレツト把持装置 3 2 0の各一対ずつの第二把持爪 3 2 4のうち、 同じ レール 2 8 2側に設けられた第二把持爪 3 2 4も第一把持爪 3 2 2と同様に、 共 通の爪保持体 3 6 0に着脱可能に固定されており、 それぞれ、 ラック本体 2 8 0 の側壁 3 2 8に設けられた開口 3 6 2 , レール形成部材 2 8 3に設けられた開口 3 6 3を通ってラック本体 2 8 0内に進入可能とされている。 開口 3 6 2 , 3 6 3は、 複数対のレール 2 8 2の各々に対応して設けられている。 爪保持体 3 6 0 は、 上下方向に隔たった 2箇所においてそれぞれ、 軸 3 6 4 (図 1 2参照) によ つてラック本体 2 8 0に鉛直軸線まわりに回動可能に取り付けられるとともに、 前後方向に延びる向きに設けられたエアシリンダ 3 6 6のピス トンロッド 3 6 8 の先端部に、 連結軸 3 7 0および長穴 3 7 2 (図 1 2参照) によって相対回動可 能に連結されており、 ピストンロッド 3 6 8の伸縮によって爪保持体 3 6 0が回 動させられ、 複数の第二把持爪 3 2 4が一斉に、 かつ第一把持爪 3 2 2とは互い に独立して回動させられる。 本実施形態においては、 爪保持体 3 6 0およびエア シリンダ 3 6 6が第二把持部材駆動装置としての第二把持爪回動装置 3 7 4を構 成し、 第二把持爪駆動装置 3 7 4が複数のパレツト把持装置 3 2 0の各第二把持 爪 3 2 4に共通に設けられている。 Among the pair of second gripping claws 3 2 4 of the plurality of palette gripping devices 3 20, the second gripping nail 3 2 4 provided on the same rail 28 2 side is also the same as the first gripping nail 3 2 2 Are fixed to a common claw holder 360 in a detachable manner, and are provided in an opening 36 2 provided in a side wall 3 28 of the rack body 280 and a rail forming member 283, respectively. The rack body 280 can enter the rack body 280 through the opened opening 365. The openings 36 2 and 36 3 are provided corresponding to each of the plurality of pairs of rails 28 2. The claw holder 360 is attached to the rack body 280 at two positions vertically separated from each other by a shaft 364 (see FIG. 12) so as to be rotatable around a vertical axis. It is connected to the tip of the piston rod 3668 of the air cylinder 3666 provided in the direction extending in the direction by a connecting shaft 370 and a long hole 372 (see Fig. 12) so as to be relatively rotatable. The claw holder 360 is rotated by the expansion and contraction of the piston rod 368, and the plurality of second gripping claws 324 are simultaneously formed, and the first gripping claws 322 are mutually moved. Independently rotated. In the present embodiment, the claw holder 360 and the air cylinder 36 6 constitute a second gripping claw rotating device 374 as a second gripping member driving device, and the second gripping claw driving device 37 4 is provided in common for each of the second gripping claws 3 24 of the plurality of pallet gripping devices 320.
第二把持爪 3 2 4は、 図 1 2に示すように、 把持爪本体 3 7 6と、 把持爪本体 3 7 6に保持された板ばね 3 7 8とを含む。 板ばね 3 7 8は弾性部材としてのば ねの一種であり、 その基端部 3 8 0において把持爪本体 3 7 6に着脱可能に、 か つ板ばね 3 7 8の板面が鉛直となる姿勢で固定され、 把持爪本体 3 7 6から延ぴ 出させられた先端部が係合部 3 8 2として機能し、 係合部 3 8 2と基端部 3 8 0 との間の部分が弾性変形部 3 8 4として機能する。 係合部 3 8 2は、 本実施形態 においては、 弾性変形部 3 8 4の基端部 3 8 0側とは反対側の端部である先端部 f 第二把持爪 3 2 4の解放位置から把持位置に向かう際の回動方向とは逆向き に屈曲させられて設けられている。  As shown in FIG. 12, the second gripping claw 3 2 4 includes a gripping claw main body 3776 and a leaf spring 3778 held by the gripping claw body 3776. The leaf spring 378 is a kind of spring as an elastic member, and can be detachably attached to the gripping claw body 376 at a base end 380 thereof, and the leaf surface of the leaf spring 378 is vertical. The distal end portion fixed in the posture and extended from the gripping claw body 3776 functions as an engaging portion 3882, and a portion between the engaging portion 3882 and the base end portion 3880 is provided. It functions as the elastically deformable part 3 84. In the present embodiment, the engaging portion 382 is a distal end portion which is an end portion of the elastically deforming portion 384 opposite to the base end portion 360 side, and a release position of the second gripping claw 3 24. It is provided so as to be bent in a direction opposite to the direction of rotation when heading toward the gripping position from.
第二把持爪 3 2 4は、 エアシリンダ 3 6 6により、 図 1 2に実線で示すよう に、 係合部 3 8 2がパレット 2 0 0のレール 2 3 2に設けられた係合凹部 2 4 4 の係合面 2 4 8に係合し、 ノ、。レット 2 0 0を第一把持爪 3 2 2と共に把持してラ ック 2 0 2に固定する把持位置と、 二点鎖線で示すように、 係合凹部 2 4 4から 抜け出させられてパレツト 2 0 0を解放する解放位置とに回動させられる。 第 一, 第二把持爪 3 2 2, 3 2 4がいずれも解放位置へ回動させられることにより パレツ ト 2 0 0が解放されるとともに、 パレッ ト 2 0 0の移動を妨げず、 パレッ ト 2 0 0を搬送方向において移動させ、 ラック 2 0 2に対して出し入れすること ができる。  As shown by the solid line in FIG. 12, the second gripping claw 3 2 4 has an engagement recess 3 2 provided on the rail 2 32 of the pallet 200 as shown by a solid line in FIG. Engage with the 4 4 engagement surface 2 4 8. And the gripping position for gripping the racket 200 together with the first gripping claws 322 and fixing it to the rack 202, and as shown by the two-dot chain line, the pallet 2 It is pivoted to the release position to release 00. The pallet 200 is released by rotating the first and second gripping claws 32 2 and 3 24 to the release position, and the pallet 200 is not hindered from moving. 200 can be moved in the transport direction and can be moved in and out of the rack 202.
エアシリンダ 3 6 6が第二把持爪 3 2 4にパレツト 2 0 0を把持させる駆動力 は、 エアシリンダ 3 6 0が第一把持爪 3 2 2にパレツト 2 0 0を把持させる駆動 力より小さくされている。 したがって、 パレッ ト把持装置 3 2 0によって把持さ れた際のパレット 2 0◦の前後方向における収納位置は、 ストッパ 3 5 0によつ て規定される。 把持位置へ回動させられた第一把持爪 3 2 2により規定されるの である。 パレツト 2 0 0が第一把持爪 3 2 2によって規定される収納位置より前 側に位置するのであれば、 第一把持爪 3 2 2は、 把持位置へ回動させられると き、 係合面 2 4 6に係合してパレツト 2 0 0を後退させ、 収納位置に位置させ る。 The driving force for the air cylinder 366 to grip the pallet 200 with the second gripping claw 3 2 4 is smaller than the driving force for the air cylinder 365 to grip the pallet 200 with the first gripping claw 32 2. Have been. Therefore, the storage position of the pallet 20 ° in the front-rear direction when gripped by the pallet gripping device 320 is defined by the stopper 350. This is defined by the first gripping claw 3 222 rotated to the gripping position. If the palette 200 is located on the front side of the storage position defined by the first gripping claws 32, the first gripping claws 32 are turned to the gripping position. At this time, the pallet 200 is engaged with the engagement surface 246, and the pallet 200 is retracted to the storage position.
第二把持爪 3 2 4は、 エアシリンダ 3 6 6によって回動させられることによ り、 係合部 3 8 2がパレット 2 0 0の係合凹部 2 4 4の係合面 2 4 8に係合し、 ノ レット 2 0 0を第一把持爪 3 2 4に押し付ける。 第二把持爪 3 2 4はエアシリ ンダ 3 6 6に設定された所定の駆動力が得られるまで回動させられる。 その際、 弾性変形部 3 8 4は、 係合部 3 8 2が係合面 2 4 8に接触した後に弾性変形し、 その弾性変形の復元力に基づいて係合部 3 8 2を係合面 2 4 8に係合し続けさせ る。 パレット 2 0 0等の寸法のばらつき等は、 弾性変形部 3 8 4の弾性変形によ り吸収さ る。 このように第二把持爪 3 2 4は係合面 2 4 8に弾性的に係合させ られ、 同じレール 2 8 2側に設けられた第一把持爪 3 2 2と共同してパレツト 2 0 0を確実に把持するのであり、 それによりパレツト 2 0 0の前後方向の移動を 阻止するとともに、 第一, 第二把持爪 3 2 2, 3 2 4と係合面 2 4 4 , 2 4 8と の間に生じる摩擦力により、 パレット 2 0 0の上下方向 (部品収容平面に直角な 方向) およぴ左右方向の移動を阻止し、 ラック昇降時におけるパレツト 2 0 0の 振動を抑制する。 このようにパレツト 2 0 0は、 部品収容平面に平行な平面内に おいて互いに隔たった 4箇所において第一, 第二把持爪 3 2 2, 3 2 4が係合す ることにより、 左右方向に互いに隔たった 2部分をそれぞれ第一把持爪 3 2 2と 第二把持爪 3 2 4とにより把持されるのであり、 ラック 2 0 2に強固に固定さ れ、 振動が良好に抑制される。  The second gripping claw 3 2 4 is rotated by the air cylinder 3 6 6 so that the engaging portion 3 8 2 is brought into contact with the engaging surface 2 4 8 of the engaging recess 2 4 4 of the pallet 200. Engage and press the knurl 200 against the first gripping claw 3 2 4. The second gripping pawls 324 are rotated until a predetermined driving force set in the air cylinder 366 is obtained. At that time, the elastically deforming portion 384 elastically deforms after the engaging portion 382 contacts the engaging surface 248, and engages the engaging portion 382 based on the restoring force of the elastic deformation. Continue engaging surface 248. Variations in the dimensions of the pallet 200 and the like are absorbed by the elastic deformation of the elastic deformation portion 384. In this way, the second gripping claw 3 2 4 is elastically engaged with the engaging surface 2 48, and cooperates with the first gripping claw 3 22 provided on the same rail 28 2 side as the pallet 20. This ensures that the pallet 200 does not move in the front-rear direction, and that the first and second gripping claws 3 2 2, 3 2 4 and the engaging surfaces 2 4 4, 2 4 8 The frictional force generated between and prevents the pallet 200 from moving in the vertical direction (the direction perpendicular to the component storage plane) and in the horizontal direction, and suppresses the vibration of the pallet 200 when the rack moves up and down. As described above, the palette 200 can be moved in the left-right direction by engaging the first and second gripping claws 32 2 and 32 4 at four places separated from each other in a plane parallel to the component housing plane. The two parts separated from each other are gripped by the first gripping claws 32 2 and the second gripping claws 3 24, respectively, and are firmly fixed to the rack 202, and the vibration is favorably suppressed.
また、 第一把持爪 3 2 2の把持面 3 3 6は、 部分円筒面状とされているため、 パレット 2 0 0の把持面 3 3 6に係合する部分の左右方向におけるずれが小さく て済む。  Further, since the gripping surface 336 of the first gripping claw 3222 is formed in a partially cylindrical shape, the displacement of the portion engaging with the gripping surface 3336 of the pallet 200 in the left-right direction is small. I'm done.
搬送コンべャ 2 0 6を説明する。  The transfer conveyor 206 will be described.
搬送コンペャ 2 0 6は、 図 5およぴ図 1 3に示すように、 前記台車 2 1 0およ び前記フレーム 3 0 0から前方へ突出して設けられている。 搬送コンペャ 2 0 6 は、 本実施形態においては、 ベルトコンべャとされており、 無端搬送部材として の一対のコンペャベルト 4 0 4, 4 0 6と、 周回駆動装置 4 0 8と、 保持具 4 1 0とを含んでいる。 コンペャベルト 4 0 4 , 4 0 6はゴム製であり、 本実施形態 においては、 外周面に多数の歯 4 1 2 (図 1 4 (b)参照) を備えたタイミングべ ルトとされている。 As shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 13, the transfer conveyor 206 is provided so as to protrude forward from the carriage 210 and the frame 300. In the present embodiment, the transport conveyor 206 is a belt conveyor, and includes a pair of conveyor belts 404 and 406 as endless transport members, a circulating drive device 408, and a holder 41. Contains 0. The conveyor belts 4 0 4 and 4 0 6 are made of rubber, and Is a timing belt having a large number of teeth 4 12 (see FIG. 14 (b)) on the outer peripheral surface.
周回駆動装置 4 0 8は、 図 1 3ないし図 1 5 (a)に示すように、 前記台車 2 1 0および前記フレーム 3 0 0から前方へ延び出して設けられた一対の支持部材 4 1 6 , 4 1 8に設けられている。 これら支持部材 4 1 6, 4 1 8は板状を成し、 部品収容平面に平行な平面内においてパレツト搬送方向に直角な方向に距離を隔 てて設けられ、 その互いに対向する鉛直な側面にはそれぞれ、 コンペャベルト 4 0 4 , 4 0 6が巻き掛けられる複数のガイドプーリ 4 2 0と、 コンペャベルト 4 0 4の歯 4 1 2と嚙み合う複数のタイミングプーリ 4 2 2とがパレット搬送方向 に直角な水平軸線まわりに回転可能に取り付けられている。  As shown in FIG. 13 to FIG. 15 (a), the orbiting drive device 4 08 includes a pair of support members 4 16 extending forward from the carriage 210 and the frame 300. , 4 18. These support members 4 16 and 4 18 are formed in a plate shape and are provided at a distance in a direction perpendicular to the pallet transport direction in a plane parallel to the component receiving plane, and are provided on the vertical side surfaces facing each other. In the pallet transport direction, a plurality of guide pulleys 420 around which the conveyor belts 404 and 406 are wound, and a plurality of timing pulleys 422 meshing with the teeth 412 of the conveyor belt 404, respectively. It is mounted rotatably about a horizontal horizontal axis.
コンべャベルト 4 0 4 , 4 0 6は、 ガイドプーリ 4 2 0には、 その平坦な内周 面において卷き掛けられ、 タイミングプーリ 4 2 2には外周面側が巻き掛けら れ、 歯 4 1 2がタイミングプーリ 4 2 2の歯と嚙み合わされている。 但し、 ガイ ドプーリ 4 2 0のうちの一つはテンションプーリとされ、 コンべャベルト 4 0 4 , 4 0 6を外周面側から支持している。  The conveyor belts 404 and 406 are wound around the guide pulley 420 on a flat inner peripheral surface, the timing pulley 422 is wound around the outer peripheral surface, and the teeth 41 are provided. 2 is meshed with the teeth of the timing pulley 4 2 2. However, one of the guide pulleys 420 is a tension pulley, and supports the conveyor belts 404 and 406 from the outer peripheral surface side.
複数のガイドプーリ 4 2 0およびタイミングプーリ 4 2 2によりコンペャベル ト 4 0 4, 4 0 6の周回経路が設定され、 コンペャベルト 4 0 4, 4 0 6には、 ラック 2 0 2から前記配線板コンペャ 1 6に至る水平な搬送部ないし支持部 4 2 4が設けられ、 その上面がパレット搬送面ないし支持面 4 2 6を構成している。 支持面 4 2 6は、 支持部 4 2 4に含まれる複数の歯 4 1 2の各上面の集合により 構成されている。 なお、 コンべャベルト 4 0 4 , 4 0 6は、 搬送コンペャ 2 0 6 の左右方向 (水平面内においてパレッ ト搬送方向と直角な方向) において、 一対 のレール 2 8 2と一致する位置に設けられている。 搬送コンペャ 2 0 6はラック 2 0 2に隣接して設けられており、 コンペャベルト 4 0 4 , 4 0 6の周回経路 は、 支持部 4 2 4のラック 2 0 2に隣接する端部と、 レール 2 8 2との間の距離 が短く、 両者が近接して位置するように設けられている。  A plurality of guide pulleys 420 and timing pulleys 42 2 establish a circulating path for the conveyors 404, 406, and the conveyor belts 404, 406 include racks 202 from the wiring board conveyor. A horizontal transfer section or support section 4 24 extending to 16 is provided, and the upper surface thereof constitutes a pallet transfer face or support face 4 26. The support surface 4 26 is constituted by a set of upper surfaces of a plurality of teeth 4 12 included in the support portion 4 24. Note that the conveyor belts 404 and 406 are provided at positions corresponding to the pair of rails 282 in the left-right direction of the transfer conveyor 206 (direction perpendicular to the pallet transfer direction in the horizontal plane). ing. The transfer conveyor 206 is provided adjacent to the rack 202, and the circulating path of the conveyor belts 404, 406 includes an end portion of the support portion 424 adjacent to the rack 202, and a rail. The distance between them is short so that they are located close to each other.
支持部材 4 1 6 , 4 1 8にはまた、 支持部 4 2 4の周回経路に対応する部分に それぞれ、 複数のガイドプーリ 4 2 8がガイドプーリ 4 2 0等と平行な軸線まわ りに回転可能に、 かつパレッ ト搬送方向に並んで設けられており、 支持部 4 2 4 の平坦な内周面を支持している。 複数のガイドプーリ 4 2 8がベルト支持部材を 構成している。 なお、 ガイドプーリ 4 2 0, 4 2 8, タイミングプーリ 4 2 2に はそれぞれ、 回転軸線に平行な方向に隔たった両端部の各々から、 回転軸線と直 交する方向に延ぴ出す規制部が設けられ、 コンペャベルト 4 0 4 , 4 0 6を幅方 向の両側から挟み、 幅方向のずれを規制するようにされている。 The support members 4 16 and 4 18 also have a plurality of guide pulleys 4 28 rotating around the axis parallel to the guide pulleys 4 20 etc. at portions corresponding to the orbital path of the support portion 4 24 respectively. As possible and arranged side by side in the pallet transport direction. The flat inner peripheral surface is supported. The plurality of guide pulleys 428 constitute a belt support member. Each of the guide pulleys 420, 428, and the timing pulley 422 has a restricting portion extending from each end separated in a direction parallel to the rotation axis in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. The conveyor belts 404 and 406 are sandwiched from both sides in the width direction so as to restrict displacement in the width direction.
支持部材 4 1 6に取り付けられた複数のタイミングプーリ 4 2 2のうちの一つ が回転駆動装置 4 3 2によって回転させられることにより、 一対のコンペャベル ト 4 0 4 , 4 0 6が同時に同方向に、 予め定められた周回経路に沿って周回させ られる。 回転駆動装置 4 3 2は、 図 1 3に示すように、 支持部材 4 1 6, 4 1 8 により保持された支持部材 4 3 3に設けられたベルト駆動モータ 4 3 4を駆動源 とし、 その回転がタイミングプーリ 4 3 6, 4 3 8およびタイミングベルト 4 3 9を含む回転伝達装置により、 コンペャベルト 4 0 4を駆動するタイミングプ一 リ 4 2 2に伝達され、 回転軸 4 4 0によってコンべャベルト 4 0 6を駆動するタ ィミングプ一リ 4 2 2に伝達され、 コンべャベルト 4 0 4 , 4 0 6が同期して周 回させら る。  One of the plurality of timing pulleys 4 2 2 attached to the support member 4 16 is rotated by the rotary driving device 4 32 so that a pair of conveyors 4 0 4 and 4 6 are simultaneously in the same direction. Then, it is made to orbit along a predetermined orbit. As shown in FIG. 13, the rotary drive device 432 uses a belt drive motor 434 provided on the support member 433 held by the support members 416 and 418 as a drive source. The rotation is transmitted to a timing pulley 422 that drives a conveyor belt 404 by a rotation transmission device including timing pulleys 436, 438 and a timing belt 439, and the rotation is transmitted by a rotation shaft 4440. It is transmitted to a timing pulley 422 for driving the conveyor belts 406, and the conveyor belts 404, 406 are rotated in synchronization.
保持具 4 1 0を説明する。  The holder 4 10 will be described.
保持具 4 1 0は、 図 1 3およぴ図 1 5 (a)に示すように、 一対のコンペャベル ト 4 0 4 , 4 0 6により位置を固定して保持された移動部材 4 4 6に設けられて いる。 移動部材 4 4 6は長手形状をなし、 その長手方向の両端部がそれぞれ、 コ ンべャベルト 4 0 4, 4 0 6のそれぞれ、 前記支持部 4 2 4を構成する部分に着 脱可能に固定されている。 したがって、 コンべャベルト 4 0 4, 4 0 6が周回さ せられれば、 移動部材 4 4 6はコンペャベルト 4 0 4 , 4 0 6と一体的に移動さ せられ、 移動部材 4 4 6に設けられた保持具 4 1 0がコンペャベルト 4 0 4, 4 0 6と同じ速度で移動させられる。 なお、 コンべャベルト 4◦ 4 , 4 0 6の支持 部 4 2 4を支持する前記ガイドプーリ 4 2 8は、 コンべャベルト 4 0 4 , 4 0 6 と移動部材 4 4 6との結合部との干渉を回避するために、 回転軸線に平行な方向 の中央部に、 外周面に開口する円環状の溝が形成された溝付プーリとされてい る。  As shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 15 (a), the retainer 410 is attached to a moving member 444 held in a fixed position by a pair of conveyors 404, 406. It is provided. The moving member 446 has a longitudinal shape, and its both ends in the longitudinal direction are detachably fixed to the conveyor belts 404 and 406, respectively, to the portions constituting the support portion 424. Have been. Therefore, if the conveyor belts 404, 406 are rotated, the moving member 446 is moved integrally with the conveyor belts 404, 406, and is provided on the moving member 446. The holder 410 is moved at the same speed as the conveyor belts 404, 406. In addition, the guide pulley 428 supporting the support portions 424 of the conveyor belts 4◦4, 406 is provided with a connecting portion between the conveyor belts 404, 406 and the moving member 444. In order to avoid interference, a grooved pulley having an annular groove formed in the outer peripheral surface is formed at the center in a direction parallel to the rotation axis.
移動部材 4 4 6の移動は、 図 1 5 (a)に示す案内装置 4 4 8により案内され る。 案内装置 4 4 8は、 移動部材 4 4 6の長手方向の両端部にそれぞれ回転可能 に取り付けられた一対のガイドローラ 4 5 0と、 一対の支持部材 4 1 6 , 4 1 8 にそれぞれ設けられたガイドレール 4 5 2とを含む。 一対のガイドローラ 4 5 0 はガイドレール 4 5 2を挟んで移動し、 移動部材 4 4 6の移動を案内する。 移動部材 4 4 6の長手方向の中央部に、 図 1 3に示すように、 前記保持具 4 1 0が設けられ、 前記パレット 2 0 0に設けられた取手 2 6 6を保持するようにさ れている。 保持具 4 1 0は、 図 1 5 (a)に示すように一対のチャック 4 5 8を有 する。 これらチャック 4 5 8は、 搬送コンペャ 2 0 6の左右方向に距離を隔てて 設けられており、 図 1 6に示すように、 それぞれ一対の把持爪 4 6 0 , 4 6 2を 有している。 これら把持爪 4 6 0 , 4 6 2は、 チャック本体 4 6 4にパレット搬 送方向に平行な方向に開閉可能であって、 互いに接近, 離間可能に設けられてお り、 図 1 6 (e)に示すように、 互いに対向する面にそれぞれ、 搬送コンペャ 2 0 6の左右方向に延びる位置決め部としての位置決め凹部 4 6 6 , 4 6 8が設けら れている。 The movement of the moving member 446 is guided by the guiding device 448 shown in FIG. You. The guide devices 448 are provided on a pair of guide rollers 450, which are rotatably attached to both ends of the moving member 446 in the longitudinal direction, respectively, and on a pair of support members 416, 418. Guide rails 45 2. The pair of guide rollers 450 move across the guide rails 452 and guide the movement of the moving member 446. As shown in FIG. 13, the holding member 410 is provided at a central portion in the longitudinal direction of the moving member 446 so that the handle 266 provided on the pallet 200 is held. Have been. The holder 410 has a pair of chucks 458 as shown in FIG. 15 (a). These chucks 458 are provided at a distance in the left-right direction of the conveyor 206, and have a pair of gripping claws 460, 462, respectively, as shown in FIG. . These gripping claws 460 and 462 can be opened and closed in a direction parallel to the pallet carrying direction on the chuck body 646, and are provided so that they can approach and separate from each other. As shown in (), positioning recesses 466, 468 as positioning portions extending in the left-right direction of the transport conveyor 206 are provided on the surfaces facing each other.
チヤック本体 4 6 4内には、 被駆動部材ないし入力部材としてのプランジャ 4 The chuck body 4 6 has a plunger 4 as a driven member or an input member.
7 0が上下方向に移動可能に設けられるとともに、 プランジャ 4 7 0の昇降を把 持爪 4 6 0 , 4 6 2の互いに接近, 離間する方向の移動に変換する運動変換装置 (図示省略) が設けられており、 プランジャ 4 7 0が昇降させられることによ り、 把持爪 4 6 0, 4 6 2が接近, 離間させられて取手 2 6 6を把持する把持位 置と解放する解放位置とに移動させられ、 チャック 4 5 8が開閉させられる。 プ ランジャ 4 7 0は、 そのチャック本体 4 6 4から突出させられた下端部とチヤッ ク本体 4 6 4との間に配設された付勢手段の一種である弾性部材としての圧縮コ ィルスプリング 4 7 2により下方へ付勢されている。 70 is provided so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a motion conversion device (not shown) for converting the elevation of the plunger 470 into a movement in which the gripping claws 460 and 462 approach and separate from each other is provided. When the plunger 470 is raised and lowered, the gripping claws 460 and 462 are approached and separated from each other, and a gripping position for gripping the handle 266 and a release position for releasing. And the chuck 458 is opened and closed. The plunger 470 is a compression coil as an elastic member which is a kind of urging means disposed between a lower end protruding from the chuck body 464 and the chuck body 464. It is urged downward by a spring 4 72.
また、 図 1 3に示すように、 搬送コンペャ 2 0 6の後部、 すなわちラック 2 0 2に隣接する部分には、 チャック駆動装置 4 7 4が設けられている。 前記支持部 材 4 3 3の長手方向の中央にチャック駆動装置 4 7 4が位置を固定して設けられ ているのであり、 チャック駆動装置 4 7 4は、 図 1 5 (a)に示すように、 エアシ リンダ 4 7 8を駆動 ¾Τ、として備えている。 エアシリンダ 4 7 8は上向きに設けら れ、 ピストンロッド 4 8 0の昇降により、 その突出端部に設けられた駆動部材 4 8 2が昇降させられ、 上昇により一対の駆動部 4 8 4が前記一対のチャック 4 5 8の各プランジャ 4 7 0をスプリング 4 7 2の付勢力に抗して押し上げ、 下降に よりプランジャ 4 7 0を解放してスプリング 4 7 2の付勢により下降することを 許容する。 Further, as shown in FIG. 13, a chuck driving device 474 is provided at a rear portion of the transfer conveyor 206, that is, at a portion adjacent to the rack 202. A chuck driving device 474 is fixedly provided at the center in the longitudinal direction of the support member 433, and the chuck driving device 474 is provided as shown in FIG. The air cylinder 4778 is driven. The air cylinder 478 is provided upward, and the drive member 4 As a result, the pair of driving portions 4 8 4 push up the respective plungers 4 70 of the pair of chucks 4 8 8 against the urging force of the spring 4 7 2. Release 0 and allow it to descend by the bias of the spring 4 7 2.
プランジャ 4 7 0は、 駆動部材 4 8 2が下降させられ、 プランジャ 4 7 0から 離間させられた状態では、 スプリング 4 7 2の付勢により下降端位置に位置し、 図 1 6 (a) , (c)に示すように、 取手 2 6 6を把持するのでなければ、 把持爪 4 6 0, 4 6 2は最も閉じられた位置に位置する。 取手 2 6 6を把持する際には、 把 持爪 4 6 0, 4 6 2はスプリング 4 7 2の付勢に基づいて取手 2 6 6を把持した 状態に保たれる。 駆動部材 4 8 2がエアシリンダ 4 7 8によって上昇させられ、 プランジャ 4 7 0をスプリング 4 7 2の付勢力に抗して上昇させれば、 図 1 6 (e)に示すように、 把持爪 4 6 0, 4 6 2が開かれ、 解放位置へ移動させられ る。 最も開かれた状態での把持爪 4 6 0 , 4 6 2間の距離は、 ノ レツト 2 0 0の 前記取手 2 6 6の握り部 2 6 8の外径より大きく、 握り部 2 6 8が把持爪 4 6 0 , 4 6 2と干渉することなく、 それらの間に進入し、 退避することができる。 上記のように構成された保持具 4 1 0は、 後述するように、 一対のチャック 4 5 8によつて前記パレッ ト 2 0 0の取手 2 6 6を保持し、 移動部材 4 4 6が搬送 コンペャ 2 0 6によって移動させられることによりパレツト 2 0 0を移動させる のであるが、 このパレッ ト 2 0 0の移動が前記パレット案内装置 (以後、 案内装 置と略称する) 2 0 8により案内される。 案内装置 2 0 8は、 図 1 3に示すよう に、 固定案内部材としての固定レール 4 9 0および可動案内部材としての可動レ 一ノレ 4 9 2を備えている。  The plunger 470 is located at the lower end position by the urging of the spring 472 when the driving member 482 is lowered and is separated from the plunger 470, and FIG. As shown in (c), unless the handle 266 is gripped, the gripping claws 460 and 462 are located at the most closed positions. When gripping the handle 266, the gripping claws 460, 462 are held in a state of gripping the handle 266 based on the bias of the spring 472. When the driving member 482 is raised by the air cylinder 478 and the plunger 470 is raised against the urging force of the spring 472, the gripping claw is obtained as shown in FIG. 16 (e). 460, 462 is opened and moved to the release position. The distance between the gripping claws 4 6 0 and 4 6 2 in the most opened state is larger than the outer diameter of the grip 2 6 8 of the handle 2 6 6 of the knob 2 0 0, and the grip 2 6 8 The claws can enter and retreat without interfering with the claws 460 and 462. The holding tool 410 configured as described above holds the handle 26 of the pallet 200 by a pair of chucks 458, as will be described later, and the moving member 446 is transported. The pallet 200 is moved by being moved by the conveyor 206, and the movement of the pallet 200 is guided by the pallet guide device (hereinafter abbreviated as a guide device) 208. You. As shown in FIG. 13, the guide device 208 includes a fixed rail 490 as a fixed guide member and a movable rail 492 as a movable guide member.
固定レール 4 9 0は板状をなし、 図 1 5 (a)に示すように、 前記支持部材 4 1 8の上面にパレット搬送方向に平行に固定されている。 固定レール 4 9 0は、 そ の案内面ないし規制面がレール形成部材 2 8 3のレール 2 8 2が設けられた面と 同一鉛直面内に位置するように設けられている。 可動レール 4 9 2は、 図 1 7な いし図 1 9に示すように板状をなし、 支持部材 4 1 6の上面上に着脱可能に固定 されたレール保持部材 4 9 4により、 パレツト搬送方向と直角な水平方向に移動 可能であって、 固定レール 4 9 0に接近, 離間可能に保持されている。 レール保持部材 4 9 4は、 長手形状の板状をなし、 パレツト搬送方向に平行に 固定され、 可動レール 4 9 2は、 パレッ ト搬送方向に平行に配設されるととも に、 レール保持部材 4 9 4に立設された押さえ部材ないし浮き上がり部材 4 9 6 によって浮き上がりを防止されている。 図 1 8に示すように、 浮き上がり防止部 材 4 9 6は軸部 4 9 8において、 可動レール 4 9 2に設けられた長穴 5 0 0に嵌 合されるとともに、 固定装置としてのポルト 5 0 2によってレール保持部材 4 9 4に固定されており、 軸部 4 9 8より大径の頭部 5 0 4により、 可動レール 4 9 2のレール保持部材 4 9 4からの浮き上がりを防止する。 The fixed rail 490 has a plate shape, and is fixed to the upper surface of the support member 418 in parallel to the pallet transport direction, as shown in FIG. The fixed rail 490 is provided such that its guide surface or regulating surface is located in the same vertical plane as the surface on which the rail 282 of the rail forming member 283 is provided. The movable rail 492 has a plate-like shape as shown in Fig. 17 or Fig. 19, and a pallet transport direction is provided by a rail holding member 494 which is detachably fixed on the upper surface of the support member 416. It can be moved in the horizontal direction perpendicular to, and is held so that it can approach and separate from the fixed rail 490. The rail holding member 494 has a long plate shape and is fixed in parallel to the pallet transport direction.The movable rail 492 is arranged in parallel to the pallet transport direction, and the rail holding member Lifting is prevented by a holding member or a rising member 496 standing upright at 494. As shown in FIG. 18, the lifting prevention member 496 is fitted into the elongated hole 500 provided in the movable rail 492 at the shaft portion 498, and the port 5 as a fixing device is provided. The movable rail 492 is prevented from rising from the rail holding member 494 by a head 504 having a diameter larger than that of the shaft portion 498.
可動レール 4 9 2は、 レール保持部材 4 9 4内に配設された付勢装置の一種で ある弾性部材としての複数の圧縮コイルスプリング 5 1 0によって固定レール 4 9 0に接近する向きに付勢されている。 このスプリング 5 1 0の付勢による可動 レール 4 9 2の移動限度は、 前記長穴 5 0 0の長手方向の端面が浮き上がり防止 部材 4 9 6の軸部 4 9 8に係合することにより規制される。 浮き上がり防止部材 4 9 6は、 可動レール移動規制装置をも構成している。  The movable rail 492 is attached in a direction approaching the fixed rail 490 by a plurality of compression coil springs 510 serving as an elastic member which is a kind of a biasing device disposed in the rail holding member 494. It is being rushed. The movement limit of the movable rail 492 by the bias of the spring 510 is regulated by engaging the longitudinal end face of the elongated hole 509 with the shaft portion 498 of the lifting prevention member 496. Is done. The lifting prevention member 496 also constitutes a movable rail movement restricting device.
固定レール 4 9 0および可動レール 4 9 2は、 本実施形態においては、 可撓性 材料としての合成樹脂の一種であって、 金属より摩擦係数が低く、 低摩擦材料た る低摩擦性の合成樹脂の一種であるポリアセタールによって作られている。 固定 レール 4 9 0は支持部材 4 1 8にパレット搬送方向に平行に真っ直ぐに固定され ているが、 可動レール 4 9 2は固定レール 4 9 0に接近, 離間可能とされてお り、 その長手方向と交差する方向であって、 パレッ ト搬送面と平行な水平面内に おいてパレツ ト搬送方向と交差する方向に撓むことができる。  In the present embodiment, the fixed rail 490 and the movable rail 492 are a kind of synthetic resin as a flexible material, and have a lower friction coefficient than metal and a low friction material as a low friction material. It is made of polyacetal, a type of resin. The fixed rail 490 is fixed straight to the support member 418 in parallel to the pallet conveyance direction, but the movable rail 492 can approach and separate from the fixed rail 490, and its length It can bend in a direction that intersects the direction and intersects the pallet transport direction in a horizontal plane parallel to the pallet transport surface.
本電子回路部品装着機 1 0は、 図 2 1に示す制御装置 5 3 0を備えている。 制 御装置 5 3 0は、 C P U 5 3 2 , R OM 5 3 4 , R AM 5 3 6およびそれらを接 続するバス 5 3 8を備えるコンピュータ 5 4 0を主体として構成されている。 バ ス 5 3 8には、 さらに、 入出力インタフェース 5 4 2が接続されており、 駆動回 路 5 4 4を介して X軸スライド駆動用モータ 7 0 , Y軸スライド駆動用モータ 8 6 , へッド昇降モータ 1 2 0, へッド回転モータ 1 3 0 , ラック昇降モータ 3 0 2などが接続されている。 制御装置 5 3 0には、 画像処理コンピュータ 5 4 6を 介して基準マークカメラ 1 5 2および部品カメラ 1 8 2が接続されている。 制御 装置 5 3 0には、 さらに、 キーボード等の入力装置 5 4 8およぴトレイ高さ確認 センサ 5 5 0, 乗り移りセンサ 3 1 2等の各種センサが接続されている。 トレイ 高さ確認センサ 5 5 0については後述する。 The electronic circuit component mounting machine 10 includes a control device 530 shown in FIG. The control device 530 is mainly composed of a computer 540 having a CPU 532, a ROM 534, a RAM 536 and a bus 538 for connecting them. An input / output interface 542 is further connected to the bus 538, and is connected to an X-axis slide drive motor 70 and a Y-axis slide drive motor 86 via a drive circuit 544. A head elevating motor 120, a head rotating motor 130, a rack elevating motor 302 and the like are connected. The reference mark camera 152 and the component camera 182 are connected to the control device 5330 via an image processing computer 546. control Further, an input device 548 such as a keyboard and various sensors such as a tray height confirmation sensor 550 and a transfer sensor 312 are connected to the device 530. The tray height confirmation sensor 550 will be described later.
なお、 駆動源たる X軸スライ ド駆動用モータ 7 0等は、 サーボモータにより構 成され、 その累積回転角 (回転位置) がエンコーダにより検出されてコンビユー タ 5 4 0に入力される。 図 2 1には、 ヘッド回転モータ 1 3 0に設けられたェン コーダ 5 5 6を代表的に示す。 サーボモータは回転角度の精度の良い制御が可能 な電動モータであり、 本実施形態ではエンコーダ付きとされている。 これらサー ポモータを駆動源とする X軸スライド駆動用モータ 7 0等は、 精度良く移動させ られる。 サーボモータに代えてステップモータを用いてもよい。 また、 R OM 5 3 4または R AM 5 3 6には、 図示は省略するが、 メイン —チン, 電子回路部 品装着プログラム, トレィ型部品供給装置 2 6に回路部品 2 0を供給させるプロ グラム, ラック昇降装置 2 0 4の作動位置およぴ停止位置を取得するプログラ ム, トレイ 5 0の高さを検出するプログラム, 装着ヘッド 6 0の下降を制御する プログラム等を始めとする種々のプログラムおよびそれらプログラムの実行等に 必要なデータ等が記憶させられている。  The X-axis slide drive motor 70 or the like as a drive source is constituted by a servomotor, and its accumulated rotation angle (rotational position) is detected by an encoder and input to the combi- ter 540. FIG. 21 representatively shows an encoder 556 provided in the head rotation motor 130. The servomotor is an electric motor capable of controlling the rotation angle with high accuracy, and is provided with an encoder in the present embodiment. The X-axis slide drive motor 70 and the like using these servomotors as drive sources can be moved with high accuracy. A step motor may be used instead of the servo motor. In addition, although not shown, the ROM 534 or RAM 536 has a main chin, an electronic circuit component mounting program, and a program for supplying the circuit component 20 to the tray-type component supply device 26. , A program for acquiring the operating position and the stopping position of the rack elevating device 204, a program for detecting the height of the tray 50, a program for controlling the lowering of the mounting head 60, and various other programs. And data necessary for executing the programs and the like are stored.
次に作動を説明する。 回路部品 2 0をプリント配線板 1 4に装着する装着作業 は、 前記特許第 2 8 2 4 3 7 8号公報、 および特開 2 0 0 1— 2 2 3 5 0 0号公 報等に記載されているため、 全体の説明は簡略にし、 本発明に関連の深い部分を 詳細に説明する。  Next, the operation will be described. The mounting work for mounting the circuit component 20 on the printed wiring board 14 is described in the above-mentioned Japanese Patent No. 2824378, Japanese Patent Publication No. 2000-1250250, and the like. Therefore, the entire description will be simplified, and the details that are relevant to the present invention will be described in detail.
プリント配線板 1 4が図示しない搬入装置により搬入され、 配線板コンペャ 1 6により回路部品 2 0が装着される装着位置まで搬送されれば、 配線板保持装置 1 8により位置決めされ、 装着面 2 8が水平となる姿勢で保持される。 Χ Υ移動 装置 9 6により部品装着ュニット 1 0 8とともに基準マークカメラ 1 5 2が、 プ リント配線板 1 4に設けられた基準マーク 1 5 0を撮像する基準マーク撮像位置 に位置決めされ、 2個の基準マーク 1 5 0がそれぞれ撮像される。  If the printed wiring board 14 is carried in by a carry-in device (not shown) and is conveyed to a mounting position where the circuit component 20 is mounted by the wiring board conveyor 16, the printed wiring board 14 is positioned by the wiring board holding device 18 and the mounting surface 2 8 Is held in a horizontal position. Χ Υ The reference mark camera 15 2 together with the component mounting unit 108 by the moving device 96 is positioned at the reference mark imaging position where the reference mark 150 provided on the printed wiring board 14 is imaged. Are captured respectively.
次に、 装着へッド 6 0は、 X軸スライド 6 6および Υ軸スライド 8 2の移動に よりフィーダ型部品供給装置 2 4またはトレイ型部品供給装置 2 6の部品取出位 置へ移動させられる。 そして、 装着ヘッド 6 0はヘッド昇降装置 1 0 4により昇 降させられ、 吸着ノズル 1 1 4に負圧が供給されることにより回路部品 2 0が保 持される。 Next, the mounting head 60 is moved to the component removal position of the feeder type component supply device 24 or the tray type component supply device 26 by moving the X axis slide 66 and the ス ラ イ ド axis slide 82. . The mounting head 60 is lifted by the head lifting device 104. The circuit component 20 is held by the negative pressure being supplied to the suction nozzles 114.
回路部品 2 0を保持した装着ヘッド 6◦は、 例えば、 トレィ型部品供給装置 2 6の部品取出許容位置へ移動させられたパレツト 2 0 0から回路部品 2 0を受け 取る部品受取位置から、 プリント配線板 1 4に回路部品 2 0を装着する部品装着 位置へ移動させられるのであるが、 この際、 X軸スライド 6 6の部品受取位置と 部品装着位置との間の位置に設けられた部品撮像システムにより回路部品 2 0が 撮像される。 回路部品 2 0の回転位置が吸着時と装着時とで異なる場合には、 吸 着後、 部品保持位置検出位置に到達するまでの間に装着へッド 6 0がへッド回転 装置 1 0 6により回転させられ、 回路部品 2 0が回転させられて装着時の回転位 置に変更され、 装着ヘッド 6 0が部品保持位置検出位置に到達すれば、 回路部品 2 0が撮像される。  The mounting head 6 holding the circuit component 20 is printed, for example, from the component receiving position for receiving the circuit component 20 from the pallet 200 moved to the component removal allowable position of the tray-type component supply device 26. The component is moved to the component mounting position where the circuit component 20 is mounted on the wiring board 14. At this time, the component imaging provided at a position between the component receiving position and the component mounting position of the X-axis slide 66 is performed. The circuit component 20 is imaged by the system. If the rotational position of the circuit component 20 is different between the suction position and the mounting position, after mounting, the mounting head 60 rotates the head rotating device 10 before reaching the component holding position detection position. 6, the circuit component 20 is rotated to change the rotation position to the mounting position, and when the mounting head 60 reaches the component holding position detection position, the circuit component 20 is imaged.
撮像により得られた像のデータは画像処理コンピュータ 5 4 6により処理さ れ、 保持位置誤差のない正規の像のデータと比較され、 中心位置誤差 (水平位置 誤差) Δ Χ Ε, Δ Υ Εおよび回転位置誤差 Δ Θが算出される。  The image data obtained by the imaging is processed by the image processing computer 546 and compared with the normal image data without the holding position error, and the center position error (horizontal position error) Δ Χ Ε, Δ Υ Ε and The rotational position error ΔΘ is calculated.
また、 前述のように、 プリント配線板 1 4の部品装着箇所の中心位置誤差厶 X Ρ , Δ Υ Ρ がプリント配線板 1 4に設けられた基準マーク 1 5 0を予め基準マ ークカメラ 1 5 2によって撮像することにより算出されており、 部品装着位置へ 移動するまでの間に、 これら誤差 Δ Χ Ε , Δ Υ Ε, Δ Χ Ρ , Δ Υ Ρ および回転 位置誤差 Δ Θの修正により生ずる回路部品 2 0の中心位置のずれに基づいて装着 ヘッド 6 0の移動位置が修正されるとともに、 装着へッド 6 0がへッド回転装置 1 0 6により回転させられて回転位置誤差 Δ Θが修正される。 装着へッド 6 0 は、 誤差の演算等と並行して、 プリント配線板 1 4の部品装着箇所上へ移動させ られるとともに下降させられ、 回路部品 2 0を正確な部品装着箇所に正しい回転 位置で装着する。 以上で 1サイクルの装着作業が終了する。  Further, as described above, the center position error X ,, Δ Υ の of the component mounting portion of the printed wiring board 14 is changed to the reference mark 150 provided on the printed wiring board 14 in advance by the reference mark camera 15 2. Circuit component generated by correcting these errors ΔΧ Χ, ΔΥ Ε, Δ, Ρ, ΔΡ Ρ and the rotational position error ΔΘ before moving to the component mounting position. The moving position of the mounting head 60 is corrected based on the displacement of the center position of 20 and the mounting head 60 is rotated by the head rotating device 106 to correct the rotational position error ΔΘ. Is done. The mounting head 60 is moved to the component mounting location on the printed wiring board 14 and lowered in parallel with the error calculation, etc., and the circuit component 20 is correctly rotated to the correct component mounting location. Attach with This completes one cycle of mounting work.
次に、 トレィ型部品供給装置 2 6による回路部品 2 0の供給を説明する。 トレィ型部品供給装置 2 6においては、 ラック 2 0 2がラック昇降装置 2 0 4 によって昇降させられ、 ラック 2 0 2に収納された複数のパレツト 2 0 0が順 次、 鉛直方向において部品供給位置 (厳密には、 理想的な部品供給位置に可及的 に近い実際の部品供給位置) に位置決めされる。 そのため、 本実施形態において は、 ラック 2 0 2に設けられた複数対のレール 2 8 2の各々について、 ノ レット 2 0 0を部品供給位置に位置決めするためのラック昇降装置 2 0 4の停止位置、 すなわち、 ラック昇降装置 2 0 4の連続的な作動位置のうちの、 ラック昇降装置 2 0 4が停止させられるべき複数の位置が取得される。 Next, supply of the circuit component 20 by the tray-type component supply device 26 will be described. In the tray-type component supply device 26, the rack 202 is raised and lowered by the rack elevating device 204, and the plurality of pallets 200 stored in the rack 202 are sequentially and vertically supplied with the component supply position. (Strictly speaking, it is possible to reach the ideal parts supply position. (The actual component supply position close to the actual position). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the stopping position of the rack elevating device 204 for positioning the knurl 200 at the component supply position is set for each of the plurality of pairs of rails 282 provided on the rack 202. That is, a plurality of positions at which the rack elevating device 204 should be stopped among the continuous operating positions of the rack elevating device 204 are acquired.
本実施形態においては、 ラック昇降装置 2 0 4の停止位置は、 一連のプリント 配線板 1 4への回路部品 2 0の装着作業の開始に先立って取得され、 コンビユー タ 5 4 0の R AM 5 3 6に記憶させられている。 停止位置の取得を説明する。 停 止位置の取得時には、 ラック 2 0 2をラック昇降装置 2 0 4により、 例えば、 下 降端位置から上昇させる。 ラック 2 0 2の切欠 2 9 2が設けられていない部分が 乗り移りセンサ 3 1 2の投光器と受光器との間を通る場合には、 投光器が放射す る光が遮られ、 受光量が設定量より少なく、 ラック 2 0 2の切欠 2 9 2が設けら れていない部分の通過が検出される。 切欠 2 9 2が乗り移りセンサ 3 1 2に至れ ば受光器が受光し、 受光量が設定量を超えることから切欠 2 9 2の通過が検出さ れる。 切欠 2 9 2の設定量以上の部分が乗り移りセンサ 3 1 2から外れれば、 受 光器の受光量がしきい値に達し、 その後さらに減少する。 前述のように、 切欠 2 9 2は、 複数対のレール 2 8 2の各々について設けられており、 受光器の受光量 がしきい値以下になれば、 乗り移りセンサ 3 1 2の出力信号が O Nから O F Fに 変化する。 この出力信号の変化により、 レール 2 8 2が乗り移りセンサ 3 1 2が 設けられた乗り移りセンサ位置であって、 部品収容器保持部検出位置としてのレ ール検出位置に到達したことが検出される。 その際のラック昇降モータ 3 0 2の 累積回転角 (回転位置) を検出するエンコーダの値が、 乗り移りセンサ位置に到 達した際のレール 2 8 2の位置であって、 かつ、 ラック昇降装置 2 0 4の作動位 置であるとして取得される。 そして、 取得されたラック昇降装置 2 0 4の作動位 置は、 上記乗り移りセンサ位置に到達した ^一ル 2 8 2のラック 2 0 2における 設置位置を特定するデータ、 例えば、 ラック 2 0 2の複数の棚 2 8 4の各々に付 された棚識別情報ないし収納位置識別情報の一種である番号と対応付けて、 コン ピュータ 5 4 0の R AM 5 3 6に設けられたラック昇降装置作動位置メモリに記 憶される。 ラック昇降装置作動位置メモリは、 R AM 5 3 6のバックアップ部に 設けられ、 電源が O F Fにされてもデータが残る。 複数対のレール 2 8 2の全部 について、 ラック昇降装置 2 0 4の作動位置が取得される。 なお、 レール 2 8 2 の検出時には、 ラック 2 0 2は検出に適した速度であって、 低速で上昇させら ' れ、 レール 2 8 2の検出位置への到達が乗り移りセンサ 3 1 2によって正確に検 出されるようにされる。 In the present embodiment, the stop position of the rack elevating device 204 is acquired prior to the start of the work of mounting the circuit components 20 on the series of printed wiring boards 14, and the RAM 5 It is stored in 36. The acquisition of the stop position will be described. At the time of acquiring the stop position, the rack 202 is moved up from, for example, the lower end position by the rack elevating device 204. If the part of the rack 202 where the notch 292 is not provided passes between the transmitter and receiver of the transfer sensor 321, the light emitted by the transmitter is blocked and the amount of received light is The passage of the portion where the notch 292 of the rack 202 is not provided is detected. When the notch 292 is transferred and reaches the sensor 312, the light receiver receives light, and since the amount of received light exceeds the set amount, the passage of the notch 292 is detected. If the portion exceeding the set amount of the notch 292 deviates from the transfer sensor 312, the amount of light received by the receiver reaches the threshold value, and then further decreases. As described above, the notch 292 is provided for each of the multiple pairs of rails 282, and when the amount of light received by the receiver falls below the threshold, the output signal of the transfer sensor 313 is turned on. Changes from OFF to OFF. By this change in the output signal, it is detected that the rail 282 is at the transfer sensor position where the transfer sensor 312 is provided and has reached the rail detection position as the component container holding unit detection position. . The value of the encoder that detects the cumulative rotation angle (rotation position) of the rack elevating motor 302 at that time is the position of the rail 282 when the transfer sensor position is reached, and the rack elevating device 2 Obtained as the working position of 04. Then, the obtained operating position of the rack elevating device 204 is data that specifies the installation position of the rack 282 in the rack 202 that has reached the above-mentioned transfer sensor position, for example, the rack 202 A rack elevating device operating position provided in the RAM 536 of the computer 540 in association with a number which is a type of shelf identification information or storage position identification information attached to each of the plurality of shelves 284. Stored in memory. The rack elevator operating position memory is located in the The data remains even if the power is turned off. The operating position of the rack elevating device 204 is acquired for all of the pairs of rails 282. When the rail 282 is detected, the rack 202 is moved at a speed suitable for the detection and at a low speed, and the arrival at the detection position of the rail 282 is accurately detected by the transfer sensor 312. Will be detected at
このように乗り移りセンサ 3 1 2は、 本実施形態においては、 理想的な部品供 給位置より上方に設けられ、 乗り移りセンサ 3 1 2により検出されるレール 2 8 2は、 図 2 0 (c)に示すように、 理想的な部品供給位置の上方に位置する。 前述 のように、 乗り移りセンサ 3 1 2の理想的な部品供給位置に対する上下方向の距 離 L 1は取得されている。 また、 本実施形態では、 図 2 0 (b)に示すように、 切 欠 2 9 2がラック 2 0 2の昇降方向においてレール 2 8 2の支持面 2 8 6を含ん で、 支持面 2 8 6の上下両側に位置するように設けられているため、 切欠 2 9 2 の設定量以上の部分が乗り移りセンサ 3 1 2から外れ、 レール 2 8 2が検出され る際には、 検出されるレール 2 8 2の支持面 2 8 6は、 図 2 0 (c)に示すよう に、 乗り移りセンサ位置より上側に位置する。 この支持面 2 8 6の乗り移りセン サ位置に対する上下方向の距離、 すなわち支持面 2 8 6と切欠 2 9 2の下側の面 との距離 L 2は、 設計上、 取得されており、 全部のレール 2 8 2について同じで ある。 また、 距離 L 2は短く、 誤差はないものとする。 したがって、 レール 2 8 2が乗り移りセンサ 3 1 2により検出されたとき、 その支持面 2 8 6は、 距離 L 1と L 2との和に等しい距離、 理想的な部品供給位置より上方に位置するのであ り、 ラック昇降装置 2 0 4について取得された上記作動位置と距離 L 1および距 離 L 2とに基づいて、 レール 2 8 2により支持されたパレツト 2 0 0を理想的な 部品供給位置に停止させるためのラック昇降装置 2 0 4の停止位置が決定され る。 本実施形態においては、 理想的な部品供給位置から上方へ距離 L 1および距 離 L 2、 隔たった位置が設定高さであり、 設定高さと乗り移りセンサ 3 1 2の配 設高さとが異なっている。 また、 設定高さは、 コンペャベルト 4 0 4 , 4 0 6の 支持面 4 2 6の高さとも異なっている。 ラック昇降装置 2 0 4の停止位置は、 本 実施形態においてはラック昇降モータ 3 0 2の累積回転角を検出するエンコーダ のカウント値によって規定され、 複数対のレール 2 8 2の各々について、 乗り移 りセンサ 3 1 2による位置の検出毎に決定され、 前記レール 2 8 2の番号と対応 付けてメモリに記憶される。 このメモリは、 ラック昇降装置作動位置メモリでも よく、 それとは別に設けられたメモリでもよい。 いずれにしても、 ラック昇降装 置 2 0 4の停止位置を記憶するメモリがラック昇降装置停止位置メモリを構成す る。 ただし、 この停止位置は、 パレット 2 0 0の部品供給位置への位置決め時に 求められるようにしてもよい。 As described above, in the present embodiment, the transfer sensor 312 is provided above the ideal component supply position, and the rail 282 detected by the transfer sensor 312 is shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, it is located above the ideal parts supply position. As described above, the vertical distance L1 with respect to the ideal component supply position of the transfer sensor 312 has been acquired. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20 (b), the notch 292 includes the support surface 2886 of the rail 282 in the vertical direction of the rack 202, and the support surface 28 6 is located so as to be located on the upper and lower sides of the rail, so that the portion exceeding the set amount of the notch 2 92 comes off the transfer sensor 3 1 2, and when the rail 2 8 2 is detected, the detected rail As shown in FIG. 20 (c), the support surface 286 of the 282 is located above the transfer sensor position. The vertical distance of the support surface 286 to the transfer sensor position, that is, the distance L 2 between the support surface 286 and the lower surface of the notch 292 is obtained by design. Same for rails 282. The distance L2 is short and has no error. Therefore, when the rail 282 is detected by the transfer sensor 312, the support surface 286 is located at a distance equal to the sum of the distances L1 and L2 and above the ideal component supply position. Based on the operating position and the distance L1 and the distance L2 acquired for the rack elevating device 204, the pallet 200 supported by the rail 282 is set to the ideal component supply position. The stop position of the rack elevating device 204 for stopping the operation at the same time is determined. In the present embodiment, the set height is a distance L1 and a distance L2 upward from the ideal component supply position, and the set height is different from the arrangement height of the transfer sensor 312. I have. Further, the set height is also different from the height of the support surface 426 of the conveyor belts 404, 406. In this embodiment, the stop position of the rack elevating device 204 is defined by the count value of the encoder that detects the cumulative rotation angle of the rack elevating motor 302, and the transfer position is determined for each of the plurality of pairs of rails 282. Is determined each time the position of the rail 312 is detected, and is stored in the memory in association with the number of the rail 282. This memory may be a rack elevating device operating position memory or a memory provided separately therefrom. In any case, the memory for storing the stop position of the rack elevating device 204 constitutes the rack elevating device stop position memory. However, the stop position may be determined when the pallet 200 is positioned at the component supply position.
このように決定された停止位置にラック昇降装置 2 0 4が停止させられること により、 回路部品 2 0を供給するパレット 2 0 0は理想的な部品供給位置に十分 近い実際の部品供給位置に位置決めされる。 そのため、 ラック昇降装置 2 0 4と 搬送コンべャ 2 0 6との間の相対高さ誤差や、 複数対のレール 2 8 2間の相対高 さ誤差の存在にもかかわらず、 レール 2 8 2の支持面 2 8 6が搬送コンペャ 2 0 6のコンペャベルト 4 0 4 , 4 0 6の支持面 4 2 6と正確に同一水平面内に位置 させられ、 パレツト 2 0 0のラック 2 0 2と搬送コンペャ 2 0 6との間における 受渡しがスムーズに行われる。 ラック昇降装置 2 0 4においては、 ラック昇降モ ータ 3 0 2力 ラック 2 0 2の昇降開始時の昇降速度が滑らかに増大させられ、 昇降終了時に滑らかに減速させられるように制御される。 パレツト 2 0 0を部品 供給位置に位置決めするためのラック昇降装置 2 0 4の停止位置は予め取得され ており、 それに基づいて昇降速度制御を容易に行うことができる。  By stopping the rack elevating device 204 at the stop position thus determined, the pallet 200 for supplying the circuit components 20 is positioned at the actual component supply position sufficiently close to the ideal component supply position. Is done. Therefore, despite the relative height error between the rack elevating device 204 and the transport conveyor 206 and the relative height error between the multiple pairs of rails 282, the rail 282 The support surface 286 of the transfer conveyor 206 is positioned exactly on the same horizontal plane as the support surface 404 of the transfer conveyor 206, and the rack 202 of the pallet 200 and the transfer conveyor. Delivery to and from 206 is performed smoothly. In the rack elevating device 204, the rack elevating motor 302 force is controlled so that the elevating speed at the start of elevating the rack 202 is smoothly increased and the speed is smoothly decelerated at the end of elevating. The stop position of the rack lifting / lowering device 204 for positioning the pallet 200 at the component supply position is obtained in advance, and the lifting / lowering speed control can be easily performed based thereon.
部品供給位置に位置決めされたパレット 2 0 0は、 搬送コンべャ 2 0 6によ り、 部品収容平面に平行な水平方向に移動させられ、 ラック 2 0 2に収納された 収納位置から引き出され、 装着へッド 6 0力 Sトレィ 5 0から回路部品 2 0を取り 出すことを許容する部品取出許容位置へ移動させられ、 回路部品 2 0の供給後、 ラック 2 0 2に戻される。  The pallet 200 positioned at the component supply position is moved by the transport conveyor 206 in a horizontal direction parallel to the component storage plane, and is pulled out from the storage position stored in the rack 202. The mounting head 60 is moved from the S tray 50 to a component extraction allowable position where the circuit component 20 is allowed to be extracted. After the circuit component 20 is supplied, the circuit component 20 is returned to the rack 202.
ラック 2 0 2の昇降時には、 搬送コンべャ 2 0 6の保持具 4 1 0は、 保持位置 に位置させられ、 パレット 2 0 0の保持に備えて待機させられている。 保持位置 は、 保持具 4 1 0の一対のチャック 4 5 8力 S、 パレット搬送方向であって、 ラッ ク 2 0 2のレール 2 3 2の長手方向と平行な方向において、 ラック 2 0 2に収納 されたパレツト 2 0 0の取手 2 2 6とほぼ同じ位置に位置する位置である。 ラッ ク 2 0 2の昇降時には、 一対のチヤック 4 5 8は開かれており、 ラック 2 0 2に 収納された複数のパレツト 2 0 0の各取手 2 2 6の一対の握り部 2 2 8はいずれ も、 把持爪 4 6 0, 4 6 2と干渉することなく、 それらの間を通ることができ る。 前述のように、 ラック 2 0 2に収納されたパレット 2 0 0の搬送方向の収納 位置は、 第一把持爪 3 2 2がストッパ 3 5 0によって回動限度を規定されること により決められる。 このストッパ 3 5 0は複数のパレッ ト把持装置 3 2 0の全部 について共用であり、 ラック 2 0 2に収納された状態において複数のパレツト 2 0 0の各取手 2 2 6の搬送方向における位置はほぼ同じになり、 ラック昇降時に おけるチヤック 4 5 8との干渉が回避されるとともに、 部品供給位置に位置決め されたパレツト 2 0 0の取手 2 2 6がチャック 4 5 8により把持される。 When the rack 202 is moved up and down, the holders 410 of the transport conveyor 206 are positioned at the holding position and are on standby in preparation for holding the pallets 200. The holding position is the pair of chucks 4 58 force S of the holder 4 10, the pallet transport direction, and the direction parallel to the longitudinal direction of the rail 2 32 This position is located at approximately the same position as the handle 222 of the stored palette 200. When the rack 202 is moved up and down, the pair of chucks 458 are open and A pair of grips 2 28 of each handle 2 26 of the plurality of stored pallets 200 can pass between them without interfering with the gripping claws 4 0 6 4 6 2. You. As described above, the storage position of the pallet 200 stored in the rack 202 in the transport direction is determined by the rotation limit of the first gripping claw 32 2 defined by the stopper 350. The stopper 350 is shared by all of the plurality of pallet gripping devices 320, and the position of each handle 226 of the plurality of pallets 200 in the transport direction in the state of being stored in the rack 202 is as follows. As a result, interference with the chuck 458 during lifting and lowering of the rack is avoided, and the handle 222 of the pallet 200 positioned at the component supply position is gripped by the chuck 458.
ラック 2 0 2の昇降時には、 その昇降速度が制御され、 加速度おょぴ減速度が 滑らかに増大, 減少させられ、 ラック 2 0 2は衝撃少なく昇降を開始させられる とともに停止させられ、 ノ、。レット 2 0 0が衝撃少なく昇降を開始、 停止させられ て卜レイ 5 0の振動が抑制される。  When the rack 202 is moved up and down, its ascending and descending speed is controlled, and the acceleration and deceleration are smoothly increased and decreased, and the rack 202 is started and stopped with less impact and stopped. The let 200 starts and stops moving with little impact, and the vibration of the tray 50 is suppressed.
パレッ ト 2 0 0はパレツト把持装置 3 2 0によってラック 2 0 2に固定されて おり、 また、 トレイ 5 0はパレット 2 0 0に対して拘束部材 2 7 2 , 2 7 4によ つて移動不能に拘束されており、 ラック 2 0 2の昇降時にパレット 2 0 0がラッ ク 2 0 2に対して移動することがなく、 また、 トレイ 5 0もパレット 2 0 0に対 して移動せず、 昇降開始, 停止時等にラック 2 0 2を介してパレツト 2 0 0に衝 撃が加えられても、 パレッ ト 2 0 0およびトレイ 5 0の振動が抑制され、 収容凹 部 2 1 6に収容された回路部品 2 0のずれや姿勢変更等が少なくて済む。  The pallet 200 is fixed to the rack 202 by the pallet gripping device 320, and the tray 50 cannot be moved with respect to the pallet 200 by the restraining members 272, 274. The pallet 200 does not move with respect to the rack 202 when the rack 202 moves up and down, and the tray 50 does not move with respect to the pallet 200. Even if impact is applied to the pallet 200 via the rack 202 at the start or stop of lifting / lowering, the vibration of the pallet 200 and the tray 50 is suppressed, and the pallet 200 is accommodated in the accommodating recess 216. The deviation of the circuit component 20 and the change of the posture are small.
さらに、 パレツト 2 0 0は、 本実施形態においては、 振動吸収層 2 5 0を備え ており、 パレツト 2 0 0に振動が伝達されることがあっても、 その振動はパレツ ト自体により吸収され、 トレイ 5 0への伝達が少なくて済み、 回路部品 2 0のず れ等が良好に抑制される。 パレット 2 0 0は、 振動吸収層 2 5 0および磁性材料 層 2 5 2, 2 5 4が積層されて成り、 振動吸収能を備えつつ剛性が確保されると ともに、 薄く、 軽く形成されており、 ノ レット 2 0 0に伝達された振動が吸収さ れるとともに、 振動しても長く振動し続けることはない。  Further, in the present embodiment, the pallet 200 is provided with a vibration absorbing layer 250, and even if vibration is transmitted to the pallet 200, the vibration is absorbed by the pallet itself. The transmission to the tray 50 can be reduced, and the displacement of the circuit components 20 can be satisfactorily suppressed. The pallet 200 is formed by laminating a vibration absorbing layer 250 and a magnetic material layer 252, 254. The pallet 200 is provided with vibration absorbing capability, has rigidity, and is formed to be thin and light. The vibration transmitted to the knurl 200 is absorbed, and does not continue to vibrate for a long time.
回路部品 2 0を供給するパレツト 2 0 0が部品供給位置に位置決めされた状態 では、 そのパレット 2 0 0の取手 2 2 6の一対の握り部 2 2 8がそれぞれ、 一対 のチャック 4 5 8の各把持爪 4 6 0 , 4 6 2の間に位置する状態となり、 チヤッ ク 4 5 8が閉じられ、 握り部 2 2 8を把持し、 ノ レツト 2 0 0が保持具 4 1 0に より保持されるとともに、 パレツ ト把持装置 3 2 0によるパレツ ト 2 0 0の把持 が解除される。 第一, 第二把持爪回動装置 3 5 2 , 3 7 4によって爪保持体 3 2 6 , 3 6 0が回動させられ、 第一, 第二把持爪 3 2 2 , 3 2 4が解放位置へ回動 させられるのである。 この際、 複数ずつの第一, 第二把持爪 3 2 2 , 3 2 4がそ れぞれ一斉に回動させられ、 回路部品 2 0を供給するパレツト 2 0 0以外のパレ ット 2 0 0の把持も解除されるが、 部品供給時にはラック 2 0 2は昇降させられ ないため、 支障はない。 When the pallet 200 for supplying the circuit component 20 is positioned at the component supply position, the pair of grips 228 of the handle 226 of the pallet 200 are respectively paired. Is located between the gripping claws 460 and 462 of the chuck 458, the chuck 458 is closed, the grip portion 228 is gripped, and the notch 200 is held by the holder. While being held by 410, the pallet gripping device 320 releases the pallet 200 from gripping. The first and second gripping claw rotating devices 352, 374 rotate the claw holders 32, 36, and release the first and second gripping claws 32, 32, 34, respectively. It is pivoted to the position. At this time, a plurality of first and second gripping claws 3 2 2, 3 2 4 are simultaneously rotated, respectively, and a pallet 20 other than a pallet 200 for supplying circuit components 20. The grip of 0 is also released, but there is no problem because the rack 202 cannot be moved up and down during component supply.
保持具 4 1 0による取手 2 2 6の保持とパレツト把持装置 3 2 0によるパレツ ト 2 0 0の解放とは、 保持具 4 1 0による取手 2 6 6の保持とパレツト把持装置 3 2 0によるパレツト 2 0 0の把持とが同時に行われることがないように行われ ることが望ましい。 そのため、 本実施形態においては、 パレツト把持装置 3 2 0 によるパレツト 2 0 0の解放と保持具 4 1 0による取手 2 2 6の保持とが並行し て行われ、 把持爪 3 2 2 , 3 2 4が解放位置への回動を開始させられるととも に、 把持爪 4 6 0 , 4 6 2が把持位置への移動を開始させられ、 把持爪 3 2 2 , 3 2 4が係合面 2 4 6 , 2 4 8から離間した後に把持爪 4 6 0 , 4 6 2が握り部 2 6 8に係合し、 保持し始める。 そのため、 パレッ ト 2 0 0がこじりなく、 保持 具 4 1 0によって保持されるとともに、 保持具 4 1 0とパレツト把持装置 3 2 0 とのいずれによっても保持されない自由状態にある時間が短く、 姿勢が変わる恐 れがない。 あるいは、 パレッ ト把持装置 3 2 0によるパレッ ト 2 0 0の把持が解 除され、 第一, 第二把持爪 3 2 2 , 3 2 4が解放位置へ回動させられた後に、 保 持具 4 1 0が取手 2 6 6の保持を開始するようにしてもよい。  Holding the handle 2 26 by the holder 4 10 and releasing the palette 2 0 0 by the pallet gripper 3 2 0 means holding the handle 2 6 6 by the holder 4 10 and the pallet gripper 3 2 0 It is desirable that the pallet 200 is held so as not to be held at the same time. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the release of the pallet 200 by the pallet gripping device 320 and the holding of the handle 226 by the holder 410 are performed in parallel, and the gripping claws 3 2 2, 3 2 4 starts rotating to the release position, the gripping claws 4 60, 4 62 start moving to the gripping position, and the gripping claws 3 2 2, 3 2 4 engage the engaging surface 2. After being separated from 4 6 and 2 48, the gripping claws 4 60 and 4 62 engage with the grip portion 2 68 and start holding. Therefore, the pallet 200 is not twisted, is held by the holding tool 410, and is in a free state in which the pallet 200 is not held by any of the holding tool 410 and the pallet gripping device 320. There is no danger of changing. Alternatively, after the grip of the pallet 200 by the pallet gripping device 320 is released, and the first and second gripping claws 32 2 and 32 4 are rotated to the release positions, the holding tool is held. 4 10 may start holding the handle 2 6 6.
保持具 4 1 0が取手 2 6 6を把持し、 パレッ ト 2 0 0を保持した後、 コンペャ ベルト 4 0 4 , 4 0 6が移動部材 4 4 6が前進する方向、 すなわちラック 2 0 2 から離れる方向へ周回させられる。 それにより、 保持具 4 1 0により保持された ノ《レット 2 0 0がラック 2 0 2から引き出され、 その一対のレール 2 3 2がラッ ク 2 0 2のレール 2 8 2から一対のコンペャベルト 4 0 4 , 4 0 6の支持部 4 2 4上に乗り移る。 前述のように、 回路部品 2 0を供給するパレット 2 0 0は、 ラック 2 0 2の昇 降により高い位置決め精度で (理想的な部品供給位置に十分近い実際の部品供給 位置に) 位置決めされるため、 コンペャベルト 4 0 4, 4 0 6の支持面 4 2 6 と、 ラック 2 0 2の実際の部品供給位置に位置決めされたパレツト 2 0 0を支持 するレール 2 8 2の支持面 2 8 6とが正確に同じ高さに位置させられ、 ノ、。レッ ト 2 0 0はレール 2 8 2からコンペャベルト 4 0 4, 4 0 6上へスムーズに乗り移 る。 また、 パレット 2 0 0のレール 2 3 2のパレット搬送方向の端部の下面には 案内面 2 3 6が設けられており、 案内面 2 3 6の傾斜によりパレット 2 0 0の乗 り移りが案内され、 上記支持面 4 2 6と支持面 2 8 6との高さにたとえごく僅か な差があっても、 パレッ ト 2 0 0は滑らかに乗り移ることができる。 レール 2 3 2は、 その下面がパレッ ト搬送方向に延びる一平面状を成し、 その先端部がコン べャベルト 4 0 4 , 4 0 6上に乗れば、 先端部以後の部分も続いて滑らかにコン べャべノレト 4 0 4 ' 4 0 6へ乗り移る。 さらに、 コンべャベルト 4 0 4, 4 0 6 の各支持部 4 2 6とレール 2 8 2とは、 極く短い距離を隔てて近接して設けられ ており、 パレッ ト 2 0 0は、 その乗り移りの間、 レール 2 3 2のほぼ全体がレー ル 2 8 2およびコンペャベルト 4 0 4, 4 0 6により支持され、 安定した状態で 乗り移る。 After the holding tool 410 holds the handle 260 and holds the palette 200, the conveyor belts 400 and 400 move in the direction in which the moving member 450 moves forward, that is, from the rack 202. Orbit in the direction away. As a result, the knobs 200 held by the holders 410 are pulled out of the rack 202, and the pair of rails 232 is moved from the rails 282 of the rack 202 to the pair of conveyor belts 4. Transfer on the support 4 2 4 of 0 4, 4 6. As described above, the pallet 200 for supplying the circuit components 200 is positioned with high positioning accuracy (at the actual component supply position sufficiently close to the ideal component supply position) by moving the rack 202 up and down. Therefore, the support surfaces 4 2 6 of the conveyor belts 4 4 and 4 6 6 and the support surfaces 2 8 6 of the rail 2 8 2 supporting the palette 2 0 positioned at the actual parts supply position of the rack 2 Are located at exactly the same height. Let 200 ride smoothly from rail 282 onto the conveyor belts 404,406. In addition, a guide surface 236 is provided on the lower surface of the end of the rail 232 of the pallet 200 in the pallet transport direction, and the pallet 200 moves over due to the inclination of the guide surface 236. The pallet 200 can be smoothly moved even if there is a slight difference between the heights of the support surface 426 and the support surface 286. The rail 232 has a flat surface with its lower surface extending in the pallet transport direction. If the tip of the rail 232 rides on the conveyor belts 404 and 406, the portion after the tip continues smoothly. Transfer to conveyor belt 4 0 4 '4 0 6. Further, the support portions 426 of the conveyor belts 404, 406 and the rail 282 are provided close to each other with a very short distance therebetween, and the pallet 200 has a During the transfer, almost the entire rail 232 is supported by the rail 282 and the conveyor belts 404, 406, so that the vehicle can move in a stable state.
パレッ ト 2 0 0を保持する保持具 4 1 0はコンペャベルト 4 0 4 , 4 0 6に取 り付けられていて、 コンべャベルト 4 0 4 , 4 0 6と一体的に移動し、 保持具 4 1 0がパレツト 2 0 0の取手 2 6 6を保持した状態において、 コンペャベルト 4 0 4 , 4 0 6が周回駆動装置 4 0 8によって周回させられるとき、 保持具 4 1 0 が必然的にコンペャベルト 4 0 4 , 4 0 6と同じ速度で移動し、 それにより、 図 1 5 (b)に示すように、 パレッ ト 2 0 0がラック 2 0 2のレール 2 8 2からコン べャべノレト 4 0 4., 4 0 6上に移載され、 コンペャべノレト 4 0 4, 4 0 6により 搬送される。 したがって、 パレッ ト 2 0 0が保持具 4 1 0およびコンペャベルト 4 0 4, 4 0 6に対して相対移動し、 振動することが殆どなく、 ノ《レッ ト 2 0 0 に対して拘束されたトレイ 5 0も殆ど振動せず、 トレイ 5 0に収容された回路部 品 2 0のずれ等が回避される。  The holding tool 410 holding the pallet 200 is attached to the conveyor belts 404, 406, and moves integrally with the conveyor belts 404, 406, and the holding tool 4 When the conveyor belts 404 and 406 are rotated by the circulating drive device 408 while holding the handle 266 of the pallet 200 with the pallet 200, the retainer 411 is inevitably moved by the conveyor belt 404. 0 4, 4 0 6 at the same speed, so that the pallet 200 moves from the rail 282 of the rack 202 to the conveyor belt 40, as shown in Figure 15 (b). 4. Transferred to 406 and transported by Comparator 406, 406. Therefore, the pallet 200 moves relatively with respect to the holder 410 and the conveyor belts 404, 406, and hardly vibrates. 50 also hardly vibrates, and a shift or the like of the circuit component 20 accommodated in the tray 50 is avoided.
ノヽ0レッ ト 2 0 0は、 ラック 2 0 2からコンべャベルト 4 0 4, 4 0 6上へ移載 されるとき、 案内装置 2 0 8の固定レール 4 9 0と可動レール 4 9 2との間に進 入し、 両レール 4 9 0, 4 9 2により、 レール 2 3 2の部品収容平面に直角な側 面 2 3 8において挟まれて移動を案内される。 可動レール 4 9 2はスプリング 5 1 0の付勢により前進端位置に位置しているが、 レール 2 3 2の端部に設けられ た案内部 2 3 4の斜面の作用により、 パレット 2 0 0はスプリング 5 1 0の付勢 力に抗して可動レール 4 9 2を固定レール 4 9 0から離れる向きに移動させつ つ、 それらレール 4 9 0, 4 9 2間に進入し、 可動レール 4 9 2は側面 2 3 8に 係合し、 スプリング 5 1 0の付勢によりパレット 2 0 0を固定レール 4 9 0に押 し付ける。 前述のように可動レール 4 9 2は、 パレッ ト搬送面と平行な水平面内 においてパレツト搬送方向と交差する方向に撓むことができ、 スプリング 5 1 0 により付勢された可動レール 4 9 2は、 その長手方向に隔たった 3箇所あるいは それ以上の多数箇所においてパレツト 2 0 0のレール 2 3 2の側面 2 3 8に接触 し、 固定レール 4 9 0と共に挟むことができる。 その結果、 パレッ ト 2 0 0は固 定レール 4 9 0および可動レール 4 9 2により左右両側から適切な大きさの力で 挟まれ、 左右方向の移動を規制されつつ、 部品取出許容位置への移動を案内され る。 それにより、 パレッ ト 2 0 0の振動が抑制され、 トレイ 5 0に収容された回 路部品 2 0のずれ等が回避される。 また、 パレッ ト 2 0 0と固定レール 4 9 0 , 可動レール 4 9 2との間の摩擦力が小さく、 パレツト 2 0 0はスムーズに移動す ることができ、 振動が抑制される。 Node 0 200 is transferred from rack 202 to conveyor belts 404 and 406 When it is moved, it enters between the fixed rail 490 of the guide device 208 and the movable rail 492, and is perpendicular to the component accommodation plane of the rail 232 by both rails 490, 492. The movement is guided by being pinched on the side surface 238. The movable rail 492 is located at the forward end position by the bias of the spring 510, but the action of the slope of the guide portion 234 provided at the end of the rail 332 causes the pallet 200 to move. Moves the movable rail 492 away from the fixed rail 490 against the biasing force of the spring 5110, enters between the rails 490, 492, and moves the movable rail 492. 9 2 engages with the side surface 2 3 8 and presses the pallet 2 0 against the fixed rail 4 9 0 by the bias of the spring 5 10. As described above, the movable rail 492 can bend in a direction intersecting the pallet transport direction in a horizontal plane parallel to the pallet transport surface, and the movable rail 492 urged by the spring 510 However, the pallet 200 can be in contact with the side surface 238 of the rail 230 at three or more places separated in the longitudinal direction, and can be sandwiched together with the fixed rail 490. As a result, the pallet 200 is sandwiched between the left and right sides by the fixed rail 490 and the movable rail 492 with an appropriate amount of force. You will be guided to move. Thereby, the vibration of the pallet 200 is suppressed, and the displacement and the like of the circuit components 20 accommodated in the tray 50 are avoided. Further, the frictional force between the pallet 200 and the fixed rails 490 and the movable rails 492 is small, so that the pallets 200 can move smoothly and vibration is suppressed.
また、 コンべャベルト 4 0 4, 4 0 6は、 本実施形態においてはゴムにより作 られており、 搬送コンペャ 2 0 6に伝達される振動はコンペャベルト 4 0 4 , 4 0 6の弾性変形により吸収されてパレツト 2 0 0への伝達が抑制され、 また、 保 持具 4 1 0等からパレツト 2 0 0に伝達される振動もコンべャベルト 4 0 4 , 4 0 6の弾性変形および内部摩擦により減衰させられる。  In the present embodiment, the conveyor belts 404 and 406 are made of rubber, and the vibration transmitted to the conveyor 206 is absorbed by the elastic deformation of the conveyor belts 404 and 406. As a result, the transmission to the pallet 200 is suppressed, and the vibration transmitted to the pallet 200 from the holder 410 etc. is also reduced by the elastic deformation and internal friction of the conveyor belts 404, 406. Attenuated.
さらに、 コンペャベルト 4 0 4, 4 0 6は、 歯 4 1 2が設けられた外周面によ りパレッ ト 2 0 0を支持し、 歯 4 1 2のない平坦な内周面においてガイドプーリ 4 2 8により案内されるため、 周回時におけるコンペャベルト 4 0 4, 4 0 6の 振動が少なくて済む。 コンべャベルト 4 0 4, 4 0 6が歯 4 1 2が設けられた側 においてガイドプーリ 4 2 8によって案内されるのであれば、 歯 4 1 2がガイド プーリ 4 2 8を乗り越える度にコンペャベルト 4 0 4 , 4 0 6が振動させられる のに対し、 コンペャベルト 4 0 4, 4 0 6とガイドプーリ 4 2 8とは互いに滑ら かな面で接触し、 連続して係合し続け、 コンべャベルト 4 0 4 , 4 0 6は振動少 なく周回させられ、 パレッ ト 2 0 0の振動が抑制される。 . Further, the conveyor belts 404 and 406 support the pallet 200 by the outer peripheral surface provided with the teeth 41, and the guide pulleys 42 on the flat inner peripheral surface having no teeth 41. Since it is guided by 8, the vibrations of the conveyor belts 404 and 406 during orbiting can be reduced. If the conveyor belts 404, 406 are guided by the guide pulley 428 on the side where the teeth 412 are provided, the teeth 412 are guided. While the conveyor belts 404 and 406 are vibrated each time they pass over the pulley 428, the conveyor belts 404 and 406 and the guide pulleys 428 contact each other on a smooth surface and are continuously connected. The conveyor belts 404, 406 are caused to circulate with little vibration, and the vibration of the pallet 200 is suppressed. .
また、 パレッ ト 2 0 0は、 振動吸収層 2 5 0および磁性材料層 2 5 2, 2 5 4 が積層されて成り、 ラック 2 0 2の昇降により昇降させられる場合と同様に、 パ レット 2 0 0自体による振動吸収による振動のトレイ 5 0への伝達軽減効果, 回 路部品 2 0のずれ等の良好な抑制効果, 振動の早期の収束効果等が得られる。 パレツト 2 0 0が、 予め設定された部品取出許容位置に到達した状態において コンペャベルト 4 0 4, 4 0 6が停止させられる。 周回駆動装置 4 0 8のベルト 駆動モータ 4 3 4は制御装置 5 3 0により、 コンべャベルト 4 0 4 , 4 0 6の周 回開始時であって、 パレット 2 0 0の搬送開始時には、 搬送速度が滑らかに増大 させられ、 周回終了時であつて搬送終了時には滑らかに減速させられるように制 御される。 そのため、 パレッ ト 2 0 0の搬送開始時および終了時においてそれぞ れ、 加速度および減速度が滑らかに増大, 減少させられ、 パレツト 2 0 0が衝擊 少なく移動を開始、 停止させられてトレイ 5 0の振動が抑制される。  The pallet 200 is formed by laminating a vibration absorption layer 250 and magnetic material layers 252 and 254, and the pallet 200 is moved up and down by raising and lowering the rack 202. The effect of reducing the transmission of vibration to the tray 50 due to the absorption of vibration by the vibration itself, a good effect of suppressing the displacement of the circuit component 20, and the effect of early convergence of vibration can be obtained. The conveyor belts 404, 406 are stopped in a state where the pallet 200 has reached a preset component removal allowable position. The belt drive motor 4 3 4 of the orbiting drive device 4 08 is controlled by the control device 5 3 0 when the conveyor belts 4 0 4 and 6 6 are started to rotate and the pallet 2 0 The speed is smoothly increased, and control is performed so that the speed is smoothly reduced at the end of the round and at the end of the transport. Therefore, the acceleration and deceleration are smoothly increased and decreased at the start and end of the transport of the palette 200, respectively, and the palette 200 is started and stopped with little impact, and the tray 500 is stopped. Is suppressed.
パレッ ト 2 0 0が部品取出許容位置へ到達すれば、 装着へッド 6 0が 3 Y移動 装置 9 6により部品取出位置に移動させられるとともに、 へッド昇降装置 1 0 4 により下降させられ、 パレツト 2 0 0に支持されたトレイ 5 0から回路部品 2 0 を取り出す。 この際、 装着へッド 6 0は、 回路部品 2 0を供給するトレイ 5 0の 高さに応じた位置へ下降させられる。  When the pallet 200 reaches the component removal allowable position, the mounting head 60 is moved to the component removal position by the 3Y moving device 96 and lowered by the head lifting device 104. Then, the circuit component 20 is taken out from the tray 50 supported by the pallet 200. At this time, the mounting head 60 is lowered to a position corresponding to the height of the tray 50 for supplying the circuit components 20.
パレット 2 0 0には、 トレイ 5 0が 1つのみ支持されることもあれば、 複数、 積層されて支持されることもある。 後者の場合、 最上段のトレィ 5 0が回路部品 2 0を供給し、 そのトレィ 5 0が空になれば、 部品取出許容位置に設けられたト レイ取出装置 (図示省略) によりパレッ ト 2 0 0から取り出されて排出装置 (図 示省略) に排出され、 トレイ 5 0の排出により最上段に位置することとなったト レイ 5 0が回路部品 2 0を供給する。 そのため、 トレイ 5 0が排出される毎に、 最上段のトレイ 5 0のパレツト 2 0 0の上面である支持面 2 6 0からの距離が短 くなる。 部品取出許容位置におけるパレッ ト 2 0 0の高さは、 コンペャベルト 4 0 4 , 4 0 6によって支持された高さであって一定であり、 ノ レット 2 0 0に支 持された複数のトレイ 5 0のうち、 最上段のトレィ 5 0の高さは、 トレイ 5 0が 排出される毎に低くなり、 装着ヘッド 6 0との距離が長くなるのであるが、 装着 ヘッド 6 0の下降端位置が制御されることにより、 最上段のトレィ 5 0の高さに 応じた位置へ装着ヘッド 6 0が下降させられ、 回路部品 2 0を支障なく吸着す る。 The pallet 200 may support only one tray 50, or may support a plurality of stacked trays. In the latter case, the uppermost tray 50 supplies the circuit components 20, and when the tray 50 becomes empty, the pallet 20 is provided by the tray extraction device (not shown) provided at the component extraction allowable position. The tray 50, which is taken out from the tray 0 and discharged to a discharge device (not shown), is positioned at the uppermost stage by discharging the tray 50, and supplies the circuit component 20. Therefore, every time the tray 50 is discharged, the distance from the support surface 260 which is the upper surface of the pallet 200 of the uppermost tray 50 is reduced. The height of the pallet 200 at the part removal allowable position is the conveyor belt 4 0 4, 40 6, the height is constant and constant, and among the plurality of trays 50 supported by the knurls 200, the height of the uppermost tray 50 is tray 5 Each time 0 is discharged, it becomes lower and the distance to the mounting head 60 becomes longer.However, by controlling the descending end position of the mounting head 60, it is adjusted according to the height of the uppermost tray 50. The mounting head 60 is lowered to the set position, and the circuit component 20 is sucked without any trouble.
本実施形態においては、 パレット 2 0 0上に支持された少なくとも一つのトレ ィ 5 0のうち、 最上段のトレイ 5 0の高さは、 そのトレィ 5 0のパレット 2 0 0 に対する高さを検出することにより取得される。 そのため、 まず、 トレイ 5 0が 支持されていない状態でのパレツト 2 0 0の高さがトレイ高さ確認センサ 5 5 0 により検出される。  In the present embodiment, the height of the uppermost tray 50 out of the at least one tray 50 supported on the pallet 200 detects the height of the tray 50 with respect to the pallet 200. It is obtained by doing. Therefore, first, the height of the pallet 200 in a state where the tray 500 is not supported is detected by the tray height confirmation sensor 550.
トレイ高さ確認センサ 5 5 0は、 本実施形態においては光電センサの一種であ る透過型光電センサによつて構成されている。 トレイ高さ.確認センサ 5 5 0の投 光器および受光器 (図示省略) は、 フレーム 3 0 0の部品供給位置に対応する位 置より上側の位置であって、 ラック 2 0 2を挟んで、 パレツト搬送方向に隔たつ た位置に設けられており、 部品供給位置においてラック 2 0 2に出し入れされる ノ《レット 2 0 0と干渉することなく、 ノ レット 2 0 0およびトレイ 5 0の高さを 検出する。 トレイ高さ確認センサ 5 5 0の投光器およぴ受光器はまた、 ラック 2 0 2の幅方向においては、 投光器が放射する光が位置決め面 2 6 2 , 把持部 2 6 4によっては遮られることなく受光器により受光され、 支持面 2 6 0の高さおよ ぴ最上段のトレィ 5 0の高さが検出されるように設けられている。  In this embodiment, the tray height confirmation sensor 550 is constituted by a transmission type photoelectric sensor which is a kind of a photoelectric sensor. Tray height The transmitter and receiver (not shown) of the confirmation sensor 550 are located above the position corresponding to the component supply position of the frame 300, and sandwich the rack 202. The rack is located at a position separated in the pallet transport direction, and is inserted into and removed from the rack 202 at the component supply position. Is detected. The transmitter and receiver of the tray height confirmation sensor 550 must also be able to block the light emitted by the transmitter in the width direction of the rack 202 by the positioning surface 262 and the grip 264. And the height of the support surface 260 and the height of the uppermost tray 50 are detected.
パレット 2 0 0の高さの検出時には、 ラック 2 0 2の全部の棚 2 8 4に空のパ レット 2 0 0が収納され、 それらパレツト 2 0 0の各々について高さが検出され る。 例えば、 ラック 2 0 2が下降端位置から上昇させられ、 パレット 2 0 0がト レイ高さ確認センサ 5 5 0が設けられた部分に至れば、 投光器が放射する光がパ レツト本体 2 3 0により遮られ、 受光部の受光量が減少し、 しきい値以下になれ ば、 トレイ高さ確認センサ 5 5 0の出力信号が O Nから O F Fに変化する。 この 信号の変化により、 パレツト 2 0 0が高さ確認位置に到達したことが検出され る。 その際のラック昇降モータ 3 0 2の累積回転角 (回転位置) を検出するェン コーダのカウント値がパレット 2 0 0の高さとして、 そのパレット 2 0 0のラッ ク 2 0 2における収納位置を特定するデータ、 例えば、 ラック 2 0 2の複数の棚 2 8 4の各々に付された棚識別情報ないし収納位置識別情報である番号と対応付 けて、 コンピュータ 5 4 0の R AM 5 3 6に設けられたパレツト高さメモリに記 憶される。 このパレット 2 0 0の高さは、 ラック 2 0 2に搭載された複数のパレ ット 2 0 0の各々について固有の値であり、 予め検出されて記憶されており、 R AM 5 3 6のバックアップ部に記憶され、 電源が O F Fにされてもデータが残さ れる。 When the height of the pallet 200 is detected, empty pallets 200 are stored in all the shelves 284 of the rack 202, and the height of each of the pallets 200 is detected. For example, when the rack 202 is raised from the lower end position and the pallet 200 reaches the portion where the tray height confirmation sensor 550 is provided, the light emitted from the projector emits the pallet body 230 When the amount of light received by the light receiving unit decreases and falls below the threshold, the output signal of the tray height confirmation sensor 550 changes from ON to OFF. The change in this signal detects that the palette 200 has reached the height confirmation position. At this time, the end detecting the accumulated rotation angle (rotational position) of the rack elevating motor 302 is performed. Assuming that the count value of the coder is the height of the pallet 200, data specifying the storage position of the pallet 200 in the rack 202, for example, is attached to each of the plurality of shelves 284 of the rack 202. The information is stored in a palette height memory provided in the RAM 536 of the computer 540, in association with the number which is the shelf identification information or the storage position identification information. The height of the pallet 200 is a unique value for each of the plurality of pallets 200 mounted on the rack 202, is detected and stored in advance, and The data is stored in the backup unit and remains even if the power is turned off.
そして、 ノ レット 2 0 0にトレイ 5 0が搭載され、 一連のプリント配線板 1 4 への回路部品 2 0の装着開始に先立って、 パレッ ト 2 0 0に支持されたトレイ 5 0の高さが検出される。 ラック 2 0 2が上昇させられ、 複数のパレツ ト 2 0 0の 各々について、 トレイ 5 0が、 トレイ高さ確認センサ 5 5 0の投光器が放射する 光を遮り、 受光器の受光量がしきい値以下になってり、 出力信号が O Nから O F Fに変化する際のラック昇降モータ 3 0 2のエンコーダのカウント値がトレイ 5 0の高さとして取得され、 そのトレィ 5 0を支持するパレッ ト 2 0 0の高さと共 に記憶される。 パレット 2 0 0について取得されたエンコーダの値と、 トレイ 5 0について取得されたエンコーダの値との差がパレット 2 0 0に支持されている 全部のトレイ 5 0の厚さの総和に相当し、 最上段のトレイ 5 0のパレツト 2 0 0 (支持面 2 6 0 ) に対する高さを表す。 トレイ 5 0の高さは、 例えば、 トレイ 5 0が空になり、 パレツト 2 0 0から排出される毎に検出される。 1つのトレイ 5 0が連続して複数の回路部品 2 0を供給する場合、 その供給の途中で回路部品 2 0がなくなり、 トレイ 5 0が排出された場合、 同じパレット 2 0 0に収容された 次のトレイ 5 0からの回路部品 2 0の取出しが行われる前に、 そのトレィ 5 0の 高さが検出され、 装着ヘッ ド 6 0の下降位置制御に使用される。 高さ検出時に は、 トレイ 5 0はラック 2 0 2に戻される。  Then, the tray 50 is mounted on the knurl 200, and the height of the tray 50 supported by the pallet 200 is set prior to the start of mounting the circuit components 20 on the series of printed wiring boards 14. Is detected. The rack 202 is raised, and for each of the plurality of pallets 200, the tray 50 blocks the light emitted from the emitter of the tray height confirmation sensor 550, and the amount of light received by the receiver is threshold. When the output signal changes from ON to OFF, the count value of the encoder of the rack elevating motor 302 is acquired as the height of the tray 50, and the pallet 2 supporting the tray 50 Stored together with the height of 00. The difference between the encoder value obtained for pallet 200 and the encoder value obtained for tray 500 corresponds to the sum of the thicknesses of all trays 50 supported on pallet 200, This represents the height of the uppermost tray 50 with respect to the palette 200 (support surface 260). The height of the tray 50 is detected, for example, every time the tray 50 becomes empty and is discharged from the palette 200. When one tray 50 continuously supplies a plurality of circuit components 20, the circuit components 20 disappear during the supply, and when the tray 50 is discharged, they are stored in the same pallet 200. Before the removal of the circuit component 20 from the next tray 50, the height of the tray 50 is detected and used for controlling the lowering position of the mounting head 60. When the height is detected, the tray 50 is returned to the rack 202.
部品取出許容位置において搬送コンペャ 2 0 6のコンペャベルト 4 0 4 , 4 0 6により支持された状態におけるパレツト 2 0 0の高さは、 支持面 4 2 6の高さ に基づいて予め取得され、 固有値としてコンピュータ 5 4 0の R AM 5 3 6に記 憶されている。 パレッ ト 2 0 0の高さは、 全部のパレッ ト 2 0 0について同じで あり、 誤差は無視することとする。 したがって、 部品取出許容位置におけるパレ ット 2 0 0の高さと、 パレット 2 0 0により支持されたトレイ 5 0のうち、 最上 段のトレィ 5 0であって、 回路部品 2 0を供給するトレイ 5 0のパレット 2 0 0 に対する高さとから、 部品取出許容位置におけるトレイ 5 0と、 上昇端位置にあ る装着へッド 6 0との距離が得られ、 その距離に基づいて装着へッド 6 0の下降 端位置が制御され、 吸着ノズル 1 1 4力 Sトレィ 5 0に収納された回路部品 2 0を 損傷することなく、 確実に吸着することができる位置へ下降させられる。 The height of the pallet 200 in a state where the pallet 200 is supported by the conveyor belts 404 and 406 of the transport conveyor 206 at the component take-out allowable position is obtained in advance based on the height of the support surface 426, and is a unique value. As the computer 540. The height of palette 200 is the same for all palettes 200 Yes, errors are ignored. Therefore, the height of the pallet 200 at the component take-out allowable position, and the uppermost tray 50 of the trays 50 supported by the pallet 200, which is the tray 5 for supplying the circuit components 20 From the height of the pallet 200 with respect to the pallet 200, the distance between the tray 50 at the component removal allowable position and the mounting head 60 at the rising end position is obtained, and the mounting head 6 is determined based on the distance. The descending end position of 0 is controlled, and the suction nozzle 1 14 is lowered to a position where the circuit components 20 housed in the S tray 50 can be reliably sucked without damage.
回路部品 2 0の供給を終了したならば、 ノ、。レット 2 0 0はラック 2 0 2へ戻さ れる。 そのため、 コンペャベルト 4 0 4 , 4 0 6がパレット 2 0 0を部品取出許 容位置へ移動させる場合とは逆向きに周回させられ、 移動部材 4 6 6と共に保持 具 4 1 0が保持位置に向かって移動させられるとともに、 パレツト 2 0 0がラッ ク 2 0 2へ向かって後退させられ、 コンペャべノレト 4 0 4 , 4 0 6からラック 2 0 2に乗り移る。 パレッ ト 2 0 0の一対のレール 2 3 2がー対のコンべャベノレト 4 0 4 , 4 0 6からラック 2 0 2のレール 2 8 2に乗り移るのである。 パレツト 2 0 0が精度良く部品供給位置に位置決めされ、 レール 2 8 2の支持面 2 8 6と コンべャベルト 4 0 4 , 4 0 6の支持面 4 2 6とが精度良く同じ高さに位置させ られているため、 パレッ ト 2 0 0は戻し時にスムーズに乗り移る。 この際、 パレ ッ ト 2 0 0の乗り移りは、 レール 2 3 2の長手方向の端部に設けられた案内面 2 3 6およびレール 2 8 2の前端部に設けられた案内面 2 8 8により案内されると ともに、 レール 2 3 2の長手方向の端部に設けられた案内部 2 3 4により案内さ れる。 パレツト 2 0 0はラック 2 0 2に戻され、 収納される際にも、 ラック 2 0 2から引き出される場合と同様に振動が抑制されて搬送されるとともに、 コンペ ャベルト 4 0 4 , 4 0 6からラック 2 0 2ヘスムーズに移載される。  When the supply of circuit components 20 is completed, no. Let 200 is returned to rack 202. Therefore, the conveyor belts 404 and 406 are caused to rotate in the opposite direction to the case where the pallet 200 is moved to the component removal permitted position, and the holding member 410 together with the moving member 466 is directed to the holding position. The pallet 200 is moved back toward the rack 202, and is transferred to the rack 202 from the competitor nodes 404, 406. The pair of rails 232 on the pallet 200 transfers from the pair of conveyor lobes 404, 406 to the rail 282 of the rack 202. The pallet 200 is accurately positioned at the component supply position, and the support surface 286 of the rail 282 and the support surface 426 of the conveyor belts 404, 406 are accurately positioned at the same height. Pallet 200 moves smoothly when returning. At this time, the transfer of the pallet 200 is performed by the guide surface 236 provided at the longitudinal end of the rail 232 and the guide surface 288 provided at the front end of the rail 282. While being guided, it is guided by a guide portion 234 provided at the longitudinal end of the rail 232. The pallets 200 are returned to the racks 202, and when they are stored, they are conveyed with vibration suppressed as in the case where they are pulled out of the racks 202, and the conveyor belts 404, 406 From the rack 202.
そして、 移動部材 4 4 6が保持位置へ到達し、 パレッ ト 2 0 0がラック 2 0 2 に乗り移り終わった状態で移動が停止させられ、 チャック 4 5 8の把持爪 4 6 0 , 4 6 2が開かれて、 取手 2 2 6が解放されるとともに、 複数のパレッ ト 2 0 0の各々について設けられたパレツト把持装置 3 2 0の第一, 第二把持爪 3 2 2 , 3 2 4が把持位置へ回動させられ、 ノ、。レッ ト 2 0 0を把持し、 ラック 2 0 2 に固定する。 これら保持具 4 1 0による取手 2 6 6の解放と、 パレット把持装置 3 2 0によるパレツト 2 0 0の把持とは、 ノ レツト 2 0 0をラック 2 0 2からコ ンべャベルト 4 0 4 , 4 0 6へ移載する場合と同様に、 保持具 4 1 0による取手 2 6 6の保持とパレツ ト把持装置 3 2 0によるパレツ ト 2 0 0の把持とが同時に 行われることがないように行われることが望ましく、 本実施形態においては、 保 持具 4 1 0による取手 2 6 6の解放とパレツト把持装置 3 2 0によるパレツト 2 0 0の把持とが並行して行われる。 その後、 ラック 2 0 2が昇降させられ、 次に 回路部品 2 0を供給するパレツ ト 2 0 0が部品供給位置に位置決めされる。 なお、 図示および詳細な説明は省略するが、 トレィ型部品供給装置 2 6におい て、 パレッ ト 2 0 0のラック 2 0 2への収納および部品取出許容位置への到達等 は、 図示を省略するセンサによって検出され、 それら検出に基づいて、 ラック 2 0 2の昇降等、 次に行われるべき動作が行われるようにされている。 Then, when the moving member 446 reaches the holding position and the pallet 200 has completely moved onto the rack 202, the movement is stopped, and the gripping claws 460, 462 of the chuck 458 are stopped. Is opened, the handle 2 26 is released, and the first and second gripping claws 3 2 2, 3 2 4 of the palette gripping device 3 20 provided for each of the plurality of palettes 200 are opened. It is turned to the gripping position. Grab the led 200 and fix it to the rack 202. Release of handle 2 6 6 by these holding tools 4 10 and pallet holding device The gripping of the pallet 200 by 320 means the use of the holder 410 as in the case of transferring the knurl 200 from the rack 202 to the conveyor belts 404, 406. It is desirable that the holding of the handle 26 6 and the holding of the palette 200 by the palette gripping device 320 are not performed at the same time. In the present embodiment, the holding tool 4 10 The release of the handle 260 by the pallet and the gripping of the pallet 200 by the pallet gripping device 320 are performed in parallel. Thereafter, the rack 202 is moved up and down, and then the pallet 200 for supplying the circuit component 20 is positioned at the component supply position. Although illustration and detailed description are omitted, in the tray-type component supply device 26, the illustration of the storage of the palette 200 in the rack 202 and the arrival of the component at the component removal allowable position is omitted. The detection is performed by a sensor, and based on the detection, an operation to be performed next, such as lifting and lowering of the rack 202, is performed.
以上の説明から明らかなように、 本実施形態においては、 制御装置 5 3 0のパ レッ ト 2 0 0に支持されたトレイ 5 0のパレツト 2 0 0に対する高さとパレツ ト 2 0 0の高さとに基づいて、 パレット 2 0 0に搭載された全部のトレイ 5 0の高 さであって、 回路部品 2 0を供給するトレイ 5 0のパレッ ト 2 0 0に対する高さ を取得する部分が、 高さ検出装置としてのトレイ高さ確認センサ 5 5 0と共にト レイーパレット高さ差依拠トレイ高さ取得部を構成し、 パレッ ト 2 0 0に搭载さ れたトレイ 5 0の高さに応じてへッド昇降装置 1 0 4を制御し、 装着へッド 6 0 の下降端位置を制御する部分が高さ制御部を構成している。 また、 制御装置 5 3 0のベルト駆動モータ 4 3 4を制御し、 パレット 2 0 0の搬送速度を制御する部 分がパレット搬送用加減速度制御部を構成し、 ラック昇降モータ 3 0 2を制御 し、 ラック 2 0 2の昇降速度を制御する部分がラック昇降用加減速度制御部を構 成している。 さらに、 制御装置 5 3 0のラック昇降装置 3 0 4の複数の停止位置 を決定する部分が停止位置決定部を構成し、 その決定された停止位置に基づレ、て ラック昇降装置 2 0 4を制御する部分およびラック昇降装置作動位置記憶部を構 成するラック昇降装置作動位置メモリと共に昇降制御部を構成し、 部品収容器保 持部検出装置を構成する乗り移りセンサ 3 1 2と共に高さ合わせ装置を構成して レ、る。  As is apparent from the above description, in the present embodiment, the height of the tray 50 supported by the palette 200 of the control device 530 with respect to the palette 200 and the height of the palette 200 are determined. Is the height of all the trays 50 mounted on the pallet 200 and the height of the tray 50 for supplying the circuit components 20 with respect to the palette 200 is calculated as follows. A tray height acquisition unit based on the tray pallet height difference is configured together with the tray height confirmation sensor 550 as a height detection device, and the height is adjusted according to the height of the tray 50 mounted on the pallet 200. A portion that controls the head lifting device 104 and controls the lower end position of the mounting head 60 constitutes a height control unit. In addition, the part that controls the belt drive motor 4 3 4 of the control device 530 and controls the transfer speed of the pallet 200 forms a pallet transfer acceleration / deceleration control unit and controls the rack elevating motor 3 02 The portion for controlling the vertical speed of the rack 202 constitutes a rack vertical acceleration / deceleration control unit. Further, a part for determining a plurality of stop positions of the rack elevating device 304 of the control device 530 forms a stop position determining unit, and based on the determined stop position, a rack elevating device 204 The elevator control unit is configured together with the part that controls the rack and the rack elevating device operating position memory that configures the rack elevating device operating position storage unit, and the height is adjusted together with the transfer sensor 3 1 2 that configures the component container holding unit detection device. Configure the device.
上記実施形態において、 搬送コンペャ 2 0 6のコンペャベルト 4 0 4, 4 0 6 の支持部 4 2 4は、 ガイドプーリ 4 2 8によって支持されるようにされていた 力 図 2 2に示すように、 ベルト支持部材としてのガイドレール 6 0 0によって 支持させるようにしてもよい。 In the above embodiment, the conveyor belts 404, 406 of the transport conveyor 206 are provided. The support portion 424 of the guide rail 428 may be supported by a guide rail 600 as a belt support member, as shown in FIG.
本発明の別の実施例である電子回路部品供給装置を備えた電子回路部品装着機 を図 2 3ないし図 2 7に基づいて説明する。 本電子回路部品供給装置はトレイ型 部品供給装置であり、 パレット, 相対移動阻止装置, 搬送コンペャの保持具, 搬 送コンペャによるパレツトの移動を案内する案内装置, 搬送コンペャの一対のコ ンべャベルトを支持するベルト支持部材が図 1ないし図 2 1に示す実施形態のト レイ型部品供給装置 2 6と異なっている。 これら以外の部分は、 トレィ型部品供 給装置 2 6およびそれを含む電子回路部品装着機と同様に構成されており、 説明 を省略する。 また、 前記実施形態の構成要素と同じ作用を成す構成要素には同じ 符号を付して対応関係を示し、 説明を省略する。  Another embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 27. The electronic circuit component supply device is a tray-type component supply device, which includes a pallet, a relative movement prevention device, a holder for the transport conveyor, a guide device for guiding the movement of the pallet by the transport conveyor, and a pair of conveyor belts of the transport conveyor. The belt supporting member for supporting the tray type component supply device is different from the tray type component supply device 26 of the embodiment shown in FIGS. The other parts are configured in the same manner as the tray type component supply device 26 and the electronic circuit component mounting machine including the same, and the description is omitted. Also, components having the same functions as the components of the above-described embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the corresponding relationships are shown, and the description is omitted.
パレッ ト 6 4 0および相対移動阻止装置たるパレツ ト保持装置 6 5 0を説明す る。 パレツト保持装置 6 5 0は、 図 2 3および図 2 4に示すように、 前記パレッ ト把持装置 3 2 0と同様にラック 6 5 2に設けられている。 ラック 6 5 2は、 前 記ラック 2 0 2とほぼ同様に構成されており、 パレット保持装置 6 5 0は、 ラッ ク本体 6 5 4の、 複数対のレール 6 5 6の各対に対応する部分にそれぞれ設けら れている。 これら複数のパレツト保持装置 6 5 0はそれぞれ、 部品収容器可動保 持部材としてのパレツト保持ピン 6 6 0, 部品収容器固定保持部材の部品収容器 平行方向保持面たるパレット保持面 6 6 2およぴパレット保持ピン移動装置 6 6 4を含む。  The pallet 640 and the pallet holding device 650 as a relative movement preventing device will be described. As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the pallet holding device 65 is provided on the rack 652 in the same manner as the pallet holding device 320. The rack 652 has almost the same configuration as the rack 202, and the pallet holding device 650 corresponds to each pair of the plurality of pairs of rails 6556 of the rack body 654. Each part is provided. The plurality of pallet holding devices 65 0 are respectively a pallet holding pin 660 as a component container movable holding member, a pallet holding surface 66 2, which is a component holder parallel holding surface of the component container fixed holding member. Includes pallet holding pin moving device 6 6 4.
パレツト保持ピン移動装置 6 6 4は、 複数のパレツト保持ピン 6 6 0に共通の ピン駆動部材 6 6 8および駆動源としてのエアシリンダ 6 7 0を含む。 ラック本 体 6 5 4の一対の側壁 6 7 2の一方の外面には、 図 2 3に示すように、 取付部材 6 7 4が上下方向に設けられるとともに、 側壁 6 7 2との間に、 ピン駆動部材 6 6 8が、 レール 6 5 6のパレツト 6 4 0を下方から支持する支持面 6 7 6に平行 な方向であって、 ラック 6 5 2の幅方向ないし左右方向 (支持面 6 7 6に平行な 平面内においてレール 6 5 6の長手方向に直角な方向) に移動可能に配設されて いる。 ピン駆動部材 6 6 8は長い板状を成し、 上下方向において複数対のレール 6 5 6の全部にわたって配設され、 取付部材 6 7 4に取り付けられたエアシリン ダ 6 7 0により移動させられ、 他方の側壁 6 7 2側であって、 パレツト保持面 6 6 2に接近, 離間させられる。 ピン駆動部材 6 6 8の移動は、 一対ずつの案内部 材たるガイドロッド 6 7 8およびガイドプロック 6 8 0 (図 2 3には 1つずつ図 示されている) を含む案内装置 6 8 2により案内される。 The pallet holding pin moving device 666 includes a pin driving member 668 common to the plurality of pallet holding pins 660 and an air cylinder 670 as a driving source. As shown in FIG. 23, mounting members 674 are provided on one outer surface of the pair of side walls 672 of the rack body 654 in a vertical direction, and between the side walls 672. The direction in which the pin driving member 668 is parallel to the support surface 676 supporting the pallet 6400 of the rail 656 from below, and the width direction or the left-right direction of the rack 652 (support surface 6 (In the direction parallel to the longitudinal direction of the rails 656 in a plane parallel to 6). The pin drive member 6 6 8 has a long plate shape, and a plurality of pairs of rails in the vertical direction It is disposed over the entirety of 656 and is moved by an air cylinder 670 mounted on the mounting member 670, and approaches and separates from the pallet holding surface 662 on the other side wall 672 side. Let me do. The movement of the pin driving member 6 6 8 is performed by a guide device 6 8 2 including a pair of guide members 6 8 8 and a guide block 6 8 0 (one is shown in FIG. 23). Guided by
複数のパレツト保持装置 6 5 0の各パレツト保持ピン 6 6 0は、 図 2 4に一部 を示すように、 ピン駆動部材 6 6 8の前記複数対のレール 6 5 6の各々に対応す る部分にそれぞれ、 ラック 6 5 2の左右方向に平行な方向に直線状に相対移動可 能に嵌合されている。 パレッ ト保持ピン 6 6 0は、 図 2 3に示すように、 本実施 例では、 横断面形状が円形を成し、 そのラック 6 5 2側の端部である先端部は円 錐状の係合部 6 8 6とされている。 パレツト保持ピン 6 6 0は、 ピン駆動部材 6 6 8との間に配設された付勢手段の一種である弾性部材としてのばね部材たる圧 縮コイルスプリング 6 8 8により、 ピン駆動部材 6 6 8に対して、 ピン駆動部材 6 6 8からラック 6 5 2側に突出する向きであって、 パレット 6 4 0に接近する 向きに付勢されるとともに、 側壁 6 7 2を厚さ方向に貫通して形成された開口 6 9 0に相対移動可能に嵌合されており、 図 2 3に実線で示すように、 ラック本体 6 5 4内に突出することができ、 レール 6 5 6の支持面 6 7 6よりやや上側の部 分に突出する。 スプリング 6 8 8の付勢によるパレッ ト保持ピン 6 6 0の移動限 度は、 本実施形態では、 パレッ ト保持ピン 6 6 0に設けられて規定部を構成する 止め輪 6 8 9がピン駆動部材 6 8 8に設けられて規定部を構成する当接部 6 9 2 に当接することにより規定される。  Each of the pallet holding pins 660 of the plurality of pallet holding devices 650 corresponds to each of the plurality of pairs of rails 656 of the pin driving member 668, as partially shown in FIG. Each part is fitted linearly and relatively movably in a direction parallel to the left-right direction of the rack 652. As shown in FIG. 23, in the present embodiment, the pallet holding pin 660 has a circular cross-sectional shape, and the end of the rack 652 on the side of the rack 652 has a conical shape. The joint is 6 8 6. The pallet holding pin 660 is provided with a pin driving member 66 by a compression coil spring 688 serving as a spring member as an elastic member which is a kind of biasing means disposed between the pin driving member 668 and the pin driving member 668. 8 is urged in the direction that it protrudes from the pin drive member 6 6 8 to the rack 65 2 side and approaches the pallet 6 40, and penetrates the side wall 6 72 in the thickness direction. As shown by a solid line in FIG. 23, it can protrude into the rack body 654, and can be supported by the support surface of the rail 656. 6 7 Protrudes slightly above 6. In the present embodiment, the movement limit of the pallet holding pin 660 due to the bias of the spring 688 is such that the retaining ring 689 provided on the pallet holding pin 660 and constituting a prescribed portion is driven by a pin. It is defined by abutting on the abutting portion 692 provided on the member 688 and constituting the defining portion.
複数のパレツト保持ピン 6 6 0は、 ピン駆動部材 6 6 8がエアシリンダ 6 7 0 によって移動させられることにより一斉に移動させられ、 パレッ ト 6 4 0を保持 する保持位置と、 ノ レット 6 4 0を解放する解放位置とに移動させられる。 前記 パレット保持面 6 6 2は、 本実施例では、 ラック本体 6 5 4の他方の側壁 6 7 2 の支持面 6 7 6に直角な面により構成され、 複数対のレール 6 5 6の各々につい て設けられている。 側壁 6 7 2のパレツト保持面 6 6 2が設けられた部分が部品 収容器固定保持部材を構成している。  The plurality of pallet holding pins 660 are simultaneously moved by the pin driving member 668 being moved by the air cylinder 670, and a holding position for holding the pallet 640 and a knurl 640 are provided. It is moved to the release position to release 0. In this embodiment, the pallet holding surface 662 is formed by a surface perpendicular to the supporting surface 676 of the other side wall 672 of the rack body 654. It is provided. The portion of the side wall 672 where the pallet holding surface 662 is provided constitutes a component container fixing and holding member.
ノ レット 6 4 0には、 図 2 3および図 2 5に示すように、 一対のレール 7 0 0 の一方の、 パレット搬送方向に平行な方向のほぼ中央に、 横断面形状が V字形を 成す係合溝 7 0 2が上下方向に貫通して設けられている。 As shown in FIG. 23 and FIG. 25, the pair of rails 700 An engagement groove 72 having a V-shaped cross section is provided substantially vertically in the center of the one parallel to the pallet conveyance direction.
パレツト保持装置 6 5 0がパレツト 6 4 0を保持せず、 解放した状態では、 ピ ン駆動部材 6 6 8が、 ラック 6 5 2から最も離間した後退端位置に位置させら れ、 ノ レツト保持ピン 6 6 0力 図 2 3に二点鎖線で示すように、 係合部 6 8 6 が係合溝 7 0 2から抜け出させられ、 開口 6 9 0内に退避させられた解放位置に 位置させられる。 この状態では、 ノ レッ ト保持ピン 6 6 0はパレット 6 4 0のレ ール 7 0 0と干渉せず、 ノ レッ ト 6 4 0のラック 6 5 2への出入れを許容する。 ノ レツト保持ピン 6 6 0と取付部材 6 7 4との干渉は、 取付部材 6 7 4に設けら れ.た開口 7 1 0により回避される。  In a state where the pallet holding device 650 does not hold the pallet 640 and is released, the pin driving member 668 is located at the retreat end position furthest away from the rack 652, and the pallet holding is performed. Pin 660 force As shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 23, the engaging portion 686 is disengaged from the engaging groove 702 and is located at the release position retracted into the opening 690. Can be In this state, the knowledge retaining pins 660 do not interfere with the sights 700 of the pallet 640, and allow the knowledge 640 to enter and exit the rack 652. Interference between the knurling pin 660 and the mounting member 674 is avoided by the opening 710 provided in the mounting member 674.
パレツト保持装置 6 5 0力 一対のレール 7 0 0がー対のレール 6 5 6上に載 置され、 支持面 6 7 6により下方から支持'されたパレット 6 4 0を保持する際に は、 ピン駆動部材 6 6 8がエアシリンダ 6 8 0により前進させられ、 複数のパレ ット保持ピン 6 6 0が一斉に前進させられ、 ラック本体 6 5 4内に突出させられ て係合溝 7 0 2に嵌入させられる。 この際、 パレッ ト保持ピン 6 6 0と係合溝 7 0 2とに前後方向 (レール 6 5 6に平行な方向) の位置ずれがあっても、 係合部 6 8 6および係合溝 7 9 2のそれぞれの傾斜面の作用により係合部 6 8 6が係合 溝 7 0 2に嵌入し、 一対のレール 7 0 0の他方をパレット保持面 6 6 2に押し付 ける。 パレット保持ピン 6 6 0 , パレツト保持面 6 6 2はそれぞれ、 支持面 6 7 6に平行な方向から、 パレッ ト 6 4 0の一対のレーノレ 7 0 0の各々に係合して、 パレッ ト 6 4 0の支持面 6 7 6に平行な方向 (前後方向および幅方向) の移動を 阻止し、 パレット保持ピン 6 6 0はパレット保持面 6 6 2と共にパレッ ト 6 4 0 を保持してラック 6 5 2に固定する。 この状態では、 パレッ ト 6 4 0がパレツ ト 保持面 6 6 2により左右方向において位置決めされる。 パレツト保持面 6 6 2 は、 パレッ ト位置決め面でもある。  Pallet holding device 6 5 0 force When holding a pair of rails 7 0 0 on a pair of rails 6 5 6 and supporting a pallet 6 4 0 supported from below by a support surface 6 7 6 The pin driving member 668 is advanced by the air cylinder 680, and the plurality of pallet holding pins 660 are simultaneously advanced, and are protruded into the rack body 654 to engage with the engagement groove 70. Inserted into 2. At this time, even if the pallet holding pin 660 and the engaging groove 702 are misaligned in the front-rear direction (direction parallel to the rail 656), the engaging portion 686 and the engaging groove The engaging portions 686 are fitted into the engaging grooves 720 by the action of the respective inclined surfaces 92, and the other of the pair of rails 700 is pressed against the pallet holding surface 662. The pallet holding pin 660 and the pallet holding surface 662 engage with each of the pair of pallets 700 of the pallet 640 from a direction parallel to the supporting surface 676 to form the pallet 6. The movement of the pallet holding pin 660 along with the pallet holding surface 626 holds the pallet 6 5 Fix to 2. In this state, the pallet 640 is positioned by the pallet holding surface 662 in the left-right direction. The pallet holding surface 662 is also a pallet positioning surface.
パレッ ト 6 4 0のラック 6 5 2への出し入れは、 例えば、 作業者により行わ れ、 ラック 6 5 2全体が部品供給位置から外れた位置、 例えば、 部品供給位置よ り上方のパレツト出し入れ領域ないしパレツト収納作業領域へ移動させられた状 態で行われる。 パレッ ト出し入れ領域の前部 (搬送コンペャ側の部分) には、 図 示は省略するが、 パレット 6 4 0の、 レール 6 5 6の長手方向に平行な方向にお いてラック 6 5 2への収納端位置を規定する収納端位置規定部材が前記フレーム 3 0 0と同様のフレーム (図示省略) に位置を固定し、 ラック 6 5 2の複数対の レール 6 5 6の全部にわたって設けられている。 作業者は台車の後ろ側 (搬送コ ンべャとは反対側) の扉を開けてレール 6 5 6上にパレット 6 4 0を載せ、 収納 端位置規定部材によって規定されるまでパレツト 6 4 0を前進させ、 棚にパレッ ト 6 4 0を収納する。 収納後、 台車の扉を閉めれば、 パレット 6 4 0が前後方向 において位置決めされる。 このように位置決めされた状態では、 パレッ ト 6 4 0 の係合溝 7 0 2とパレツト保持ピン 6 6 0との前後方向の位置がほぼ一致し、 パ レッ ト保持ピン 6 6 0が前進させられて係合溝 7 3 2に嵌入し、 パレッ ト 6 4 0 を保持することができる。 部品供給位置には収納端位置規定部材は設けられてお らず、 パレッ ト 6 4 0の搬送コンペャへの移載が妨げられることはない。 また、 ラック昇降方向におレ、て収納端位置規定部材が設けられていない領域の後部に は、 パレッ ト 6 4 0のラック 6 5 2への収納を阻止する収納阻止部材が設けら れ、 収納端位置が規定されない状態では、 パレツト 6 4 0のラック 6 5 2への収 納が行われないようにされている。 The pallet 640 can be moved in and out of the rack 652 by, for example, an operator, and the entire rack 652 is deviated from the component supply position, for example, the pallet access area above the component supply position. It is performed in a state where it is moved to the pallet storage work area. The front of the pallet loading / unloading area (portion on the conveyor side) Although not shown, the storage end position defining member that defines the storage end position of the pallet 640 in the rack 652 in a direction parallel to the longitudinal direction of the rail 656 is the same as the frame 300. The position is fixed on a similar frame (not shown), and the rack is provided over the entire pair of rails 656 of the rack 652. The operator opens the door on the back side of the cart (opposite the conveyor), places the pallet 640 on the rail 656, and pallets until it is specified by the storage end position defining member. Forward and store pallet 640 on the shelf. After storage, if the door of the cart is closed, the pallet 640 is positioned in the front-back direction. In such a position, the engagement groove 720 of the pallet 64 and the pallet holding pin 660 almost coincide with each other in the front-rear direction, and the pallet holding pin 660 is moved forward. Then, the pallet 640 can be held in the engagement groove 732 to hold the pallet 640. The storage end position defining member is not provided at the component supply position, and the transfer of the pallet 64 to the transport conveyor is not hindered. Further, at the rear of the area where the storage end position defining member is not provided in the rack elevating direction, a storage preventing member for preventing the pallet 64 from being stored in the rack 652 is provided, When the storage end position is not specified, the pallet 640 is not stored in the rack 652.
ピン駆動部材 6 6 8の前進端位置は、 パレツト保持ピン 6 6 0が係合溝 7 0 2 に嵌入し、 係合溝 7 0 2の溝側面に係合することが予定された位置より更に前進 した位置に設定されており、 ピン駆動部材 6 6 8の余分な移動は、 スプリング 6 8 8が圧縮され、 ピン駆動部材 6 6 8とパレッ ト保持ピン 6 6 0とが相対移動す ることにより許容される。 そのため、 複数のパレツト保持ピン 6 6 0は一斉に前 進させられるが、 ラック 6 5 2やパレット 6 4 0等の製造誤差や組付誤差等によ り、 複数のパレツト保持ピン 6 6 0の各々について、 係合溝 7 0 2に嵌入し、 パ レット 6 4 0をラック 6 5 2に固定するのに要する前進距離が異なっていても、 全部のパレッ ト保持ピン 6 6 0が係合溝 7 0 2に嵌入し、 ノ レッ ト 6 4 0をラッ ク 6 5 2に固定することができる。 パレツト保持ピン 6 6 0はスプリング 6 8 8 の付勢により係合溝 7 0 2の溝側面に押し付けられ、 パレツト保持面 6 6 2と共 にパレツ ト 6 4 0を保持した状態に保たれる。 また、 係合溝 7 0 2はパレツ ト 6 4 0を上下方向ないし厚さ方向に貫通して設けられているため、 パレツト保持ピ ン 6 6 0と係合溝 7 0 2とが係合させられるとき、 パレツト 6 4 0は上下方向に おいては拘束されない。 そのため、 例えば、 パレッ ト保持ピン 6 6 0と係合溝 7 0 2とに上下方向の位置ずれがあっても、 パレツト保持ピン 6 6 0はパレツト 6 4 0をよじらせたりすることなく、 係合溝 7 0 2に確実に嵌入することができ る。 ' パレツト保持装置 6 5 0がパレツト 6 4 0を解放する際には、 ピン駆動部材 6 6 8がエアシリンダ 6 7 0により後退させられてラック 6 5 2から離間させら れ、 複数のパレツト保持ピン 6 6 0が一斉に係合溝 7 0 2カゝら抜け出せられ、 係 合部 6 8 6が側壁 6 7 2の開口 6 9 0内に退避させられて、 パレッ ト 6 4 0のラ ック 6 5 2からの引出しが可能とされる。 The forward end position of the pin driving member 668 is further than the position at which the pallet holding pin 660 fits into the engaging groove 720 and is to be engaged with the groove side surface of the engaging groove 702. The pin drive member 668 is set to the advanced position, and extra movement of the pin drive member 668 causes the spring 688 to be compressed and the pin drive member 668 to move relative to the pallet holding pin 660 Allowed. For this reason, the plurality of pallet holding pins 660 are moved forward simultaneously, but due to a manufacturing error or an assembly error of the rack 652 or the pallet 640, etc., the plurality of pallet holding pins 660 are not moved. In each case, even if the advance distance required to fit into the engaging groove 720 and fix the pallet 640 to the rack 652 is different, all the pallet holding pins 660 are engaged. It can be fitted into the 702, and the knurl 640 can be fixed to the rack 652. The pallet holding pin 660 is pressed against the side surface of the engagement groove 702 by the bias of the spring 688, and the pallet 640 is held together with the pallet holding surface 662. . Further, since the engaging groove 720 is provided to penetrate the pallet 64 in the vertical direction or the thickness direction, the pallet holding pin is provided. When the pin 660 and the engaging groove 702 are engaged, the pallet 640 is not restrained in the vertical direction. Therefore, for example, even if there is a vertical displacement between the pallet holding pin 660 and the engaging groove 702, the pallet holding pin 660 does not twist the pallet 640, The engagement groove 72 can be securely fitted. '' When the pallet holding device 650 releases the pallet 640, the pin drive member 668 is retracted by the air cylinder 670 to be separated from the rack 652, and a plurality of pallets are held. The pins 660 are simultaneously pulled out of the engagement grooves 702, and the engagement portions 686 are retracted into the openings 690 of the side walls 672, and the pallets 640 are latched. Withdrawal from ku 6 52 is possible.
搬送コンペャ 7 4 0の保持具 7 5 0および案内装置 7 5 2を図 2 5ないし図 2 7に基づいて説明する。 搬送コンべャ 7 4 0は、 図 2 5に示すように、 前記搬送 コンペャ 2 0 6と同様に一対のコンペャベルト 7 5 6, 7 5 8および周回駆動装 置 7 6 0を含むが、 一対のコンペャベルト 7 5 6, 7 5 8の支持部 7 6 2, 7 6 4はそれぞれ、 ベルト支持部材としてのガイドレール 7 6 6, 7 6 8により支持 される。 周回駆動装置 7 6 0は前記周回駆動装置 4 0 8と同様に構成されてお り、 一対のガイドレール 7 6 6 , 7 6 8はそれぞれ、 周回駆動装置 7 6 0と共に 一対の支持部材 7 7 0 , 7 7 2に取り付けられている。 ガイドレール 7 6 6, 7 The holder 75 and the guide device 752 of the conveyor 74 will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 25, the transport conveyor 740 includes a pair of conveyor belts 756, 758 and a circling drive device 760 as in the case of the transport conveyor 206. The support portions 762, 746 of the conveyor belts 756, 758 are supported by guide rails 766, 768 as belt support members, respectively. The orbital driving device 760 is configured similarly to the orbiting driving device 408, and each of the pair of guide rails 766 and 768 is provided with a pair of supporting members 7 7 together with the orbiting driving device 760. It is attached to 0, 7 72. Guide rail 7 6 6, 7
6 8は同様に構成されており、 ガイドレール 7 6 6を図 2 7に基づいて代表的に 説明する。 Reference numeral 686 has a similar configuration, and the guide rail 766 will be representatively described with reference to FIG.
ガイドレール 7 6 6により支持されるコンペャベルト 7 5 6は、 前記コンペャ ベルト 4 0 4 , 4 0 6と同様に外周面に歯を備えたタイミングベルトであり、 ガ ィ ドレール 7 6 6は、 コンペャベルト 7 5 6の平坦な内周面に接触し、 下方から 支持するベルト支持面 7 7 6と、 ベルト支持面 7 7 6の長手方向に平行な両縁に 沿ってそれぞれ設けられ、 ベルト支持面 7 7 6から直角に突出させられた規制部 The conveyor belt 756 supported by the guide rail 766 is a timing belt provided with teeth on the outer peripheral surface in the same manner as the aforementioned conveyor belts 404 and 406, and the guide rail 766 is a conveyor belt 7. The belt support surface 776, which contacts the flat inner peripheral surface of the belt 6 and supports it from below, is provided along both edges parallel to the longitudinal direction of the belt support surface 776, respectively. Regulators projecting at right angles from 6
7 7 8 , 7 8 0とを備えている。 ベルト支持面 7 7 6には、 本実施形態において は、 ポリテトラフルォロエチレンがコーティングされて低摩擦材製とされてい る。 また、 ベルト支持面 7 7 6の幅方向の中央部には、 ベルト支持面 7 7 6に開 口し、 ガイドレール 7 6 6の長手方向に平行に貫通する溝 7 8 2が設けられ、 後 述する移動部材をコンペャベルト 7 5 6に固定するためのポルトおょぴナツトと の干渉が回避されるようにされている。 コンペャベルト 7 5 6は、 周回駆動装置 7 6 0を構成するガイドプーリ 7 8 4等に巻き掛けられるとともに、 ガイドレー ル 7 6 6のベルト支持面 7 7 6上に載置され、 ベルト支持面 7 7 6によって下方 から支持されるとともに、 規制部 7 7 8 , 7 8 0によって幅方向のずれを防止さ れつつ周回させられる。 ベルト支持部材をガイドレールとすれば、 ガイドプーリ とする場合に比較してコンペャベルトのガイドに要する部品の点数が少なくて済 み、 設置が容易である。 7 7 8, 7 8 0. In the present embodiment, the belt support surface 776 is coated with polytetrafluoroethylene and made of a low-friction material. At the center in the width direction of the belt support surface 7776, a groove 7802 is formed, which is opened to the belt support surface 776 and penetrates in parallel with the longitudinal direction of the guide rail 766. Interference with a port nut for fixing the moving member described above to the conveyor belt 756 is avoided. The conveyor belt 756 is wound around a guide pulley 784 constituting the orbiting driving device 760 and the like, and is placed on the belt support surface 776 of the guide rail 766 to form the belt support surface 7. It is supported from below by 76, and is circulated around while being prevented from shifting in the width direction by the regulating portions 778, 780. If the belt support member is a guide rail, the number of parts required for guiding the conveyor belt is smaller than when a guide pulley is used, and installation is easy.
案内装置 7 5 2は、 図 2 5およぴ図 2 7に示すように、 前記一対の支持部材 7 7 0 , 7 7 2にそれぞれ取り付けられた複数ずつ、 本実施形態においては 3個ず つの回転案内部材としてのガイドローラ 7 9 0 (図 2 7には 1個のみ図示されて いる) を含む。 これら 3個ずつのガイドローラ 7 9 0はそれぞれ、 支持部材 7 7 0 , 7 7 2に、 パレット搬送平面に直角であって、 部品収容平面に直角な軸線の まわりに回転可能に取り付けられるとともに、 片側の 3個ずつのガイドローラ 7 9 0はパレツト搬送方向に平行な一直線に沿って並んで設けられている。 3個ず つのガイドローラ 7 9 0は、 搬送コンペャ 7 4 0により搬送されるパレツト 6 4 0の部品収容平面内において両側にそれぞれ、 設けられているのである。 ガイ ド ローラ 7 9 0は、 本実施例においては、 ゴムにより形成されており、 その外周面 の一部がガイドレール 7 6 6 , 7 6 8上に突出させられている。  As shown in FIG. 25 and FIG. 27, a plurality of guide devices 752 are mounted on the pair of support members 770, 772, respectively. It includes a guide roller 790 (only one is shown in FIG. 27) as a rotation guide member. Each of these three guide rollers 790 is rotatably mounted on supporting members 770, 772 about an axis perpendicular to the pallet transport plane and perpendicular to the component receiving plane, respectively. The three guide rollers 790 on one side are provided side by side along a straight line parallel to the pallet transport direction. The three guide rollers 790 are provided on both sides in the component receiving plane of the pallet 640 conveyed by the conveyer 740. In the present embodiment, the guide roller 790 is made of rubber, and a part of the outer peripheral surface thereof is projected on the guide rails 766, 768.
保持具 7 5 0は、 前記保持具 4 1 0と同様に、 一対のコンべャベルト 7 5 6, 7 5 8の支持部 7 6 2 , 7 6 4を構成する部分にそれぞれ、 長手方向の両端部を 着脱可能に固定された移動部材 8 0 0に設けられ、 コンペャベルト 7 5 6 , 7 5 8と同じ速度で移動させられる。 保持具 7 5 0は、 図 2 6および図 2 7に示すよ うに、 係合部材としての一対の係合ピン 8 0 2, 8 0 4を含み、 係合ピン 8 0 2 , 8 0 4はそれぞれ係合部材移動装置としての係合ピン移動装置 8 0 6 , 8 0 8により移動させられる。 一対ずつの係合ピン 8 0 2, 8 0 4および係合ピン移 動装置 8 0 6, 8 0 8はそれぞれ同様に構成されており、 係合ピン 8 0 2および 係合ピン移動装置 8 0 6を代表的に説明する。  Similarly to the holders 410, the holders 750 are provided at both ends of the pair of conveyor belts 756, 758 at the portions constituting the support portions 762, 746 in the longitudinal direction. The section is provided on a movable member 800 detachably fixed, and is moved at the same speed as the conveyor belts 756 and 758. As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the retainer 750 includes a pair of engagement pins 802, 804 as engagement members, and the engagement pins 800, 804 They are moved by engaging pin moving devices 806 and 808 as engaging member moving devices, respectively. The pair of engaging pins 802, 804 and the engaging pin moving device 806, 808 have the same configuration, respectively, and the engaging pin 802 and the engaging pin moving device 80, respectively. 6 will be described as a representative.
係合ピン 8 0 2は、 本実施例では、 横断面形状が円形を成し、 円錐状の係合突 部 8 1 0を備えている。 係合ピン 8 0 2は、 図 2 6および図 2 7に示すように、 移動部材 8 0 0のラック 6 5 2側の面に、 それぞれ案内部材としてのガイドレー ル 8 1 6およびガイドブロック 8 1 8を含む案内装置 8 2 0により案内されて、 パレツト搬送平面内に平行な平面内においてパレツト搬送方向と直交する方向に 移動可能に設けられるとともに、 外向きに、 すなわち係合突部 8 1 0がコンペャ ベルト 7 5 6側に位置する状態で設けられている。 In the present embodiment, the engaging pin 802 has a circular cross-sectional shape and a conical engaging protrusion. It has a unit 8 10. As shown in FIG. 26 and FIG. 27, the engaging pin 800 is provided on the rack 652 side surface of the moving member 800 with a guide rail 816 and a guide block 8 as a guide member, respectively. The pallet is guided by a guiding device 8 20 including the pallet 8 and provided so as to be movable in a direction parallel to the pallet transport direction in a plane parallel to the pallet transport plane, and outwardly, that is, the engaging projection 8 1 0 is provided on the conveyor belt 7556 side.
係合ピン 8 0 2にはまた、 図 2 7に示すように、 軸状部 8 2 6が係合ピン 8 0 2の移動方向と平行に、 かつ係合突部 8 1 0とは逆向きに設けられるとともに、 移動部材 8 0 0に設けられたブラケット 8 2 8に軸方向に相対移動可能に嵌合さ れている。 係合ピン 8 0 2は、 ブラケット 8 2 8との間に配設された付勢手段の 一種である弾性部材としてのばね部材たる圧縮コイルスプリング 8 3 0により外 向きに付勢され、 係合突部 8 1 0が前記パレット 6 4 0の前面に設けられた係合 凹部としての係合溝 8 3 2に嵌入する向きに付勢されている。 係合溝 8 3 2は、 横断面形状がほぼ三角形状を成し、 上下方向に貫通して設けられている。 スプリ ング 8 3 0の付勢による係合ピン 8 0 2の移動限度は、 軸状部 8 2 6に設けられ たストツパ部 8 3 4がブラケット 8 2 8に当接することにより規定される。 係合 ピン 8 0 2は、 スプリング 8 3 0の付勢により、 図 2 7に二点鎖線で示すように 係合溝 8 3 2に嵌入し、 パレット 6 4 0の係合溝 8 3 2が設けられた部分である 被保持部を保持した状態に保たれる。 係合ピン 8 0 2は、 ストツバ部 8 3 4によ つて移動を規定される前に係合溝 8 3 2に嵌入してパレツト 6 4 0を保持する。 スプリング 8 3 0の付勢による係合ピン 8 0 2のパレツト 6 4 0の保持は、 ピ ン解放装置 8 4 0により解放される。 ピン解放装置 8 4 0は、 本実施形態では、 駆動源としてのエアシリンダ 8 5 0および駆動部材としてのアーム 8 5 2を含 み、 前記一対の支持部材 7 7 0 , 7 7 2により保持された支持部材 8 5 4 (図 2 6参照) に設けられ、 位置を固定して設けられている。 アーム 8 5 2は、 エアシ リンダ 8 5 0により、 係合ピン 8 0 2の移動方向と平行な方向に移動させられ、 係合ピン 8 0 2がスプリング 8 3 0の付勢による移動端位置に位置する状態にお いて、 図 2 7に二点鎖線で示すように、 軸状部 8 2 6に設けられた係合部 8 5 6 の外側 (スプリング 8 3 0側) に、 係合部 8 5 6との間に隙間を残して位置する 非作用位置ないし待機位置と、 図 2 7に実線で示すように、 係合部 8 5 6に係合 し、 係合ピン 8 0 2をスプリング 8 3 0の付勢力に抗して移動させ、 係合突部 8 1 0を係合溝 8 3 2から抜け出させる作用位置とに移動させられる。 係合ピン移 動装置 8 0 6は、 これらスプリング 8 3 0およびピン解放装置 8 4 0を含む。 係 合ピン移動装置 8 0 8も同様である。 前記係合溝 8 3 2は、 図 2 5に示すよう に、 パレッ ト 6 4 0の前面の幅方向に距離を隔てた 2箇所にそれぞれ、 互いに向 かい合う状態で設けられており、 係合突部 8 1 0がコンペャベルト 7 5 6 , 7 5 8側を向いた外向きの状態で互いに逆向きに設けられた 2つの係合ピン 8 0 2, 8 0 4は、 係合ピン移動装置 8 0 6 , 8 0 8により互いに逆向きに移動させられ て係合溝 8 3 2に嵌入し、 離脱させられる。 Also, as shown in FIG. 27, the engaging pin 800 has a shaft-like portion 826 parallel to the moving direction of the engaging pin 802 and opposite to the engaging projection 810. And is fitted to a bracket 828 provided on the moving member 800 so as to be relatively movable in the axial direction. The engaging pin 802 is urged outward by a compression coil spring 830 which is a spring member as an elastic member, which is a kind of urging means provided between the bracket 828 and the engaging pin 802, and is engaged. The projection 8100 is urged in a direction to fit into an engagement groove 832 as an engagement recess provided on the front surface of the pallet 6400. The engagement groove 832 has a substantially triangular cross-sectional shape, and is provided to penetrate vertically. The limit of the movement of the engagement pin 802 due to the bias of the spring 830 is defined by the stopper 834 provided on the shaft portion 826 contacting the bracket 828. The engagement pin 8302 is fitted into the engagement groove 832 as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 27 by the bias of the spring 8330, and the engagement groove 832 of the pallet 6400 is The held portion, which is the provided portion, is held in a held state. The engagement pin 8302 fits into the engagement groove 832 before the movement is regulated by the stopper 833, and holds the palette 640. The holding of the pallet 640 of the engaging pin 802 by the bias of the spring 830 is released by the pin releasing device 840. In the present embodiment, the pin release device 840 includes an air cylinder 850 as a drive source and an arm 852 as a drive member, and is held by the pair of support members 770, 772. The support member 854 (see FIG. 26) is provided at a fixed position. The arm 852 is moved by the air cylinder 850 in a direction parallel to the moving direction of the engaging pin 802, and the engaging pin 802 is moved to the moving end position by the bias of the spring 830. In the position, as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 27, the engaging portion 8 is provided on the outer side (spring 830 side) of the engaging portion 856 provided on the shaft portion 826. Located with a gap between 5 and 6 As shown by the solid line in FIG. 27, the engaging portion 856 is engaged with the non-operating position or the standby position, and the engaging pin 802 is moved against the urging force of the spring 830. The engagement projection 810 is moved to the operation position where the engagement projection 810 comes out of the engagement groove 832. The engagement pin moving device 806 includes the spring 830 and the pin releasing device 840. The same applies to the engagement pin moving device 808. As shown in FIG. 25, the engagement grooves 832 are provided at two locations separated from each other in the width direction of the front surface of the pallet 64 so as to face each other. The two engaging pins 800, 804 provided opposite to each other with the protruding portions 810 facing outwards with the conveyor belts 756, 758 facing the engaging pin moving device 8 are provided. They are moved in opposite directions by 06 and 808, are fitted into the engagement grooves 832, and are separated.
ラック 6 5 2が昇降させられる際には、 図 2 5に示すように、 保持具 7 5 0は パレツト搬送方向においてラック 6 5 2に隣接する保持位置に位置させられ、 パ レッ ト 6 4 0の保持に備えて待機させられている。 前記アーム 8 5 2が作用位置 に位置させられ、 一対の係合ピン 8 0 2 , 8 0 4は、 係合突部 8 1 0が係合溝 8 3 2から抜け出せられてパレツト 6 4 0を解放する解放位置に位置させられてい るのである。 そのため、 パレッ ト 6 4 0は係合溝 8 3 2が設けられた部分が係合 ピン 8 0 2, 8 0 4と干渉することなく昇降させられる。 複数のパレッ ト 6 4 0 の一つが部品供給位置に位置決めされたならば、 アーム 8 5 2がエアシリンダ 8 5 0によって待機位置へ移動させられる。 それに伴って係合ピン 8 0 2 , 8 0 4 がそれぞれスプリング 8 3 0の付勢により前進させられ、 係合突部 8 1 0が係合 溝 8 3 2に嵌入させられる。 保持具 7 5 0がパレツト 6 4 0を保持する際には、 スプリング 8 3 0の付勢による係合ピン 8 0 2 , 8 0 4の移動限度がス トッパ部 8 3 4とブラケット 8 2 8との当接によって規定される前に係合突部 8 1 0が係 合溝 8 3 2の溝側面に係合し、 一対の係合ピン 8 0 2, 8 0 4が互いに逆向きに 移動させられてパレツト 6 4 0を互いに突っ張った状態で保持する状態が得られ る。 係合突部 8 1 0が係合溝 8 3 2に嵌合された後もアーム 8 5 2は移動させら れて予め設定された待機位置まで移動させられ、 アーム 8 5 2が係合部 8 5 6か ら離間させられるが、 係合ピン 8 0 2 , 8 0 4はスプリング 8 3 0の付勢により 係合溝 8 3 2に嵌入し、 パレッ ト 6 4 0を保持した状態に保たれる。 また、 ァー ム 8 5 2は係合部 8 5 6から離れ、 保持具 7 5 0がパレッ ト 6 4 0を保持して移 動することを許容する。 When the rack 652 is moved up and down, as shown in FIG. 25, the holder 750 is positioned at the holding position adjacent to the rack 652 in the pallet transport direction, and the palette 64 In preparation for the holding of The arm 852 is located at the operating position, and the pair of engaging pins 802, 804 are disengaged from the engaging projections 810 from the engaging grooves 832, so that the pallet 6400 is disengaged. It is located at the release position to release. Therefore, the portion of the pallet 640 provided with the engagement groove 832 can be moved up and down without interfering with the engagement pins 802 and 804. When one of the plurality of pallets 640 is positioned at the component supply position, the arm 852 is moved to the standby position by the air cylinder 850. Accordingly, the engaging pins 8 02 and 8 04 are respectively advanced by the bias of the spring 8 30, and the engaging projections 8 10 are fitted into the engaging grooves 8 32. When the holder 750 holds the pallet 640, the movement limit of the engaging pins 802, 804 due to the bias of the spring 830 is limited to the stopper portion 834 and the bracket 828. The engagement projection 810 engages with the groove side surface of the engagement groove 832 before being specified by the contact with the engagement groove 832, and the pair of engagement pins 800, 804 move in opposite directions. As a result, a state is obtained in which the palettes 64 are held in a state of being stretched against each other. Even after the engagement protrusion 810 is fitted into the engagement groove 832, the arm 852 is moved to a preset standby position, and the arm 852 is moved to the engagement portion. The engagement pins 800 and 804 are inserted into the engagement grooves 832 by the bias of the springs 8300, and are held in a state where the pallet 6400 is held. Dripping. Also, The arm 852 is separated from the engaging portion 856 to allow the holder 750 to hold the pallet 64 and move.
保持具 7 5 0がパレッ ト 6 4 0を保持した後、 コンべャベルト 7 5 6 , 7 5 8 が周回駆動装置 7 6 0によって周回させられ、 移動部材 8 0 0が移動させられる とともに、 保持具 7 5 0により保持されたパレッ ト 6 4 0が移動させられ、 ラッ ク 6 5 2から引き出されてコンペャベルト 7 5 6, 7 5 8に乗り移り、 搬送され る。 この際、 複数のガイドローラ 7 9 0が回転しつつパレッ ト 6 4 0の移動を案 内する。 ガイドローラ 7 9 0は、 その外周面の一部がガイドレール 7 6 6 , 7 6 8上であって、 パレッ ト 6 4 0の搬送経路内に僅かに突出させられているが、 そ の円筒面状の外周面および一対のレール 7 0 0の前端部に傾斜して設けられた案 内部 8 6 0に案内されて、 パレット 6 4 0の両側のガイドローラ 7 9 0間に、 ゴ ム製のガイドローラ 7 9 0を弾性変形させつつ進入し、 ガイドローラ 7 9 0によ り両側から挾まれて左右方向において移動を規制され、 位置決めされた状態で移 動を案内される。 パレッ ト 6 4 0は、 その左右方向においてラック 6 5 2に、 保 持具 7 5 0により保持されてラック 6 5 2のレール 7 0 0からコンペャベルト 7 5 6 , 7 5 8に移载されるとき、 両側のガイドローラ 7 9 0間にスムーズに進入 可能な位置に収納されている。 また、 ガイドレール 7 6 6, 7 6 8の支持面 7 7 6は摩擦係数が低くされており、 コンべャベルト 7 5 6, 7 5 8は摩擦が少な く、 振動少なく滑らかに周回させられ、 パレット 6 4 0は振動少なく搬送され る。  After the holder 750 holds the pallet 640, the conveyor belts 756, 758 are circulated by the circulating drive device 760, and the moving member 800 is moved and held. The pallet 640 held by the tool 750 is moved, pulled out of the rack 652, transferred to the conveyor belts 756, 758, and transported. At this time, the movement of the pallet 640 while rotating the plurality of guide rollers 790 is contemplated. The guide roller 790 has a part of its outer peripheral surface on the guide rails 766, 768, and slightly protrudes into the transport path of the pallet 640. The guide is guided by the inside 860, which is inclined at the front end of the pair of rails 700 and a pair of rails, and is made of rubber between the guide rollers 790 on both sides of the pallet 6400. The guide roller 790 enters while being elastically deformed, and is pinched from both sides by the guide roller 790 to restrict the movement in the left-right direction, thereby guiding the movement in a positioned state. The pallet 640 is held in the left and right direction by the rack 652 and is held by the holder 750, and is transferred from the rail 702 of the rack 652 to the conveyor belts 756, 758. At this time, it is housed in a position where it can enter smoothly between the guide rollers 790 on both sides. In addition, the bearing surface 776 of the guide rails 766, 768 has a low coefficient of friction, and the conveyor belts 756, 758 have low friction, are smoothly oscillated with little vibration, Pallet 640 is conveyed with less vibration.
パレット 6 4 0が部品の供給を終了し、 ラック 6 5 2に戻される際には、 移動 部材 8 0 0の移動により保持具 7 5 0が保持位置へ移動させられてパレツト 6 4 0がラック 6 5 2に収納された後、 保持具 6 5 0によるパレツト 6 4 0の保持が 解除される。 この際、 一対の係合ピン移動装置 8 0 6, 8 0 8の各アーム 8 5 2 は待機位置に位置させられており、 一対の係合ピン 8 0 2, 8 0 4の各係合部 8 5 6はそれらアーム 8 5 2の間へ進入させられる。 保持具 7 5 0の保持位置への 移動後、 アーム 8 5 2が作用位置へ移動させられるが、 その途中で係合部 8 5 6 に係合し、 係合ピン 8 0 2 , 8 0 4をスプリング 8 3 0の付勢力に抗して後退さ せ、 係合突部 8 1 0を係合溝 8 3 2から離脱させてパレット 6 4 0を解放させ る。 なお、 保持具 6 5 0によるパレッ ト 6 4 0の保持, 解放と、 パレッ ト保持装 置 6 5 0によるパレット 6 4 0の保持, 解放とのタイミング、 ラック 6 5 2の昇 降位置の位置決め等は、 前記実施形態と同様に行われるため、 説明を省略する。 なお、 部品収容器保持装置 (パレッ ト保持装置 6 5 0 ) の部品収容器平行方向 保持面 (パレッ ト保持面 6 6 2 ) は低摩擦材によって形成してもよレ、。 低摩擦材 は、 例えば、 ポリテトラフルォロエチレン製とすることができる。 When the pallet 640 completes the supply of parts and returns to the rack 652, the movement of the moving member 800 moves the holder 750 to the holding position, and the pallet 640 moves to the rack. After being stored in the 652, the pallet 640 held by the holder 650 is released. At this time, each arm 852 of the pair of engagement pin moving devices 806, 808 is located at the standby position, and each of the engagement portions of the pair of engagement pins 800, 804 is engaged. 8 5 6 is advanced between the arms 8 52. After the holder 750 is moved to the holding position, the arm 852 is moved to the operating position, but engages with the engaging portion 856 on the way, and the engaging pins 802, 804 Is retracted against the urging force of the spring 8300, the engaging projection 8100 is disengaged from the engaging groove 832, and the pallet 6400 is released. You. The timing of holding and releasing the pallet 640 by the holding tool 650 and the holding and releasing of the pallet 640 by the pallet holding device 650, and positioning the elevation position of the rack 652 And the like are performed in the same manner as in the above-described embodiment, and thus the description is omitted. Note that the holding surface (pallet holding surface 662) of the component container holding device (pallet holding device 650) in the component container parallel direction may be formed of a low friction material. The low friction material can be made of, for example, polytetrafluoroethylene.
また、 部品収容器保持装置の固定係合部材を、 パレツト保持ピン 6 6 0と同様 のパレツ ト保持ピンとしてもよい。  Further, the fixed engagement member of the component container holding device may be a pallet holding pin similar to the pallet holding pin 660.
さらに、 部品収容器保持装置の固定係合部材は、 ローラとしてもよい。 ラック のレールが設けられた部分に、 少なくとも一つのローラを、 それぞれ収容器支持 面に直角な回転軸線まわりに回転可能に、 かつ、 外周面の一部がレール上に突出 した状態で設ける。  Further, the fixed engagement member of the component container holding device may be a roller. At least one roller is provided on a portion of the rack where the rail is provided so that it can rotate around a rotation axis perpendicular to the container support surface, and a part of the outer peripheral surface protrudes above the rail.
以上、 本発明の複数の実施形態を説明したが、 本発明に係る電子回路部品供給 装置は、 複数の部品収容器保持部の各々が、 部品収容器を下方から支持する収容 器支持面を備え、 前記相対移動阻止装置が、 収容器支持面に平行な方向から前記 部品収容器の複数個所の各々に係合して、 その部品収容器の少なくとも前記部品 収容器支持面に平行な方向の移動を阻止する平行方向移動阻止装置を含むと考え ることができる。 複数の部品収容器保持部の各々に対応して設けられた複数の平 行方向移動阻止装置はそれぞれ、 相対移動阻止装置を構成する。 前記パレット把 持装置 3 2 0およぴパレツト保持装置 6 5 0が平行方向移動阻止装置の一態様で ある。 複数の部品収容器保持部の各々が、 部品収容器を下方から支持する収容器 支持面を備え、 相対移動阻止装置が、 前記収容器支持面に直角な方向から前記部 品収容器の複数個所の各々に係合して、 その部品収容器の少なくとも前記部品収 容器支持面に直角な方向の移動を阻止する直角方向移動阻止装置を含んでもよ い。  As described above, the plurality of embodiments of the present invention have been described. In the electronic circuit component supply device according to the present invention, each of the plurality of component container holders includes a container support surface that supports the component container from below. The relative movement preventing device engages each of the plurality of parts of the component container from a direction parallel to the container support surface, and moves the component container at least in a direction parallel to the component container support surface. It can be considered to include a parallel movement prevention device for preventing the movement. Each of the plurality of parallel movement preventing devices provided corresponding to each of the plurality of component container holders constitutes a relative movement preventing device. The pallet holding device 320 and the pallet holding device 65 are one embodiment of the parallel movement preventing device. Each of the plurality of component container holding portions has a container support surface for supporting the component container from below, and the relative movement preventing device is provided at a plurality of positions of the component container from a direction perpendicular to the container support surface. May be included to prevent movement in a direction perpendicular to at least the component container support surface of the component container.
上記平行方向移動阻止装置の一態様である装置は、 前記部品収容器の複数個所 の各々に係合する複数の係合部材と、 それら複数の係合部材の少なくとも 1つを 前記収容器支持面に平行な方向に移動させる係合部材移動装置とを含む。 前記パ レツト把持装置 3 2 0の一対ずつの第一, 第二把持爪 3 2 2, 3 2 4が係合部材 に相当し、 第一, 第二把持爪回動装置 3 5 2 , 3 7 4が係合部材移動装置に相当 する。 複数の係合部材は、 その少なくとも一つを静止して設けられた固定係合部 材とし、 別の少なくとも一つを前記係合部材移動装置により前記固定係合部材に 対して接近, 離間させられる可動係合部材とすることができる。 パレッ ト保持装 置 6 5 0のパレッ ト保持ピン 6 6 0が可動係合部材に、 ラック本体 6 5 4のパレ ット保持面 6 6 2が設けられた部分が固定係合部材に、 パレツト保持ピン移動装 置 6 6 4が係合部材移動装置にそれぞれ相当する。 パレツト把持装置 3 2 0は、 複数の係合部材の全部が可動係合部材である平行方向移動阻止装置の一態様であ る。 The device, which is one mode of the parallel movement prevention device, includes: a plurality of engagement members that engage with each of a plurality of locations of the component container; and at least one of the plurality of engagement members includes the container support surface. And an engaging member moving device for moving the member in a direction parallel to the moving direction. A pair of the first and second gripping claws 32 2 and 3 24 of the pallet gripping device 320 are engaged with each other. , And the first and second gripping claw rotating devices 3552 and 374 correspond to the engaging member moving device. At least one of the plurality of engaging members is a stationary engaging member provided at rest, and another at least one of the plurality of engaging members is moved toward and away from the fixed engaging member by the engaging member moving device. The movable engagement member can be used. The pallet holding pin 660 of the pallet holding device 650 is provided on the movable engaging member, and the portion of the rack body 654 provided with the pallet holding surface 662 is provided on the fixed engaging member. The holding pin moving devices 664 correspond to the engaging member moving devices, respectively. The pallet gripping device 320 is an embodiment of a parallel movement preventing device in which all of the plurality of engaging members are movable engaging members.
また、 複数の部品収容器保持部の各々に対して設けられた複数の可動係合部材 を、 それら複数の可動係合部材に共通の駆動部材と、 その駆動部材を駆動する駆 動源とを含む前記係合部材移動装置により移動させるとともに、 それら複数の可 動部材を共通の駆動部材に対して相対移動可能とし、 かつ、 各可動係合部材と共 通の駆動部材との間に各可動部材を共通の駆動部材に対して前記部品収容器に接 近する向きに付勢する付勢手段を設けることができる。 前記爪保持体 3 2 6, 3 6 0 , ピン駆動部材 6 6 8がそれぞれ共通の駆動部材に相当し、 エアシリンダ 3 4 0, 3 6 6 , 6 7 0がそれぞれ共通の駆動源に相当する。 複数の可動係合部材 をそれぞれ移動させる複数の係合部材移動装置は、 それぞれ専用の駆動部材およ ぴ駆動源を含む装置とすることもできる。 この場合、 複数の部品収容器について 個々に可動係合部材を係合させ、 係合を解除することができ、 例えば、 ラックか ら引き出されて電子回路部品を供給する部品収容器のみについて可動係合部材の 係合を解除して移動可能とし、 電子回路部品を供給しない部品収容器については 係合部材を係合させたままとすることができ、 動く恐れがない。 複数の可動係合 部材が駆動部材ぉよび駆動源を共通とする場合でも、 電子回路部品を供給する部 品収容器のみについて可動係合部材の係合を解除するようにしてもよい。 例え ば、 ラックの部品供給位置に対応する部分に、 可動係合部材の部品収容器に対す る係合を解除する係合解除装置を設ける。 例えば、 パレットがパレッ ト保持装置 6 5 0により保持されるのであれば、 パレツト保持ピン 6 6 0をスプリング 6 8 8の付勢力に抗して後退させ、 係合部 6 8 6を係合溝 7 0 2から離脱させるとと もに、 パレツト保持ピン 6 6 0がスプリング 6 8 8の付勢によりパレツト 6 4 0 に係合することを許容する離脱 ·係合許容装置を設ける。 In addition, a plurality of movable engagement members provided for each of the plurality of component container holding portions are combined with a drive member common to the plurality of movable engagement members and a drive source for driving the drive member. The movable member is moved by the engaging member moving device, and the plurality of movable members are relatively movable with respect to a common driving member, and each movable member is movable between the movable engaging member and the common driving member. An urging means for urging the member toward a common drive member in a direction approaching the component container can be provided. The claw holders 32 6 and 36 0 and the pin driving member 668 each correspond to a common driving member, and the air cylinders 34 0, 36 6 and 67 0 correspond to a common driving source. . The plurality of engagement member moving devices that move the plurality of movable engagement members, respectively, may be devices each including a dedicated driving member and a driving source. In this case, the movable engagement members can be individually engaged and disengaged with respect to the plurality of component containers. For example, only the component container that is pulled out from the rack and supplies the electronic circuit components can be moved. The engagement of the engaging member is released and the movable member is disengaged, and the component container that does not supply the electronic circuit component can keep the engaging member engaged, and there is no danger of movement. Even when the plurality of movable engagement members share the same drive member and drive source, the engagement of the movable engagement member may be released only for the component container that supplies the electronic circuit components. For example, an engagement release device for releasing the engagement of the movable engagement member with the component container is provided at a portion corresponding to the component supply position of the rack. For example, if the pallet is held by the pallet holding device 650, the pallet holding pin 660 is retracted against the urging force of the spring 688, and the engaging portion 686 is engaged. If you leave from 70 2 In addition, a disengagement / engagement permitting device that allows the pallet holding pin 660 to engage with the pallet 640 by the bias of the spring 688 is provided.
また、 本発明に係る電子回路部品供給装置は、 部品収容器の被保持部を保持し て前記一対の無端搬送部材と同じ速度で移動する前記保持具を前記被保持部を保 持した状態に保つ付勢手段と、 その付勢手段の付勢力に抗して前記保持具に前記 被保持部を解放させる保持具解放装置とを含むと考えることができる。 保持具解 放装置は、 少なくとも、 前記無端搬送部材による前記部品収容器の搬送方向にお いて位置固定に設けることができる。 前記保持具 4 1 0のスプリング 4 7 2およ ぴ保持具 7 5 0のスプリング 8 3 0がそれぞれ付勢手段に相当し、 前記チャック 駆動装置 4 7 4およびピン解放装置 8 4 0がそれぞれ保持具解放装置に相当す る。  Also, the electronic circuit component supply device according to the present invention may be configured such that the holding tool that holds the held portion of the component container and moves at the same speed as the pair of endless transport members holds the held portion. It can be considered to include an urging means for keeping, and a holder releasing device for causing the holder to release the held portion against the urging force of the urging means. The holder releasing device can be provided at least in a fixed position in the transport direction of the component container by the endless transport member. The spring 4 72 of the holder 4 10 and the spring 8 3 0 of the holder 7 5 0 correspond to biasing means, and the chuck driving device 4 7 4 and the pin release device 8 4 0 hold respectively. It is equivalent to a tool release device.
また、 前記保持具が少なくとも 1つの可動保持部材を含み、 当該電子回路部品 供給装置がその少なくとも 1つの可動保持部材を移動させる保持部材移動装置を 含むとも考えることができる。 保持部材移動装置は、 上記付勢手段および保持具 解放装置を含む。 前記一対のチヤック 4 5 8のそれぞれおよび一対の係合ピン 8 0 2, 8 0 4のそれぞれが可動保持部材に相当し、 スプリング 4 7 2およびチヤ ック駆動装置 4 7 4が保持部材移動装置を相当し、 係合ピン移動装置 8 0 6 , 8 0 8がそれぞれ保持部材移動装置に相当する。 保持部材移動装置は、 前記少なく とも 1つの可動保持部材を前記無端搬送部材による前記部品収容器の搬送方向と 交差する方向に移動させるものとすることができる。 係合ピン移動装置 8 0 6 , 8 0 8がそれぞれ、 この保持部材移動装置に相当する。  Further, it can be considered that the holder includes at least one movable holding member, and the electronic circuit component supply device includes a holding member moving device that moves the at least one movable holding member. The holding member moving device includes the urging means and the holder releasing device. Each of the pair of chucks 458 and each of the pair of engagement pins 800, 804 correspond to a movable holding member, and a spring 472 and a chuck driving device 474 are used as a holding member moving device. The engaging pin moving devices 806 and 808 each correspond to a holding member moving device. The holding member moving device may be configured to move the at least one movable holding member in a direction intersecting with the direction of transport of the component container by the endless transport member. The engaging pin moving devices 806 and 808 each correspond to the holding member moving device.
また、 前記可動保持部材を少なくとも 1対設け、 前記保持部材移動装置を、 そ れら少なくとも一対の可動保持部材を前記無端搬送部材による前記部品収容器の 搬送方向と直交する方向において互いに逆向きに移動させるものとすることがで きる。 前記一対の係合ピン 8 0 2 , 8 0 4が可動保持部材に相当し、 係合ピン移 動装置 8 0 6 , 8 0 8がそれぞれ保持部材移動装置に相当する。 保持部材移動装 置は、 一対の可動保持部材の各々に設けてもよく、 少なくとも一部を共通に設け てもよレ、。 例えば、 1つの駆動源により一対の可動保持部材を移動させる装置と することができる。 前記被保持部と前記可動保持部材との一方を凹部を有し、 他方をその凹部と嵌 合可能な突部を有し、 それら凹部と突部との係合により前記保持具が被保持部を 保持するものとすることができる。 前記把持爪 4 6 0, 4 6 2の位置決め凹部 4 6 6, 4 6 8が凹部に相当し、 取手 2 6 6の握り部 2 6 8が突部に相当し、 係合 溝 8 3 2が凹部に相当し、 係合ピン 8 0 2, 8 0 4の係合突部 8 1 0が係合突部 に相当する。 In addition, at least one pair of the movable holding members is provided, and the holding member moving device is configured to move the at least one pair of the movable holding members in directions opposite to each other in a direction orthogonal to the direction of transport of the component container by the endless transport member. It can be moved. The pair of engaging pins 800 and 804 correspond to a movable holding member, and the engaging pin moving devices 806 and 808 correspond to holding member moving devices, respectively. The holding member moving device may be provided on each of the pair of movable holding members, or at least a portion may be provided in common. For example, it can be a device that moves a pair of movable holding members by one driving source. One of the held portion and the movable holding member has a concave portion, and the other has a protruding portion that can be fitted to the concave portion. Can be held. The positioning recesses 4 6 6 and 4 6 8 of the gripping claws 4 6 0 and 4 6 2 correspond to recesses, the grips 2 6 8 of the handle 2 6 6 correspond to projections, and the engaging grooves 8 3 2 correspond to the protrusions. The engaging projections 8100 of the engaging pins 802, 804 correspond to the engaging projections.
さらに、 部品収容器移動装置による部品収容器の移動を案内する案内装置が一 対の案内部材を含む場合、 それら一対の案内部材は、 例えば、 前記部品収容平面 内において前記部品収容器の両側に、 部品収容平面と交差する軸線のまわりに回 転可能に設けられたガイドローラを含むものとすることができる。 この際、 ガイ ドローラを、 前記部品収容平面内において前記部品収容器の両側に、 それぞれ複 数ずつ、 例えば、 各片側 3個以上ずつ設け、 かつ、 各片側の複数ずつのガイド口 ーラを、 前記部品収容器の移動方向に平行な直線に沿って並んで設けることがで きる。 また、 前記ガイドローラの少なくとも前記部品収容器に接触する部分が、 ゴムまたはその類似物により形成される。 前記案内装置 7 5 2のガイドローラ 7 9 0が上記ガイドローラに相当する。  Furthermore, when the guide device for guiding the movement of the component container by the component container moving device includes a pair of guide members, for example, the pair of guide members are provided on both sides of the component container in the component storage plane. And a guide roller rotatably provided around an axis intersecting the component housing plane. In this case, a plurality of guide rollers are provided on each side of the component container in the component receiving plane, for example, three or more guide rollers are provided on each side, and a plurality of guide rollers on each side are provided. It can be provided side by side along a straight line parallel to the moving direction of the component container. In addition, at least a portion of the guide roller that contacts the component container is formed of rubber or the like. The guide roller 790 of the guide device 752 corresponds to the guide roller.
また、 搬送コンペャのコンべャベルトを内周面に多数の歯を有するタイミング ベルトとし、 その支持部をガイドレールによって支持させてもよく、 あるいは複 数のガイドプーリによって支持させてもよい。  Further, the conveyor belt of the conveyor may be a timing belt having a large number of teeth on its inner peripheral surface, and its supporting portion may be supported by a guide rail, or may be supported by a plurality of guide pulleys.
さらに、 第一把持部材駆動装置および第二把持部材駆動装置は、 複数の第一把 持部材および第二把持部材のそれぞれについて専用に設けてもよい。 それによ り、 例えば、 部品供給位置に位置決めされた部品収容器を把持する第一, 第二把 持部材のみの把持を解除して部品収容器を移動可能な状態とし、 回路部品を供給 する部品収容器以外の部品収容器はラックに固定したままとすることができる。 また、 部品収容器把持装置の第一, 第二把持部材および第一, 第二把持部材駆 動装置は、 第一, 第二把持部材が、 部品収容器に部品収容平面と交差する方向か ら係合し、 把持するものとしてもよい。  Further, the first gripping member driving device and the second gripping member driving device may be provided exclusively for each of the plurality of first gripping members and the second gripping members. As a result, for example, the gripping of only the first and second gripping members for gripping the component container positioned at the component supply position is released to make the component container movable, and the component for supplying the circuit component is provided. The component containers other than the container can be fixed to the rack. Further, the first and second gripping members and the first and second gripping member driving devices of the component container gripping device are arranged such that the first and second gripping members move from the direction intersecting the component storage plane to the component container. It may be engaged and gripped.
さらに、 トレィを振動吸収材料製としてもよい。  Further, the tray may be made of a vibration absorbing material.
また、 電子回路部品装着機は、 装着ヘッドが装着ヘッド移動装置によって X Y 座標面内の任意の位置へ移動させられる所謂 X Yロボット型の電子回路部品装着 機に限らず、 別の形態の電子回路部品装着機、 例えば、 インデックステーブル型 (あるいはロータリ型ともいう) 等、 ヘッド旋回型の電子回路部品装着機でもよ レ、。 インデックステーブル型の電子回路部品装着機は、 回転体と、 回転体を回転 させる回転体回転装置とを含み、 回転体の回転により、 回転体に保持された複数 の装着へッドがそれぞれ保持する少なくとも 1つの吸着保持具の 1つが順次、 複 数の停止位置へ移動させられ、 部品受取位置において部品供給装置から電子回路 部品を受け取り、 部品装着位置において回路基板に電子回路部品を装着するもの である。 この際、 基板保持装置は、 基板保持装置移動装置により移動させられ て、 回路基板の部品装着箇所が、 部品装着位置に位置決めされた部品保持具に対 応する位置に位置決めされる。 回転体おょぴ回転体回転装置がへッド旋回装置を 構成し、 基板保持装置移動装置と共に、 装着ヘッドと基板保持装置とを相対移動 させる相対移動装置を構成する。 へッド旋回型の電子回路部品装着機にはまた、 複数の装着へッドがそれぞれ、 共通の旋回軸線のまわりに互いに独立に回動可能 な複数の回動部材にそれぞれ設けられたものがある。 複数の回動部材には、 それ ぞれ上記旋回軸線のまわりに一周するとともに、 その一周の間に 1回以上の停止 を含み、 かつ互いに一定時間差を有する回動運動が回動運動付与装置により付与 される。 Also, in the electronic circuit component mounting machine, the mounting head is moved in XY by the mounting head moving device. Not only the so-called XY robot-type electronic component mounting machine that can be moved to any position in the coordinate plane, but also other types of electronic circuit component mounting machines, such as index table type (or rotary type) heads It can be a rotating electronic circuit component mounting machine. An index table type electronic circuit component mounting machine includes a rotating body and a rotating body rotating device for rotating the rotating body, and a plurality of mounting heads held by the rotating body are respectively held by rotation of the rotating body. At least one of the suction holders is sequentially moved to a plurality of stop positions, receives electronic circuit components from the component supply device at the component receiving position, and mounts the electronic circuit components on the circuit board at the component mounting position. is there. At this time, the board holding device is moved by the board holding device moving device, and the component mounting position of the circuit board is positioned at a position corresponding to the component holder positioned at the component mounting position. The rotating body and the rotating body rotating device constitute a head turning device, and together with the substrate holding device moving device, constitute a relative moving device for relatively moving the mounting head and the substrate holding device. Head turning type electronic circuit component mounting machines also include a plurality of mounting heads, each of which is provided on a plurality of turning members that can turn independently of each other about a common turning axis. is there. Each of the plurality of turning members makes a round around the above-mentioned turning axis, includes one or more stops during the round, and a turning motion having a certain time difference from each other by the turning motion applying device. Granted.
さらに、 電子回路部品装着機は、 未だ公開されていないが、 本出願人に係る特 願 2 0 0 2— 2 4 3 4 3 1および特願 2 0 0 2— 3 3 8 5 5 3の明細書に記載さ れているように、 複数の装着ユニットを直列に含む電子回路装着機でもよい。 こ れら装着ユニットはそれぞれ、 部品供給部, 回路基板保持部および部品装着部を 備え、 部品供給部から供給される電子回路部品を部品装着部により回路基板保持 部に保持された回路基板に装着し、 複数の装着ユニットの共同により 1枚の回路 基板への電子回路部品の装着作業を行う。 複数の装着ユニットはそれぞれモジュ ール化することができ、 電子回路部品装着機の構成変更, 装着ユニットの交換等 を容易に行うことができる。 複数の装着ュュットの各々が電子回路部品装着機で あると考えることもできる。  Further, although the electronic circuit component mounting machine has not been disclosed yet, the details of the patent application 200 0 2—2 4 3 4 3 1 and the patent application 2 0 2—3 3 8 5 5 3 As described in this document, an electronic circuit mounting machine including a plurality of mounting units in series may be used. Each of these mounting units has a component supply unit, a circuit board holding unit, and a component mounting unit, and mounts electronic circuit components supplied from the component supply unit on the circuit board held by the circuit board holding unit by the component mounting unit. Then, multiple mounting units work together to mount electronic circuit components on one circuit board. A plurality of mounting units can be modularized, making it easy to change the configuration of the electronic circuit component mounting machine and replace mounting units. Each of the plurality of mounting units can be considered as an electronic circuit component mounting machine.
以上、 本発明のいくつかの実施形態を詳細に説明したが、 これらは例示に過ぎ ず、 本発明は、 前記 〔発明の開示〕 の項に記載された態様を始めとして、 当業者 の知識に基づいて種々の変更、 改良を施した形態で実施することができる。 Although some embodiments of the present invention have been described above in detail, these are merely examples. Instead, the present invention can be carried out in various modified and improved forms based on the knowledge of those skilled in the art, including the embodiment described in the above section [Disclosure of the Invention].

Claims

請 求 の 範 囲 The scope of the claims
1 . 平面状に配置された複数の部品収容部をそれぞれ有し、 それら部品収容部の 各々に電子回路部品が 1個ずつ取出し可能に収容される複数の部品収容器と、 それら複数の部品収容器の少なくとも 1つを、 前記部品収容部が配置された部 品収容平面に平行な方向に移動可能にそれぞれ保持する複数の部品収容器保持部 を備えたラックと、 1. A plurality of component housings each having a plurality of component housings arranged in a plane, and each of the component housings accommodating one electronic circuit component so as to be able to be taken out, and a plurality of the component housings A rack provided with a plurality of component container holding portions for holding at least one of the containers movably in a direction parallel to a component receiving plane in which the component receiving portions are arranged;
そのラックを前記部品収容平面と交差する方向に昇降させるラック昇降装置 と、  A rack elevating device that raises and lowers the rack in a direction intersecting with the component storage plane;
そのラック昇降装置の停止状態において部品収容器を前記部品収容平面に平行 な方向に移動させ、 前記ラックに収納された収納位置と、 ラックから引き出さ れ、 前記部品収容部に収容された電子回路部品の取出しを許容する部品取出許容 位置とに移動させる部品収容器移動装置と  When the rack elevating device is stopped, the component container is moved in a direction parallel to the component storage plane, and the storage position stored in the rack, and the electronic circuit component pulled out of the rack and stored in the component storage unit And a parts container moving device that moves the parts
を含む電子回路部品供給装置であって、 An electronic circuit component supply device including:
前記ラック昇降装置による前記ラックの昇降時と、 前記部品収容器移動装置に よる前記部品収容器の移動時との少なくとも一方において前記部品収容器の振動 を抑制する振動抑制装置を含む電子回路部品供給装置。  An electronic circuit component supply including a vibration suppressing device that suppresses vibration of the component container at least one of when the rack is moved up and down by the rack elevating device and when the component container is moved by the component container moving device. apparatus.
2 . 前記振動抑制装置が、 前記ラックと前記複数の部品収容器の各々との間の相 対移動を、 少なくとも前記ラックの昇降時に阻止する相対移動阻止装置を含む請 求の範囲第 1項に記載の電子回路部品供給装置。  2. The claim 1 wherein the vibration suppression device includes a relative movement preventing device that prevents relative movement between the rack and each of the plurality of component containers at least when the rack is moved up and down. An electronic circuit component supply device according to claim 1.
3 . 前記複数の部品収容器保持部の各々が、 前記部品収容器を下方から支持する 収容器支持面を備え、 前記相対移動阻止装置が、 前記収容器支持面に平行な方向 から前記部品収容器の複数個所の各々に係合して、 その部品収容器の少なくとも 前記収容器支持面に平行な方向の移動を阻止する平行方向移動阻止装置を含む請 求の範囲第 2項に記載の電子回路部品供給装置。  3. Each of the plurality of component container holding portions includes a container support surface for supporting the component container from below, and the relative movement preventing device is configured to receive the component from a direction parallel to the container support surface. 3. The electronic device according to claim 2, further comprising a parallel movement preventing device that engages with each of a plurality of positions of the container to prevent the component container from moving at least in a direction parallel to the container supporting surface. Circuit component supply device.
4 . 前記部品収容器移動装置が搬送コンペャを含み、 その搬送コンペャが、 一対 の無端搬送部材と、 それら無端搬送部材を予め定められた経路に沿って周回させ る周回駆動装置と、 前記部品収容器の被保持部を保持して前記一対の無端搬送部 材と同じ速度で移動する保持具とを含み、 その保持具が前記部品収容器の被保持 O 2004/091272 4. The component container moving device includes a transport conveyor, the transport conveyor having a pair of endless transport members, a circulating drive device for rotating the endless transport members along a predetermined path, and the component housing. And a holder that holds the held portion of the container and moves at the same speed as the pair of endless transport members, wherein the holder is the holder of the component container. O 2004/091272
68  68
部を保持した状態において、 前記一対の無端搬送部材が周回駆動装置によって周 回させられるとき、 その保持具がそれら無端搬送部材と同じ速度で移動すること により、 前記部品収容器が前記ラックの部品収容器保持部から前記一対の無端搬 送部材上に移載され、 それら無端搬送部材により搬送されるようにされた構成が 前記振動抑制装置を構成する請求の範囲第 1項ないし第 3項のいずれかに記載の 電子回路部品供給装置。 When the pair of endless transport members are rotated by the orbiting driving device in a state where the parts are held, the holders move at the same speed as those of the endless transport members, so that the component container becomes a component of the rack. 4. The vibration suppressing device according to claim 1, wherein a configuration is adopted in which the transfer device is transferred from the container holding portion onto the pair of endless transport members and is transported by the endless transport members. The electronic circuit component supply device according to any one of the above.
5 . 前記保持具を前記被保持部を保持した状態に保つ付勢手段と、  5. An urging means for holding the holding tool in a state of holding the held portion,
その付勢手段の付勢力に抗して前記保持具に前記被保持部を解放させる保持具 解放装置と  A holder releasing device for causing the holder to release the held portion against the urging force of the urging means;
を含む請求の範囲第 4項に記載の電子回路部品供給装置。 5. The electronic circuit component supply device according to claim 4, comprising:
6 . 前記保持具が少なくとも一つの可動保持部材を含み、 当該電子回路部品供給 装置がその少なくとも一つの可動保持部材を移動させる保持部材移動装置を含 み、 かつ、 前記被保持部と前記可動保持部材との一方が凹部を有し、 他方がその 凹部と嵌合可能な突部を有し、 それら凹部と突部との係合により前記保持具が被 保持部を保持する請求の範囲第 4項または第 5項に記載の電子回路部品供給装 置。  6. The holder includes at least one movable holding member, the electronic circuit component supply device includes a holding member moving device that moves the at least one movable holding member, and the held portion and the movable holding member 4. The member according to claim 4, wherein one of the members has a concave portion, and the other has a protrusion that can be fitted into the concave portion, and the holder holds the held portion by engagement of the concave portion and the protrusion. Item 5. The electronic circuit component supply device according to item 5 or.
7 . 前記一対の無端搬送部材がゴムまたはその類似物から成るコンべャベルトで あり、 そのコンペャベルトが前記振動抑制装置を構成する請求の範囲第 4項ない し第 6項のいずれかに記載の電子回路部品供給装置。  7. The electronic device according to any one of claims 4 to 6, wherein the pair of endless transport members is a conveyor belt made of rubber or the like, and the conveyor belt constitutes the vibration suppression device. Circuit component supply device.
8 . 前記コンペャベルトが外周面に多数の歯を備えたタイミングベルトであり、 前記周回駆動装置が、 8. The conveyor belt is a timing belt provided with a large number of teeth on an outer peripheral surface, and the circling drive device includes:
そのタイミングベルトが巻き掛けられる 2個以上のガイドプーリと、 前記外周面の歯と嚙み合うタイミングプーリと、  Two or more guide pulleys around which the timing belt is wound, a timing pulley engaging with the teeth on the outer peripheral surface,
そのタイミングプーリを回転駆動する回転駆動装置と、  A rotation drive device for rotating the timing pulley,
前記タイミングベルトの前記部品収容器を支持する部分の内周面を支持するべ ルト支持部材と  A belt support member for supporting an inner peripheral surface of a portion of the timing belt supporting the component container;
を備えた請求の範囲第 7項に記載の電子回路部品供給装置。 The electronic circuit component supply device according to claim 7, comprising:
9 . 少なくとも前記周回駆動装置を制御する制御装置を含み、 その制御装置が前 記無端搬送部材による前記部品収容器の搬送開始時に搬送速度を滑らかに増大さ 69 9. At least a control device for controlling the orbiting drive device is included, and the control device smoothly increases the transport speed when the endless transport member starts transporting the component container. 69
せ、 搬送終了時に滑らかに減速させる加減速度制御部を含み、 その加減速度制御And an acceleration / deceleration control unit that smoothly decelerates when the transfer is completed.
• 部が前記振動抑制装置を構成する請求の範囲第 4項ないし第 8項のいずれかに記 載の電子回路部品供給装置。 The electronic circuit component supply device according to any one of claims 4 to 8, wherein the unit constitutes the vibration suppression device.
1 0 . 前記部品収容器移動装置による前記部品収容器の移動を案内する案内装置 を備え、 その案内装置が一対の案内部材を含み、 前記部品収容器の移動を、 前記 部品収容平面に直角な側面において案内し、 かつ、 前記一対の案内部材が、 前記 部品収容平面内において前記部品収容器の両側に、 部品収容平面と交差する軸線 のまわりに回転可能に設けられたガイドローラを含む請求の範囲第 1項ないし第 10. A guide device for guiding the movement of the component container by the component container moving device, the guide device including a pair of guide members, wherein the movement of the component container is perpendicular to the component receiving plane. A guide roller that guides on a side surface, and wherein the pair of guide members includes guide rollers provided on both sides of the component container in the component receiving plane so as to be rotatable around an axis intersecting the component receiving plane. Range 1 to
9項のいずれかに記載の電子回路部品供給装置。 10. The electronic circuit component supply device according to any one of items 9.
1 1 . 前記ガイドローラの少なくとも前記部品収容器に接触する部分が、 ゴムま たはその類似物により形成された請求の範囲第 1 0項に記載の電子回路部品供給 装置。  11. The electronic circuit component supply device according to claim 10, wherein at least a portion of said guide roller that contacts said component container is formed of rubber or the like.
1 2 . 前記部品収容器が、 電子回路部品を収容するトレイを支持する振動吸収材 料製のパレットを含み、 そのパレツトが振動吸収材料製である請求の範囲第 1項 ないし第 1 1項のいずれかに記载の電子回路部品供給装置。  12. The component container according to claim 1, wherein said component container includes a pallet made of a vibration absorbing material for supporting a tray for storing electronic circuit components, and the pallet is made of a vibration absorbing material. The electronic circuit component supply device described in any of the above.
1 3 . 前記パレットが、 前記振動吸収材料製の振動吸収層と、 その振動吸収層を 表裏両面側から挟む金属材料層とを含む請求の範囲第 1 2項に記載の電子回路部 品供給装置。  13. The electronic circuit component supply device according to claim 12, wherein the pallet includes a vibration absorbing layer made of the vibration absorbing material, and a metal material layer sandwiching the vibration absorbing layer from both front and back surfaces. .
1 4 . 前記振動抑制装置が、 前記パレットに支持された前記トレィを、 前記部品 収容平面に平行な方向において移動不能に拘束する拘束装置を含み、 前記金属材 料層が磁性材料層であり、 前記拘束装置が少なくとも永久磁石部を有する拘束部 材を含む請求の範囲第 1 3項に記載の電子回路部品供給装置。  14. The vibration suppressing device includes a restraining device that restrains the tray supported by the pallet immovably in a direction parallel to the component receiving plane, wherein the metal material layer is a magnetic material layer, 14. The electronic circuit component supply device according to claim 13, wherein the restraining device includes a restraining member having at least a permanent magnet portion.
1 5 . 前記振動抑制装置が、 前記ラック昇降装置と前記部品収容器移動装置との 間の相対高さ誤差と、 前記複数の部品収容器保持部間の相対高さ誤差との少なく とも一方の存在にかかわらず、 前記複数の部品収容器保持部の前記部品収容器を 保持する保持面と、 前記部品収容器移動装置の部品収容器を支持する支持面との 高さを合わせる高さ合わせ装置を含む請求の範囲第 1項ないし第 1 4項のいずれ かに記載の電子回路部品供給装置。  15. The vibration suppressing device is configured to perform at least one of a relative height error between the rack elevating device and the component container moving device and a relative height error between the plurality of component container holding units. Regardless of the presence, a height adjusting device that adjusts the height of a holding surface of the plurality of component container holding units that holds the component container and a support surface that supports the component container of the component container moving device. The electronic circuit component supply device according to any one of claims 1 to 14, comprising:
1 6 . 前記ラックの昇降方向の一位置に設けられ、 前記複数の部品収容器保持部 O 2004/091272 16. The plurality of component container holding portions provided at one position in the vertical direction of the rack. O 2004/091272
70  70
の少なくとも 1つが設定高さに到達したことを検出し、 検出信号を発する部品収 容器保持部検出装置と、 A component container holder detection device that detects that at least one of the components has reached the set height and generates a detection signal;
その部品収容器保持部検出装置が検出信号を発したときの前記ラック昇降装置 の作動位置と、 前記部品収容器移動装置の部品収容器を支持する支持面の高さと 前記設定高さとの差とに基づいて決まる複数の作動位置において前記ラック昇降 装置を停止させることによって、 前記複数の部品収容器保持部の各々の前記部品 収容器を保持する保持面を、 前記支持面と同一面内に位置させる昇降制御部と を含み、 それら部品収容器保持部検出装置および昇降制御部が、 前記部品収容器 移動装置による前記部品収容器の移動時に前記部品収容器の振動を抑制する振動 抑制装置を構成している請求の範囲第 1項ないし第 1 4項のいずれかに記載の電 子回路部品供給装置。  The operation position of the rack elevating device when the component container holding unit detection device outputs a detection signal, and the difference between the height of the support surface supporting the component container of the component container moving device and the set height. By stopping the rack elevating and lowering device at a plurality of operating positions determined on the basis of the above, the holding surface for holding the component container of each of the plurality of component container holding portions is located in the same plane as the support surface. A lifting / lowering control unit for causing the component container holding unit detection device and the lifting / lowering control unit to constitute a vibration suppressing device that suppresses vibration of the component container when the component container is moved by the component container moving device. 15. The electronic circuit component supply device according to claim 1, wherein the electronic circuit component supply device includes:
1 7 . 前記昇降制御部が、 前記部品収容器保持部検出装置が検出信号を発したと きの前記ラック昇降装置の作動位置を記憶するラック昇降装置作動位置記憶部を 備える請求の範囲第 1 6項に記載の電子回路部品供給装置。  17. The elevation control unit further includes a rack elevation device operation position storage unit that stores an operation position of the rack elevation device when the component container holding unit detection device issues a detection signal. The electronic circuit component supply device according to item 6.
1 8 . 請求の範囲第 1項ないし第 1 7項のいずれかに記載の電子回路部品供給装 置と、 18. An electronic circuit component supply device according to any one of claims 1 to 17,
電子回路部品が装着されるべき回路基板を保持する基板保持装置と、 装着ヘッドを備え、 その装着ヘッドにより、 前記部品供給装置から電子回路部 品を受け取り、 前記基板保持装置に保持された回路基板に装着する装着装置と、 少なくとも前記装着装置を制御する制御装置と  A board holding device for holding a circuit board on which electronic circuit components are to be mounted; and a mounting head, the mounting head receiving an electronic circuit component from the component supply device and holding the circuit board by the board holding device. A mounting device to be mounted on, a control device for controlling at least the mounting device
を含む電子回路部品装着機。 Electronic circuit component mounting machine.
1 9 . 前記電子回路部品供給装置の前記部品収容器がトレィを支持するパレツト を含み、 かつ、  19. The component container of the electronic circuit component supply device includes a pallet for supporting a tray, and
そのパレットに支持された全部のトレイのパレツト上における高さを取得する 高さ取得部と、  A height acquisition unit for acquiring heights of all trays supported by the pallet on the pallet;
その高さ取得部により取得された高さに基づいて前記装着へッドの前記トレイ からの電子回路部品取出し時の高さを制御する高さ制御部と  A height control unit that controls the height of the mounting head when the electronic circuit components are removed from the tray based on the height acquired by the height acquisition unit;
を含む請求の範囲第 1 8項に記載の電子回路部品装着機。 The electronic circuit component mounting machine according to claim 18, comprising:
PCT/JP2004/004731 2003-04-03 2004-03-31 Electronic circuit component supplying device and electronic circuit component mounting machine WO2004091272A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2005505230A JP4484819B2 (en) 2003-04-03 2004-03-31 Electronic circuit component supply device

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2003-100845 2003-04-03
JP2003100845 2003-04-03

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2004091272A1 true WO2004091272A1 (en) 2004-10-21

Family

ID=33156738

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2004/004731 WO2004091272A1 (en) 2003-04-03 2004-03-31 Electronic circuit component supplying device and electronic circuit component mounting machine

Country Status (3)

Country Link
JP (1) JP4484819B2 (en)
CN (1) CN100546454C (en)
WO (1) WO2004091272A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2006108373A (en) * 2004-10-05 2006-04-20 Yamaha Motor Co Ltd Pallet, component feeding apparatus and surface mounter

Families Citing this family (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2012074584A (en) * 2010-09-29 2012-04-12 Hitachi High-Technologies Corp Electronic component mounting device, and tray separation device and tray separation method
JP6259986B2 (en) * 2013-05-17 2018-01-17 パナソニックIpマネジメント株式会社 Splicing equipment
DE102019130028B4 (en) * 2019-11-07 2021-09-16 Asm Assembly Systems Gmbh & Co. Kg Handling of conveyor handcarts
KR102404214B1 (en) * 2021-02-25 2022-06-02 (주)한양씨앤씨 method for direct printing which Freeflow Conveyor type
KR102371653B1 (en) * 2021-02-25 2022-03-08 (주)한양씨앤씨 Pallet feeding device for printer which Freeflow type

Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS5237584Y2 (en) * 1974-03-29 1977-08-26
JPS62255345A (en) * 1986-02-20 1987-11-07 ノイエ・ロ−タプリント・ゲ−エムベ−ハ− Sheet conveyor for sheet processing machine
JPH02301197A (en) * 1989-05-16 1990-12-13 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Supply method of electronic components
JPH057635U (en) * 1991-07-11 1993-02-02 タキロン株式会社 Pallet
JPH10270894A (en) * 1997-03-27 1998-10-09 Sanyo Electric Co Ltd Part supply device in electronic part attaching device
JPH10275998A (en) * 1997-03-31 1998-10-13 Sanyo Electric Co Ltd Pallet for fixing electronic component housing tray
JPH11121985A (en) * 1997-10-20 1999-04-30 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Electronic component supplying device
JP2001291993A (en) * 2000-04-04 2001-10-19 Yamagata Casio Co Ltd Electronic component feeder

Family Cites Families (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH0519233U (en) * 1991-08-26 1993-03-09 新日本無線株式会社 Semiconductor element separation device
JP3064796B2 (en) * 1994-04-04 2000-07-12 松下電器産業株式会社 Electronic component supply device
JPH10335889A (en) * 1997-06-05 1998-12-18 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Method of positioning electronic component housing pallet and correcting position thereof

Patent Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS5237584Y2 (en) * 1974-03-29 1977-08-26
JPS62255345A (en) * 1986-02-20 1987-11-07 ノイエ・ロ−タプリント・ゲ−エムベ−ハ− Sheet conveyor for sheet processing machine
JPH02301197A (en) * 1989-05-16 1990-12-13 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Supply method of electronic components
JPH057635U (en) * 1991-07-11 1993-02-02 タキロン株式会社 Pallet
JPH10270894A (en) * 1997-03-27 1998-10-09 Sanyo Electric Co Ltd Part supply device in electronic part attaching device
JPH10275998A (en) * 1997-03-31 1998-10-13 Sanyo Electric Co Ltd Pallet for fixing electronic component housing tray
JPH11121985A (en) * 1997-10-20 1999-04-30 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Electronic component supplying device
JP2001291993A (en) * 2000-04-04 2001-10-19 Yamagata Casio Co Ltd Electronic component feeder

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2006108373A (en) * 2004-10-05 2006-04-20 Yamaha Motor Co Ltd Pallet, component feeding apparatus and surface mounter

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN1802888A (en) 2006-07-12
JP4484819B2 (en) 2010-06-16
CN100546454C (en) 2009-09-30
JPWO2004091272A1 (en) 2006-07-06

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP2793030B1 (en) Test tube gripper, test tube labeling unit, and test tube preparing apparatus including the same
US10793378B2 (en) Transfer apparatus and article taking-out method
KR100341290B1 (en) Part mounting machine
JPWO2005081611A1 (en) Support pin gripping device and substrate supporting device
JP5438747B2 (en) Work work system
JP2001345599A (en) Electrical component loading method, electrical component handling method, and electrical component loading equipment
JP4504770B2 (en) Tray-type component supply device and component supply system
CN114245767A (en) Robot hand, robot system, and transfer method
JP4895844B2 (en) Electronic circuit component supply and extraction method and apparatus
WO2004091272A1 (en) Electronic circuit component supplying device and electronic circuit component mounting machine
JP3802954B2 (en) Circuit component conveyor
US20190375529A1 (en) Bag conveyance method and bag conveyance apparatus
CN116351648B (en) Dispensing production line and processing method
JP6164623B1 (en) Electronic component moving device and electronic component conveying device
JP6935341B2 (en) Parts supply equipment and parts mounting equipment
CN115156885A (en) Automatic locking device and automatic assembling equipment
JP3745849B2 (en) Circuit component conveyor
JP4162741B2 (en) Circuit component mounting system
KR20230118117A (en) How to acquire robot and item dimensions
JP2003037389A (en) Electric parts feeder
JP4147543B2 (en) Circuit component mounting system
JP3970301B2 (en) Circuit component mounting system
CN218487694U (en) Automatic locking device and automatic assembling equipment
US6382390B1 (en) Electronic-component supplying apparatus and method
JP2015020762A (en) Article transportation member and article supply device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AE AG AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BW BY BZ CA CH CN CO CR CU CZ DE DK DM DZ EC EE EG ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX MZ NA NI NO NZ OM PG PH PL PT RO RU SC SD SE SG SK SL SY TJ TM TN TR TT TZ UA UG US UZ VC VN YU ZA ZM ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): BW GH GM KE LS MW MZ SD SL SZ TZ UG ZM ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HU IE IT LU MC NL PL PT RO SE SI SK TR BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GQ GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 20048091715

Country of ref document: CN

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2005505230

Country of ref document: JP

DPEN Request for preliminary examination filed prior to expiration of 19th month from priority date (pct application filed from 20040101)
122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase